[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025228342A1 - Communication method and apparatus - Google Patents

Communication method and apparatus

Info

Publication number
WO2025228342A1
WO2025228342A1 PCT/CN2025/091850 CN2025091850W WO2025228342A1 WO 2025228342 A1 WO2025228342 A1 WO 2025228342A1 CN 2025091850 W CN2025091850 W CN 2025091850W WO 2025228342 A1 WO2025228342 A1 WO 2025228342A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
node
information
functional unit
iab
switching
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/CN2025/091850
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
汪宇
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Publication of WO2025228342A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025228342A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/08Reselecting an access point

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and apparatus.
  • TN terrestrial network
  • cell handover or cell reselection is typically required due to the movement of terminal devices, while nodes providing access functions (such as network equipment) are generally considered to be stationary or infrequently moving. For example, the movement of network equipment is not considered during cell handover and cell reselection.
  • This application provides a communication method and apparatus to achieve efficient mobility management in a frequently moving network system.
  • a communication method includes: a first node receiving switching information from a second node, the switching information being used to instruct a first functional unit and a second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to a third node; and the first node switching the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node according to the switching information.
  • the first node is used to provide backhaul access function
  • the second and third nodes are used to provide core network connection function
  • the first functional unit of the first node is used to provide backhaul function
  • the second functional unit of the first node is used to provide access function.
  • the second node informs the first node via handover information to switch the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node.
  • the access handover of the first functional unit and the access handover of the second functional unit of the first node are performed using the same handover procedure. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, reduce resource consumption, shorten mobility interruption latency, and improve handover efficiency, thus achieving efficient mobility management.
  • the handover information includes at least one of the following: first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information; the first information is used to configure the backhaul adaptation protocol address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the fourth information is used to configure backhaul radio link control; the fifth information is used to configure the F1 application protocol; and the sixth information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the second node will inform the first node of at least one of the following information: the backhaul adaptation protocol address reserved by the third node for the first functional unit of the first node and the second functional unit of the first node, the transmission path from the second node to the third node, the resources on the transmission path, the backhaul radio link control configuration, the F1 application protocol configuration, or the configuration of the second functional unit of the first node, so that the first node can perform access switching based on this information and ensure successful access switching.
  • the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: a list of physical cell identifiers, resource configuration information, tracking area identifier configuration information, or tracking area code configuration information.
  • the second node will inform the first node of at least one of the physical cell identifier list, resources, tracking area identifier or tracking area code configured by the third node, thereby ensuring that the first node's access handover is successful.
  • the terminal device or sub-node served by the first node switches from the second node to the fourth node, whereby the fourth node is used to provide core network connectivity or to provide backhaul access functionality.
  • the second node can trigger the terminal device or sub-node served by the first node to switch from the second node to the fourth node.
  • the first node before receiving handover information from the second node, the first node sends capability indication information to the second node.
  • the capability indication information is used to indicate whether the first node supports or does not support the access handover of the first node's first functional unit and/or the first node's second functional unit.
  • the first node can report or broadcast its node capabilities to the second node. These capabilities indicate whether the first node supports access handover for its first functional unit and/or second functional unit. Specifically, the first node may support access handover for both the first and second functional units simultaneously, or it may support only the first functional unit, or only the second functional unit, or it may not support either. Thus, the second node will only determine whether an access handover to the first node is necessary if the first node supports access handover for both the first and/or second functional units.
  • a communication method includes: a second node sending handover information to a first node, the handover information being used to instruct the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to a third node.
  • the first node is used to provide backhaul access functionality
  • the second and third nodes are used to provide core network connectivity functionality
  • the first functional unit of the first node is used to provide backhaul functionality
  • the second functional unit of the first node is used to provide access functionality.
  • the second node informs the first node via handover information to switch the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node.
  • the access handover of the first functional unit and the access handover of the second functional unit of the first node are performed using the same handover procedure. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, lower resource consumption, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thus achieving efficient mobility management.
  • the second node before sending the handover information to the first node, the second node sends a handover request information to the third node, which requests that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node be switched from the second node to the third node; the second node receives a handover response information from the third node, which indicates that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node are permitted to switch from the second node to the third node.
  • the second node since the second node provides access services to the first node, it can determine whether an access handover to the first node is necessary. For example, the second node can make a handover decision based on measurement reports reported by the first node.
  • the second node can request the third node to switch the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node through a handover request message, so that the third node can perform handover admission control.
  • the third node After receiving the handover request information, the third node will perform handover admission control to decide whether to allow the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node, and inform the second node through the handover response information to allow the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node.
  • the second node before sending the handover information to the first node, the second node receives capability indication information from the first node, which is used to indicate whether the first node supports or does not support the first functional unit and/or the second functional unit of the first node for access handover.
  • the first node can report or broadcast its node capabilities to the second node. These capabilities indicate whether the first node supports access handover for its first functional unit and/or second functional unit. Specifically, the first node may support access handover for both the first and second functional units simultaneously, or it may support only the first functional unit, or only the second functional unit, or it may not support either. Thus, the second node will only determine whether an access handover to the first node is necessary if the first node supports access handover for both the first and/or second functional units.
  • the switching request information includes first identification information and second identification information; the first identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the first node, and the second identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the first identification information and the second identification information are used to indicate the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node, so that the third node can confirm that the switching request is for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the handover request information may further include at least one of the following: third identification information, first context information, fourth identification information, or second context information; the third identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the terminal device served by the first node; the first context information is used to indicate the context of the terminal device served by the first node; the fourth identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the child node served by the first node and the identifier of the second functional unit of the child node served by the first node; the second context information is used to indicate the context of the child node served by the first node.
  • the third identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the terminal device served by the first node
  • the first context information is used to indicate the context of the terminal device served by the first node
  • the fourth identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the child node served by the first node and the identifier of the second functional unit of the child node served by the first node
  • the second context information is used to
  • the switch request information includes third identification information and/or first context information.
  • the third identification information and/or first context information are used to inform the third node of the terminal device's request to switch from the second node to the third node, enabling the third node to perform relevant access control.
  • the switch request information includes fourth identification information and/or second context information.
  • the fourth identification information and/or second context information inform the third node of the child node's request to switch from the second node to the third node, so that the third node can perform the relevant admission control.
  • the handover response information includes at least one of the following: first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information; the first information is used to configure the backhaul adaptation protocol address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the fourth information is used to configure backhaul radio link control; the fifth information is used to configure the F1 application protocol; and the sixth information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the third node needs to reserve at least one of the following information for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform the access handover: backhaul adaptation protocol address, transmission path from the second node to the third node, resources on the transmission path, backhaul radio link control configuration, F1 application protocol configuration, or configuration of the second functional unit of the first node. This information is used by the first node to perform the access handover and ensure that the access handover is successful.
  • the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: a list of physical cell identifiers, resource configuration information, tracking area identifier configuration information, or tracking area code configuration information.
  • the third node needs to configure at least one of the following for the second functional unit of the first node during the handover admission control process: physical cell identifier list, resources, tracking area identifier, or tracking area code, in order to ensure that the first node can successfully perform the access handover.
  • a communication method includes: a third node receiving a handover request message from a second node, the handover request message being used to request the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to be switched from the second node to the third node; the third node sending a handover response message to the second node, the handover response message being used to indicate permission for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to be switched from the second node to the third node.
  • the second node in this embodiment can determine whether an access handover to the first node is required.
  • the second node decides that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to be switched from the second node to the third node
  • the second node requests the third node to switch the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node through a handover request message, so that the third node can perform handover admission control.
  • the access handover of the first functional unit and the access handover of the second functional unit of the first node are performed together using the same handover process. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, reduce resource overhead, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thereby achieving efficient mobility management.
  • a communication method includes: a first node receiving condition switching information from a second node, the condition switching information being used to configure a first functional unit of the first node and a second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.
  • this embodiment informs the first node to perform conditional handover of its first and second functional units through conditional handover information.
  • conditional handover information In this way, by performing conditional handover of the first and second functional units of the first node, the conditional handover of the first and second functional units of the first node is executed together using the same handover process. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, lower resource consumption, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thereby achieving efficient mobility management.
  • the conditional handover information includes at least one of the following: handover condition information, first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information;
  • the handover condition information is used to indicate the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to meet to switch from the second node to the third node, and the third node is used to provide core network connectivity functions;
  • the first information is used to configure the backhaul adaptation protocol address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node;
  • the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node;
  • the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node;
  • the fourth information is used to configure backhaul radio link control;
  • the fifth information is used to configure the F1 application protocol; and
  • the sixth information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the second node will inform the first node of at least one of the following information: the switching conditions configured by the third node, the backhaul adaptation protocol address required for the access switching of the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node, the transmission path from the second node to the third node, the resources on the transmission path, the backhaul radio link control configuration, the F1 application protocol configuration, or the configuration of the second functional unit of the first node, so that the first node can perform access switching based on this information and ensure successful access switching.
  • the conditions indicated by the switching condition information include: the distance between the reference position of the second node is greater than a first distance threshold, and/or the distance between the reference position of the third node is less than a second distance threshold; and/or, the backhaul radio link control validity time of at least one relay node on the transmission path to the second node is less than a validity time threshold.
  • the first node can determine whether the distance between its own position and the reference position of the third node is less than the second distance threshold, in order to determine whether the conditions indicated by the switching condition information are met. When the conditions are met, the first node can execute the switching of its first functional unit and second functional unit from the second node to the third node.
  • the handover condition information indicates that at least one relay node on the transmission path to the second node has a BH-RLC validity period less than a validity period threshold
  • the first node can determine whether there is a relay node on the transmission path from the first node to the second node whose BH-RLC validity period is less than the validity period threshold, in order to determine whether the conditions indicated by the handover condition information are met.
  • the first node can execute the handover of its first functional unit and second functional unit from the second node to the third node.
  • the method further includes: if the conditions indicated by the switching condition information are met, the first node switches the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node.
  • the method before receiving condition switching information from the second node, the method further includes: the first node sending capability indication information to the second node, the capability indication information being used to indicate whether the first node supports or does not support condition switching of the first node's first functional unit and/or the first node's second functional unit.
  • the first node can report or broadcast its node capabilities to the second node. These capabilities indicate whether the first node supports conditional switching of its first functional unit and/or second functional unit. Specifically, the first node may support conditional switching of both the first and second functional units simultaneously, or it may support only the first functional unit, or only the second functional unit, or it may not support either. Thus, the second node will only determine whether a conditional switch is needed for the first node if the first node supports conditional switching of both the first and/or second functional units.
  • a communication method includes: a second node sending condition switching information to a first node, the condition switching information being used to configure a first functional unit of the first node and a second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.
  • this embodiment informs the first node to perform conditional handover of its first and second functional units through conditional handover information.
  • conditional handover information In this way, by performing conditional handover of the first and second functional units of the first node, the conditional handover of the first and second functional units of the first node is executed together using the same handover process. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, lower resource consumption, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thereby achieving efficient mobility management.
  • the method before sending condition switching information to the first node, the method further includes: the second node sending condition switching request information to the third node, the condition switching request information being used to request the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching; the second node receiving condition switching response information from the third node, the condition switching response information being used to instruct permission for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.
  • the second node since the second node provides access services to the first node, it can determine whether a conditional handover of the first node is necessary. For example, the second node can make a conditional handover decision based on measurement reports reported by the first node. When the second node decides that a conditional handover of the first node is necessary, it can request the third node to perform a conditional handover between the first node's first functional unit and its second functional unit via a conditional handover request message, so that the third node can execute conditional handover access control.
  • the third node After receiving the conditional switching request information, the third node will perform conditional switching admission control to decide whether to allow the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform conditional switching, and inform the second node to allow the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform conditional switching through conditional switching response information.
  • the method before sending condition switching information to the first node, the method further includes: the second node receiving capability indication information from the first node, the capability indication information being used to indicate whether the first node supports or does not support condition switching of the first node's first functional unit and/or the first node's second functional unit.
  • the first node can report or broadcast its node capabilities to the second node. These capabilities indicate whether the first node supports conditional switching of its first functional unit and/or second functional unit. Specifically, the first node may support conditional switching of both the first and second functional units simultaneously, or it may support only the first functional unit, or only the second functional unit, or it may not support either. Thus, the second node will only determine whether a conditional switch is needed for the first node if the first node supports conditional switching of both the first and/or second functional units.
  • condition switching request information includes first identification information and second identification information; the first identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the first node, and the second identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the first identification information and the second identification information are used to indicate the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node, so that the third node can confirm that the condition switching request is made for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node.
  • condition switching request information may further include at least one of the following: third identification information, first context information, fourth identification information, or second context information; the third identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the terminal device served by the first node; the first context information is used to indicate the context of the terminal device served by the first node; the fourth identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the child node served by the first node and the identifier of the second functional unit of the child node served by the first node; the second context information is used to indicate the context of the child node served by the first node.
  • the conditional switching request information includes third identification information and/or first context information.
  • the third identification information and/or first context information are used to inform the third node of the conditional switching configuration of the terminal device.
  • the condition switching request information includes fourth identification information and/or second context information.
  • the fourth identification information and/or second context information are used to inform the third node about configuring condition switching for that child node.
  • the conditional handover response information includes at least one of the following: handover condition information, first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information;
  • the handover condition information is used to indicate the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to meet to switch from the second node to the third node;
  • the first information is used to configure the backhaul adaptation protocol address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node;
  • the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node;
  • the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node;
  • the fourth information is used to configure backhaul radio link control;
  • the fifth information is used to configure the F1 application protocol; or, the sixth information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the third node in order to ensure that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node switch from the second node to the third node through conditional handover, the third node needs to configure at least one of the following information: the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to meet when switching from the second node to the third node; the backhaul adaptation protocol address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform access handover; the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the resources on the transmission path; the backhaul radio link control configuration; the F1 application protocol configuration; or the configuration of the second functional unit of the first node.
  • This information is used by the first node to perform conditional handover and ensure that the conditional handover is successful.
  • the conditions indicated by the switching condition information include: the distance between the reference position of the second node is greater than a first distance threshold, and/or the distance between the reference position of the third node is less than a second distance threshold; or, the backhaul radio link control validity time of at least one relay node on the transmission path to the second node is less than a validity time threshold.
  • the first node can determine whether the distance between its own position and the reference position of the third node is less than the second distance threshold, in order to determine whether the conditions indicated by the switching condition information are met. When the conditions are met, the first node can execute the switching of its first functional unit and second functional unit from the second node to the third node.
  • the handover condition information indicates that at least one relay node on the transmission path to the second node has a BH-RLC validity period less than a validity period threshold
  • the first node can determine whether there is a relay node on the transmission path from the first node to the second node whose BH-RLC validity period is less than the validity period threshold, in order to determine whether the conditions indicated by the handover condition information are met.
  • the first node can execute the handover of its first functional unit and second functional unit from the second node to the third node.
  • a sixth aspect is a communication method according to this application, comprising: a third node receiving condition switching request information from a second node, the condition switching request information being used to request a first functional unit of a first node and a second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching; the third node sending condition switching response information to the second node, the condition switching response information being used to instruct permission for the first functional unit of the first node and the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.
  • the second node in this embodiment can determine whether a conditional handover of the first node is necessary.
  • the second node requests the third node to perform the conditional handover of the first node's first and second functional units through a conditional handover request message, so that the third node can execute conditional handover admission control.
  • conditional handover of the first node's first and second functional units can be executed together using the same handover process, thereby reducing signaling overhead, reducing resource overhead, shortening mobility interruption time, and improving handover efficiency, achieving efficient mobility management.
  • a seventh aspect is a communication method according to this application, comprising: a first node receiving node reselection information, wherein the node reselection information is used to indicate at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or validity information; the type information is used to indicate the type of a second node, wherein the second node is used to provide core network connection functions; the coverage information is used to indicate the service coverage of the second node; the path information is used to indicate the transmission path of the second node; and the validity information is used to indicate the validity time of the F1 interface of the second node.
  • this embodiment assists the first node in reselecting the second node through node camp reselection information, thereby realizing node camp reselection in a frequent mobility network system and achieving efficient mobility management.
  • the method further includes: the first node sending the node residency reselection information to the child nodes or terminal devices served by the first node.
  • the child nodes or terminal devices served by the first node can reselect the second node based on the node reselection information.
  • the method further includes: the first node determining a third node based on the node relocation information, the third node being used to provide core network connectivity functions.
  • the first node determines the third node based on the node residency reselection information, and thus chooses to reside on the third node, thereby realizing node residency reselection.
  • the coverage information includes the reference location and distance threshold of the second node, and/or the service validity time information and service validity time threshold of the second node; the coverage range of the second node is the range where the distance between the second node and its reference location is less than the distance threshold; or, the coverage information includes at least one of the following: satellite ephemeris information of the second node, service validity time information and service validity time threshold of the second node, coverage area information of the second node, or reference location information of the core network anchor point associated with the second node.
  • the path information includes at least one of the following: first hop count information, second hop count information, first delay information, second delay information, first distance information, or second distance information; the first hop count information is used to indicate the number of hops on the transmission path from the node served by the second node to the second node; the second hop count information is used to indicate the number of hops on the transmission path from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node; the first delay information is used to indicate the transmission delay from the node served by the second node to the second node; the second delay information is used to indicate the transmission delay from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node; the first distance information is used to indicate the distance from the node served by the second node to the second node; the second distance information is used to indicate the distance from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node.
  • valid information includes a valid time period or a timer; the valid time period is the valid time period of the F1 interface between the second node and the nodes served by the second node; the runtime of the timer is the valid duration of the F1 interface between the second node and the nodes served by the second node.
  • a communication method includes: a second node sending node reselection information, wherein the node reselection information is used to indicate at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or validity information; the type information is used to indicate the type of the second node, which is used to provide core network connection functions; the coverage information is used to indicate the service coverage of the second node; the path information is used to indicate the transmission path of the second node; and the validity information is used to indicate the validity period of the F1 interface of the second node.
  • this embodiment assists the first node or the terminal device in reselecting the second node through node camping reselection information, thereby realizing node camping reselection in a frequent mobility network system and achieving efficient mobility management.
  • a ninth aspect is a communication method according to this application, comprising: a terminal device receiving node reselection information, wherein the node reselection information is used to indicate at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or validity information; the type information is used to indicate the type of a second node, the second node being used to provide core network connection functions; the coverage information is used to indicate the service coverage of the second node; the path information is used to indicate the transmission path of the second node; and the validity information is used to indicate the validity time of the F1 interface of the second node.
  • the node reselection information is used to indicate at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or validity information
  • the type information is used to indicate the type of a second node, the second node being used to provide core network connection functions
  • the coverage information is used to indicate the service coverage of the second node
  • the path information is used to indicate the transmission path of the second node
  • the validity information is used to
  • this embodiment assists the terminal device in reselecting the second node through node camping reselection information, thereby realizing node camping reselection in a frequent mobility network system and achieving efficient mobility management.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device determining a third node based on the node relocation information, or updating the packet data aggregation layer co-processor configuration information of the first node or the second node based on the node relocation information.
  • the terminal device only needs to update the first node's packet data aggregation layer protocol layer configuration information according to the node relocation information, without needing to update the configuration information of other related layers.
  • the tenth aspect is a communication device according to this application, comprising a processing unit, which is configured to perform the steps in the methods designed in the first, fourth, or seventh aspects described above, or the processing unit is configured to perform the steps in the methods designed in the second, fifth, or eighth aspects described above, or the processing unit is configured to perform the steps in the methods designed in the third or sixth aspects described above, and the processing unit is configured to perform the steps in the methods designed in the ninth aspect described above.
  • a communication device includes a processor, a memory, and a computer program or instructions stored in the memory, wherein the processor executes the computer program or instructions to implement the steps in the methods designed in the first, fourth, or seventh aspects, or the processor executes the computer program or instructions to implement the steps in the methods designed in the second, fifth, or eighth aspects, or the processor executes the computer program or instructions to implement the steps in the methods designed in the third or sixth aspects.
  • the communication device can be a node or a chip.
  • the twelfth aspect is a terminal device according to this application, including a processor, a memory, and a computer program or instructions stored in the memory, wherein the processor executes the computer program or instructions to implement the steps in the method designed in the ninth aspect above.
  • a chip according to this application includes a processor, wherein the processor performs the steps of the method designed in any one of the first to ninth aspects described above.
  • the chip also includes a communication interface through which the processor executes the sending and/or receiving steps in the method designed in any one of the first to ninth aspects described above.
  • the fourteenth aspect is a chip module according to this application, including a chip, the chip including a processor, wherein the processor performs the steps of the method designed in any one of the first to ninth aspects described above.
  • the chip module further includes a transceiver component, through which the processor performs the transmission step and/or reception step in any of the first to ninth aspects described above.
  • the fifteenth aspect is a computer-readable storage medium of this application, wherein it stores a computer program or instructions that, when executed, implement the steps of the method designed in any one of the first to ninth aspects described above.
  • the computer program or instructions are executed by a processor.
  • the sixteenth aspect is a computer program product of this application, comprising a computer program or instructions, wherein when the computer program or instructions are executed, the steps in the method designed in any one of the first to ninth aspects described above are performed.
  • the computer program or instructions are executed by a processor.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a frequent mobility network system according to an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of the transparent transmission architecture of an NTN system according to an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the regeneration architecture of an NTN system according to an embodiment of this application.
  • Figure 4 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of an NTN system according to an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of another NTN system according to an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of an IAB according to an embodiment of this application.
  • Figure 7 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of TN IAB mobility management according to an embodiment of this application.
  • Figure 8 is a schematic diagram of the mobility management architecture of another TN IAB according to an embodiment of this application.
  • FIGS 9 to 12 are schematic diagrams of the architecture of another frequent mobility network system according to an embodiment of this application.
  • Figure 13 is a flowchart illustrating an access handover method in a frequent mobility network system according to an embodiment of this application
  • Figure 14 is a flowchart illustrating another access handover method in a frequent mobile network system according to an embodiment of this application.
  • Figure 15 is a schematic diagram of the mobility management architecture of a frequent mobility network system according to an embodiment of this application.
  • Figure 16 is a flowchart illustrating an access handover method in a frequent mobile network system based on conditional handover according to an embodiment of this application.
  • Figure 17 is a flowchart illustrating another access handover method in a frequent mobile network system based on conditional handover according to an embodiment of this application.
  • Figures 18 to 20 are schematic flowcharts of a node relocation method in a frequent mobility network system according to an embodiment of this application;
  • Figures 21 to 24 are functional unit block diagrams of a communication device according to an embodiment of this application.
  • Figure 25 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a node according to an embodiment of this application.
  • Figure 26 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a terminal device according to an embodiment of this application.
  • At least one or “at least one item” refers to one or more, and “multiple” refers to two or more.
  • "and/or” describes the association relationship between related objects, indicating that three relationships can exist.
  • a and/or B can represent the following three cases: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone.
  • a and B can be singular or plural.
  • the character "/" indicates that the preceding and following related objects have an "or" relationship.
  • At least one of the following or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item or a plurality of items.
  • at least one of a, b, or c can represent the following seven cases: a, b, c, a and b, a and c, b and c, a, b, and c.
  • Each of a, b, and c can be an element or a set containing one or more elements.
  • network can be expressed as the same concept as “system,” and a communication system is a communication network.
  • connection refers to various connection methods, such as direct connection or indirect connection, to achieve communication between devices, and is not specifically limited thereto.
  • a TN system refers to a communication network system composed of nodes and infrastructure located on the ground. These nodes may include terminal equipment and/or nodes that provide access functions. Typically, the locations of nodes providing access functions in a TN system are fixed or do not change frequently. For example, a node providing access functions in a TN system can be a network device, and the location of network devices is usually fixed.
  • a frequently moving network can be understood as a network in which the locations of nodes providing access functions move frequently.
  • frequently moving network systems can include non-terrestrial networks (NTN) systems or converged TN and NTN network systems.
  • NTN non-terrestrial networks
  • the nodes providing access functionality can be satellites, whose locations are frequently changing.
  • a frequent mobility network system may include terminal devices and nodes for providing access functionality.
  • the nodes for providing access functionality can provide access to the terminal devices.
  • node 120 provides access services to terminal device 110.
  • the terminal device may move along with the nodes for providing access functionality, or it may not move with the nodes for providing access functionality.
  • the nodes used to provide access functionality may include type I nodes and/or type II nodes.
  • the first type of node can be used to provide backhaul access functionality and may include a first functional unit and a second functional unit.
  • the first functional unit can be used to provide backhaul functionality
  • the second functional unit can be used to provide access functionality.
  • the first type of node can be an IAB node (IAB-node).
  • IAB-node can provide both access and backhaul functions and may include an IAB-node-Mobile-Termination (IAB-node-MT) and an IAB-node-Distributed Unit (IAB-node-DU).
  • the IAB-node-MT can act as a terminal device, providing backhaul functionality.
  • the IAB-node-DU can act as a pole-mounted cell on the access side, providing coverage gaps and providing access to terminal devices or sub-IAB-node-MTs (or lower-level IAB-node-MTs).
  • the first functional unit can be an IAB-node-MT
  • the second functional unit can be an IAB-node-DU.
  • the second type of node can be used to provide core network connectivity and access functions, and may include a third functional unit and a fourth functional unit.
  • the third functional unit can provide core network connectivity and access functions, and can provide access services to the second functional unit and/or the fourth functional unit.
  • the fourth functional unit can provide access functions, and can provide access services to terminal devices and/or the first functional unit.
  • the second type of node can be an IAB host (IAB-donor).
  • IAB-donor can be viewed as a network device supporting additional IAB functions, capable of connecting to the core network via non-IAB methods. It can include an IAB host aggregation unit (IAB-donor-central unit, IAB-donor-CU) and an IAB host distribution unit (IAB-donor-DU).
  • the IAB-donor-CU can provide access services to IAB-donor-DU and IAB-node-DU; the IAB-donor-DU can provide access services to terminal devices or IAB-node-MT.
  • the third functional unit can be an IAB-donor-CU, and the fourth functional unit can be an IAB-donor-DU.
  • a terminal device can be a device with transceiver capabilities, and can also be called a terminal, user equipment (UE), remote terminal equipment (relay UE), relay equipment (relay UE), access terminal equipment, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, mobile device, user terminal equipment, smart terminal equipment, wireless communication equipment, user agent, or user device.
  • a relay device is a terminal device capable of providing relay forwarding services to other terminal devices (including remote terminal devices).
  • terminal devices can be mobile phones, tablets, computers with wireless transceiver capabilities, virtual reality (VR) terminal devices, augmented reality (AR) terminal devices, wireless terminal devices in industrial control, wireless terminal devices in autonomous driving, wireless terminal devices in remote medical care, wireless terminal devices in smart grids, wireless terminal devices in transportation safety, wireless terminal devices in smart cities, or wireless terminal devices in smart homes, etc.
  • VR virtual reality
  • AR augmented reality
  • wireless terminal devices in industrial control wireless terminal devices in autonomous driving
  • wireless terminal devices in remote medical care wireless terminal devices in smart grids
  • wireless terminal devices in transportation safety wireless terminal devices in smart cities, or wireless terminal devices in smart homes, etc.
  • a terminal device can be a cellular phone, cordless phone, session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, wireless local loop (WLL) station, personal digital assistant (PDA), handheld device with wireless communication capabilities, computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, in-vehicle device, wearable device, terminal device in next-generation communication systems (such as NR communication systems, 6G communication systems), or terminal device in a future public land mobile network (PLMN), etc., without specific limitations.
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem such as NR communication systems, 6G communication systems
  • PLMN public land mobile network
  • terminal devices can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld, wearable, or vehicle-mounted; on water (such as ships); or in the air (such as airplanes, balloons, and satellites).
  • Terminal devices may include devices with wireless communication capabilities, such as chip systems, chips, or chip modules.
  • the chip system may include chips, and may also include other discrete devices.
  • Terminal devices can be chips, chip modules, devices, units, etc., without specific limitations.
  • a network device can be a device with transceiver capabilities.
  • the network device may include access network devices and/or core network (CN) devices.
  • the network device may include at least one of a satellite, access network device, NTN gateway, and core network device. These will be described separately below.
  • Access network equipment can be a radio access network (RAN).
  • the RAN can consist of multiple 5G-RAN nodes, implementing radio physical layer functions, resource scheduling and radio resource management, radio access control, and mobility management functions.
  • access network equipment can be a base station (BTS) in a Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM) or Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) system, a base station (NodeB, NB) in a Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) system, an evolved Node B (eNB or eNodeB) in an LTE communication system, a next-generation evolved Node B (ng-eNB) in an NR communication system, a next-generation Node B (gNB or gNodeB) in an NR communication system, a master node (MN) in a dual connectivity architecture, a secondary node (SN) in a dual connectivity architecture, a transmission receiving point (TRP), etc., without specific restrictions.
  • BTS base station
  • GSM Global System for Mobile Communication
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • NodeB NodeB
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • eNB or eNodeB evolved Node B
  • ng-eNB next-generation evolved Node B
  • Access network equipment functions as CUs and DUs.
  • One CU can control one or more DUs.
  • CUs and DUs are physically connected via optical fiber, and logically share a specially defined F1 interface for communication between them.
  • a CU refers to a logical node that hosts protocol layers with low latency sensitivity. These low-latency-sensitivity protocol layers include the Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer, Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer, and Service Data Adaptation Protocol (SDAP) layer of the access network equipment.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • PDCP Packet Data Convergence Protocol
  • SDAP Service Data Adaptation Protocol
  • the RRC layer is primarily responsible for RAN-related control plane procedures.
  • the PDCP layer is primarily responsible for IP header compression, encryption, and integrity protection.
  • the SDAP layer is a newly added protocol layer in the gNodeB's user plane protocol stack, primarily responsible for adding QoS Flow Identifiers (QFIs) to data packets and mapping QoS flows to data radio bearers (DRBs).
  • QFIs QoS Flow Identifiers
  • a DU refers to a logical node that hosts high-latency-sensitive protocol layers.
  • a DU is controlled by a CU (Control Unit), and one DU supports one or more cells; a cell can only belong to one DU.
  • the high-latency-sensitive protocol layers include the Radio Link Control (RLC) layer, the Media Access Control (MAC) layer, and the Physical (PHY) layer.
  • the RLC layer is primarily responsible for data segmentation and reassembly.
  • the MAC layer is primarily responsible for logical channel multiplexing, Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) retransmission, and scheduling-related functions.
  • the Physical layer is primarily responsible for encoding, decoding, modulation, demodulation, and multi-antenna mapping.
  • Core network equipment may include network elements that provide various functions.
  • the term "network element” can also be referred to as an entity, device, apparatus, or module, etc., without specific limitations.
  • the term “network element” is omitted in some descriptions.
  • a network exposure function (NEF) network element is abbreviated as NEF.
  • NEF network exposure function
  • NEF should be understood as either a NEF network element or a NEF entity. The following omits further explanation of similar or identical cases.
  • core network equipment may include a mobility management entity (MME), a broadcast multicast service center (BMSC), or corresponding functional entities in the 5G system, such as core network control plane (CP) or user plan (UP) network functions.
  • MME mobility management entity
  • BMSC broadcast multicast service center
  • CP core network control plane
  • UP user plan
  • the core network control plane can also be understood as the core network control plane function (CPF) entity.
  • CPF core network control plane function
  • a satellite can be a spacecraft that transmits signals using a transparent payload (or bent pipe payload) or a regenerative payload; that is, a transparent satellite or a regenerative satellite.
  • satellites can be classified according to their orbital altitude into geostationary orbit (GEO) satellites, medium earth orbit (MEO) satellites, low earth orbit (LEO) satellites, and high elliptical orbit (HEO) satellites, etc.
  • GEO geostationary orbit
  • MEO medium earth orbit
  • LEO low earth orbit
  • HEO high elliptical orbit
  • An NTN gateway which can be a ground-based earth station or gateway, provides sufficient radio frequency (RF) power and RF sensitivity to enable connections between ground devices (such as network equipment) and satellites.
  • RF radio frequency
  • a non-terrestrial network gateway is a node in the transport network layer (TNL).
  • NTN systems Depending on the type of payload, NTN systems have two common architectures: pass-through architecture and regenerative architecture. These will be explained below.
  • the signal In a transparent transmission architecture, the signal only undergoes frequency conversion and amplification on the satellite; the satellite is transparent to the signal, as if it doesn't exist.
  • the transparent transmission architecture of the NTN system is shown in Figure 2.
  • the terminal device, NTN gateway, and gNB are located on the Earth's surface, while the satellite is in Earth orbit.
  • the satellite, NTN gateway, and gNB constitute the radio access network (NG-RAN).
  • the NG-RAN connects to the 5G core network through the NG interface, and the 5G core network connects to the data network through the N6 interface.
  • the satellite and NTN gateway can be considered as remote radio units, and they can communicate with each other through the NR Uu interface.
  • the satellite operates in regenerative mode and possesses some or all of the functions of a base station.
  • the access network equipment as a gNB
  • the regenerative architecture of the NTN system is shown in Figure 3.
  • the terminal equipment is located on the Earth's surface, and the satellite possesses all the functions of the gNB.
  • the satellite and gNB together form the NG-RAN.
  • the NG-RAN connects to the 5G core network via the NG Uu interface, and the 5G core network connects to the data network via the N6 interface.
  • the gNB and the terminal equipment can communicate via the NR Uu interface.
  • the terminal device is located on the Earth's surface, and the satellite has gNB-DU functionality.
  • the satellite, gNB-DU, and gNB-CU together form the NG-RAN.
  • the NG-RAN connects to the 5G core network via the NG Uu interface, and the 5G core network connects to the data network via the N6 interface.
  • the gNB and the terminal device can communicate via the NR Uu interface.
  • NTN systems can generally be divided into eye-fixed (earth-fixed or quasi-earth fixed) and non-eye-moving (earth-moving) NTN systems.
  • the satellite beam coverage area moves along with the satellite over a period of time, as shown in Figure 4(a).
  • the satellite beam coverage area moves along with the satellite over the period from time T1 to time T3.
  • the satellite dynamically adjusts its beam pointing over a period of time to ensure that the beam approximately covers the same area of the ground, as shown in Figure 4(b).
  • the satellite beam coverage area is the same during the period when the satellite moves from time T1 to time T3.
  • the service area of a satellite network is divided into multiple smaller geographical regions, each called a beam position.
  • Beam positions can be represented in different shapes to indicate the coverage area of a satellite beam.
  • the movement of LEO satellites can cause problems such as group handover (e.g. for connected terminal devices) or group reselection (e.g. for idle or inactive terminal devices) in a certain area (wavelength).
  • group handover e.g. for connected terminal devices
  • group reselection e.g. for idle or inactive terminal devices
  • UE-G1 contains multiple UEs.
  • UE-G1 is served by one or more beams of satellite 520.
  • Satellites 510 and 520 are constantly moving over time. From time T1 to time T2, assuming the UEs within UE-G1 do not move (as shown in Figure 5(b)), the movement of satellite 520 causes it to cease providing service to UE-G1. Instead, one or more beams of satellite 510 provide service to UE-G1. This process of UE-G1 switching from satellite 520 to satellite 510 can be called group handover.
  • group handovers occur only once every few seconds to tens of seconds. In other words, group handovers are commonplace in hopping-beam LEO satellite networks.
  • the purpose of the IAB is to support wireless backhaul and relay links, enabling flexible and very dense cell deployments without proportionally encrypting the wired transmission network.
  • Typical deployment scenarios include supporting outdoor small cell deployments, indoor small cell deployments, and even mobile relays (e.g., on buses or trains).
  • the functional architecture of the IAB is as follows:
  • An IAB-node provides access and backhaul capabilities and can consist of an IAB-node-MT and an IAB-node-DU.
  • the IAB-node-MT acts as a terminal device, providing backhaul functionality.
  • the IAB-node-DU acts as an access-side pole cell, providing coverage coverage and offering access services to terminal devices or sub-IAB-node-MTs.
  • An IAB-donor can be viewed as a network device that supports additional IAB functions (such as a gNodeB). It can connect to the core network through non-IAB connections and includes IAB-donor-DU and IAB-donor-CU. Among them, IAB-donor-CU can provide access services for IAB-donor-DU and IAB-node-DU; IAB-donor-DU can provide access services for terminal devices or IAB-node-MT.
  • the terminal device when an IAB-node provides access services to a terminal device (or when an IAB-node-DU provides access services to a terminal device), the terminal device is referred to as "the terminal device connected to the IAB-node", “the terminal device served by the IAB-node”, or "the terminal device associated with the IAB-node”.
  • the IAB-node When an IAB-donor provides access services to an IAB-node (or when an IAB-donor-CU provides access services to an IAB-node-DU), the IAB-node is referred to as "the IAB-node to which the IAB-donor is connected", or “the IAB-node served by the IAB-donor", or "the IAB-node associated with the IAB-donor”; the IAB-donor is referred to as "the IAB-donor to which the IAB-node is connected", or "the IAB-donor associated with the IAB-node".
  • the terminal device When an IAB-donor provides access services to a terminal device (or when an IAB-donor-DU provides access services to a terminal device), the terminal device is referred to as "the terminal device connected to the IAB-donor", “the terminal device served by the IAB-donor", or “the terminal device associated with the IAB-donor”; the IAB-donor can be referred to as “the IAB-donor connected to the terminal device” or "the IAB-donor associated with the terminal device”.
  • the second IAB-node When the first IAB-node provides access services to the second IAB-node (the first IAB-node-DU provides access services to the second IAB-node-MT), the second IAB-node is referred to as "the child IAB-node or lower-level IAB-node connected to the first IAB-node,” or “the child IAB-node or lower-level IAB-node served by the first IAB-node,” or “the child IAB-node or lower-level IAB-node associated with the first IAB-node.” Simultaneously, the first IAB-node is referred to as "the parent IAB-node or superior IAB-node of the second IAB-node,” or “the IAB-node connected to the second IAB-node.”
  • the terminal device When an IAB-node provides access services to a terminal device (or when an IAB-node-DU provides access services to a terminal device), the terminal device is referred to as "the terminal device connected to the IAB-node", “the terminal device served by the IAB-node", or “the terminal device associated with the IAB-node”; the IAB-node is referred to as “the IAB-node connected to the terminal device” or "the IAB-node associated with the terminal device”.
  • gNodeB 620, IAB-donor 630, IAB-node 650 and IAB-node 670 constitute NR-RAN.
  • the gNodeB 620 connects to the 5G core network (5G CN) 610 via the NG interface.
  • the IAB-donor 630 includes IAB-donor-CU 6301 and IAB-donor-DU 6302. IAB-donor-CU 6301 connects to IAB-donor-DU 6302 via the F1 interface, IAB-donor-CU 6301 connects to the gNodeB 620 via the Xn-C interface, and IAB-donor-CU 6301 connects to the 5G CN 610 via the NG interface; IAB-donor-DU 6302 connects to the UE 640 via the NR Uu interface.
  • the IAB-node 650 includes IAB-node-MT 6501 and IAB-node-DU 6502.
  • IAB-node-MT 6501 is connected to IAB-donor-DU 6302 via the NR Uu interface.
  • IAB-node-DU 6502 is connected to IAB-donor-CU 6301 via the F1 interface.
  • IAB-node-DU 6502 is connected to UE 660 via the NR Uu interface.
  • IAB-node 670 includes IAB-node-MT 6701 and IAB-node-DU 6702.
  • IAB-node-MT 6701 is connected to IAB-node-DU 6702 via the NR Uu interface
  • IAB-node-DU 6702 is connected to IAB-donor-CU 6301 via the F1 interface.
  • IAB-node 670 can be considered a child or lower-level IAB-node of IAB-node 650, and IAB-node 650 can be considered a parent or upper-level IAB-node of IAB-node 670.
  • mIAB mobile IAB
  • a mIAB-node can contain mIAB-node-MT and mIAB-node-DU.
  • mIAB-node-MT can be an IAB-node-MT whose location can be moved
  • mIAB-node-DU can be an IAB-node-DU whose location can be moved.
  • a mIAB-donor can include mIAB-donor-MT and mIAB-donor-DU.
  • mIAB-donor-MT can be an IAB-donor-MT whose position can be moved
  • mIAB-donor-DU can be an IAB-donor-DU whose position can be moved.
  • TN IAB can refer to an IAB located on the ground or a ground/land-based IAB.
  • a TN IAB-node can be an IAB-node located in a ground/land-based network or an IAB-node belonging to the TN system;
  • a TN IAB-donor can be an IAB-donor located in a ground/land-based network or an IAB-donor belonging to the TN system;
  • a TN mIAB-node can be a mIAB-node located in a ground/land-based network or a mIAB-node belonging to the TN system;
  • a TN mIAB-donor can be a mIAB-donor located in a ground/land-based network or an IAB-node belonging to the TN system.
  • NTN IAB-nodes can be IAB-nodes located in non-terrestrial/non-land network networks, or IAB-nodes belonging to the NTN system;
  • NTN IAB-donors can be IAB-donors located in non-terrestrial/non-land network networks, or IAB-donors belonging to the NTN system;
  • NTN mIAB-nodes can be mIAB-nodes located in non-terrestrial/non-land network networks, or mIAB-nodes belonging to the NTN system;
  • NTN mIAB-donors can be mIAB-donors located in non-terrestrial/non-land network networks, or IAB-nodes belonging to the NTN system.
  • the mobility of TN mIAB-nodes includes the following scenarios:
  • the TN IAB-donor-CU connected to the TN mIAB-node-MT needs to be switched, while the TN IAB-donor-CU connected to the TN mIAB-node-DU does not need to be switched; that is, the TN mIAB-node-DU still needs to maintain its connection with the original TN IAB-donor-CU.
  • the TN IAB-donor-CU connected to the TN mIAB-node-MT is switched, the transmission path from the TN mIAB-node-DU to that TN IAB-donor-CU will change.
  • mIAB scenarios typically involve the switching of at least one UE served by the mIAB, but in existing networks, UEs and TN mIAB-nodes usually move together (e.g., a group of UEs served by a vehicle-mounted mIAB), meaning the relative positional relationship between the UE and the TN mIAB-node remains unchanged, RACH-less handover can usually be considered to further reduce handover overhead.
  • TN mIAB-node 740 includes TN mIAB-node-MT 7401 and TN mIAB-node-DU 7402.
  • TN mIAB-node-MT 7401 is connected to TN IAB-donor-CU 7201 via TN IAB-donor-DU 7202
  • TN mIAB-node-DU 7402 is connected to TN IAB-donor-CU 7101 and UE 750 respectively.
  • the transmission path from TN mIAB-node-DU 7402 to TN IAB-donor-CU 7101 requires passing through TN IAB-donor-DU 7202.
  • UE 750 moves along with TN mIAB-node 740.
  • TN miAB-node-MT 7401 switches from TN IAB-donor-CU 7201 to TN IAB-donor-CU 7301, and TN miAB-node-MT 7401 is connected to TN IAB-donor-CU 7301 via TN IAB-donor-DU 7302.
  • TN miAB-node-DU 7402 continues to maintain its connection with TN IAB-donor-CU 7101.
  • the transmission path from TN miAB-node-DU 7402 to TN IAB-donor-CU 7101 requires traversing TN IAB-donor-DU 7302.
  • the TN IAB-donor-CU connected to the TN mIAB-node-DU needs to be switched, while the TN IAB-donor-CU connected to the TN mIAB-node-MT does not need to be switched; that is, the TN mIAB-node-MT continues to maintain its connection with the original TN IAB-donor-CU.
  • the TN mIAB-node-DU switch the TN mIAB-node needs to support simultaneous service of multiple logical TN mIAB-node-DU functions to minimize the mobility interruption time caused by the switch.
  • TN mIAB-node 840 includes TN mIAB-node-MT 8401 and TN mIAB-node-DU 8402.
  • TN mIAB-node-MT 8401 is connected to TN IAB-donor-CU 8201 via TN IAB-donor-DU 8202
  • TN mIAB-node-DU 8402 is connected to TN IAB-donor-CU 8101 and UE 850 respectively.
  • the transmission path from TN mIAB-node-DU 8402 to TN IAB-donor-CU 8101 requires passing through TN IAB-donor-DU 8202. Then, UE 850 moves along with TN mIAB-node 840.
  • TN miAB-node-DU 8402 switches from TN IAB-donor-CU 8201 to TN IAB-donor-CU 8301.
  • TN miAB-node-DU 8403 connects TN IAB-donor-CU 8301 and UE 850, while TN miAB-node-MT 8401 maintains its connection with TN IAB-donor-CU 8101.
  • the transmission path from TN miAB-node-DU 8403 to TN IAB-donor-CU 8301 requires traversing TN IAB-donor-DU 8302.
  • the following embodiment provides a detailed description of mobility management in a frequently moving network system.
  • mobility management in the TN system includes cell handover in connected mode, cell reselection in idle/inactive mode, registration update, and tracking area update.
  • the cell handover process mainly includes steps such as cell handover measurement, measurement result reporting, handover decision, and handover execution.
  • the source base station sends measurement configurations for multiple cells (including the serving cell and neighboring cells) to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can then measure the cell signal quality (such as Reference Signal Receiving Power (RSRP) and/or Reference Signal Receiving Quality (RSRQ)) based on these configurations.
  • RSRP Reference Signal Receiving Power
  • RSRQ Reference Signal Receiving Quality
  • the terminal device can report the measurement results to the source base station, either periodically or via event-triggered reporting.
  • the source base station can select suitable neighboring cells based on the reported results and exchange information related to cell handover context, admission control, and reserved resources.
  • the terminal device receives handover-related control information from the source base station and completes the access procedure at the target base station.
  • cell handover or cell reselection is usually required due to the movement of terminal devices, while nodes providing access functions are typically considered to be stationary or move infrequently. For example, cell handover and cell reselection do not require consideration of network device movement.
  • this embodiment discusses how to perform efficient mobility management in frequent mobility network systems.
  • the mobile network system of this embodiment includes terminal equipment, a first type of node, a second type of node, and a core network.
  • the first type of node and the second type of node will be further described in detail below.
  • Type I nodes can provide access services to terminal devices and/or their sub-Type I nodes.
  • Type I nodes can exist in the following ways: 1) Type I nodes can be mobile, meaning their location can be moved, for example, a type I node is a mIAB-node; 2) Type I nodes may not be mobile, meaning their location is fixed, for example, a non-mIAB-node, an IAB-node, or a stationary/fixed IAB-node; 3) Type I nodes can support NTN, meaning they are located outside the ground (air) or the second node belongs to the NTN system, for example, a type I node is an NTN IAB-node or an NTN mIAB-node; 4) Type I nodes can support TN, meaning they are located on the ground or the second node belongs to the TN system, for example, a type I node is a TN IAB-node or a TN mIAB-node.
  • Type II nodes can connect to the core network and provide access services to Type I nodes and/or terminal equipment.
  • Type II nodes can exist in the following ways: 1) Type II nodes can support mobility, for example, a Type II node is a mIAB-donor; 2) Type II nodes may not support mobility, for example, a non-mIAB-donor, an IAB-node, or a stationary/fixed IAB-donor; 3) Type II nodes can support NTN, for example, a Type II node is an NTN IAB-donor or an NTN mIAB-donor; 4) Type II nodes can support TN, for example, a Type II node is a TN IAB-donor or a TN mIAB-donor.
  • mobility management in this frequent mobility network system can include the switching of a second type of node connected to a first type of node in the connected state, and the reselection of a second type of node where a first type of node resides in the idle/inactive state.
  • the following examples using NTN IAB systems or converged NTN IAB and TN IAB systems as examples, illustrate four scenarios for mobility management in frequent mobility network systems.
  • the first type of node can include NTN IAB-nodes and/or TN IAB-nodes
  • the second type of node can include NTN IAB-donor or TN IAB-donor.
  • the frequent mobility network system includes a TN IAB-donor, an NTN IAB-node, a UE, and a core network.
  • the core network is located on the ground; the TN IAB-donor connects to the core network and provides access services to the NTN IAB-node and/or the UE; the NTN IAB-node can provide access services to its sub-NTN IAB-nodes and/or the UE.
  • Mobility management in "Scenario 1" under the frequent mobility network system includes handover of the TN IAB-donor connected to the NTN IAB-node in connected mode and reselection of the TN IAB-donor where the NTN IAB-node resides in idle/inactive mode.
  • the frequent mobility network system includes core network 910, TN IAB-donor 920, TN IAB-donor 930, NTN IAB-node 940, NTN IAB-node 950, NTN IAB-node 960, UE 970, UE 980 and UE 990.
  • the core network 910 is located on the ground; TN IAB-donor 920 connects to core network 910 and provides access services to NTN IAB-node 950; TN IAB-donor 930 connects to core network 910 and provides access services to NTN IAB-node 940 and UE 970; NTN IAB-node 940 provides access services to NTN IAB-node 950; and NTN IAB-node 950 provides access services to NTN IAB-node 960, UE 980, and UE 990. With the movement of NTN IAB-node 950, it needs to switch from TN IAB-donor 920 to TN IAB-donor 930.
  • the frequent mobility network system includes an NTN IAB-donor, an NTN IAB-node, a UE, an NTN gateway, and a core network.
  • the core network is located on the ground; the NTN gateway connects the core network and the NTN IAB-donor; the NTN IAB-donor provides access services to the NTN IAB-node and/or the UE; and the NTN IAB-node provides access services to its sub-NTN IAB-nodes and/or the UE.
  • Mobility management in "Scenario 2" under the frequent mobility network system includes handover of the NTN IAB-donor connected to the NTN IAB-node in connected mode and reselection of the NTN IAB-donor where the NTN IAB-node resides in idle/inactive mode.
  • the frequent mobility network system includes core network 1010, NTN gateway 1020, NTN IAB-donor 1030, NTN IAB-donor 1040, NTN IAB-node 1050, NTN IAB-node 1060, UE 1070, and UE 1080.
  • core network 1010 is located on the ground; NTN gateway 1020 connects core network 1010 and NTN IAB-donor 1030; NTN IAB-donor 1030 provides access services to NTN IAB-node 1050; NTN IAB-node 1050 provides access services to NTN IAB-node 1060, UE 1070, and UE 1080.
  • NTN IAB-node 1050 needs to be switched from NTN IAB-donor 1030 to NTN IAB-donor 1040.
  • the frequent mobility network system includes an NTN IAB-donor, a TN IAB-donor, an NTN IAB-node, a UE, an NTN gateway, and a core network.
  • the core network is located on the ground; the NTN gateway can connect to the core network and the NTN IAB-donor; the NTN IAB-donor can provide access services to the NTN IAB-node and/or the UE; the TN IAB-donor can connect to the core network and can provide access services to the NTN IAB-node and/or the UE; the NTN IAB-node can provide access services to its sub-NTN IAB-node and/or the UE.
  • Mobility management in the frequent mobility network system of "Scenario 3" includes the handover of the NTN IAB-donor or TN IAB-donor to which the NTN IAB-node is connected in the connected state, and the reselection of the NTN IAB-donor or TN IAB-donor to which the NTN IAB-node resides in the idle/inactive state.
  • the frequent mobility network system includes core network 1110, NTN gateway 1120, TN IAB-donor 1130, NTN IAB-donor 1140, NTN IAB-node 1150, NTN IAB-node 1160, UE 1170, and UE 1180.
  • core network 1110 is located on the ground; NTN gateway 1120 connects core network 1110 and NTN IAB-donor 1140; TN IAB-donor 1130 provides access services to NTN IAB-node 1150; NTN IAB-node 1150 provides access services to NTN IAB-node 1160, UE 1170, and UE 1180.
  • NTN IAB-node 1150 needs to be switched from TN IAB-donor 1130 to NTN IAB-donor 1140.
  • the frequent mobility network system includes an NTN IAB-donor, a TN IAB-donor, an NTN IAB-node, a TN IAB-node, a UE, and a core network.
  • the core network is located in the air; the NTN IAB-donor can connect to the core network and provide access services to the NTN IAB-node and/or the UE; the TN IAB-donor can connect to the core network and provide access services to the NTN IAB-node and/or the UE; and the NTN IAB-node can provide access services to its sub-TN IAB-node and/or the UE.
  • Mobility management in the frequent mobility network system of "Scenario 4" includes the handover of the NTN IAB-donor to which the NTN IAB-node is connected in the connected state, and the reselection of the NTN IAB-donor to which the NTN IAB-node resides in the idle/inactive state.
  • the frequent mobility network system includes core network 1210, NTN IAB-donor 1220, NTN IAB-donor 1230, NTN IAB-node 1240, TN IAB-node 1250, UE 1260, UE 1270, and UE 1280.
  • core network 1210 is located on a satellite; NTN IAB-donor 1220 provides access services to NTN IAB-node 1240; NTN IAB-node 1240 provides access services to TN IAB-node 1250, UE 1270, and UE 1280; and TN IAB-node 1250 provides access services to UE 1260.
  • NTN IAB-node 1240 needs to be switched from NTN IAB-donor 1220 to NTN IAB-donor 1230.
  • this embodiment will now explain the handover of the second type of node connected to the first type of node in the connected state in a frequently moving network system.
  • the switching of the second type of node connected to the first type of node includes the switching of the second type of node connected to the first functional unit and/or the switching of the second type of node connected to the second functional unit.
  • the switching of the IAB-donor connected to the IAB-node includes the switching of the IAB-donor connected to IAB-node-MT and/or the switching of the IAB-donor connected to IAB-node-DU.
  • the IAB-donor connected to IAB-node-MT and the IAB-donor connected to IAB-node-DU can be the same or different. For example, as shown in Figure 7 or Figure 8.
  • the switching of the second type of node connected to the first type of node can be abbreviated as “the access switching of the first type of node”
  • the switching of the second type of node connected to the first functional unit can be abbreviated as “the access switching of the first functional unit”
  • the switching of the second type of node connected to the second functional unit can be abbreviated as "the access switching of the second functional unit”.
  • Type I nodes requires the execution of a handover procedure, which includes steps such as cell handover measurement, measurement result reporting, handover decision, and handover execution, and each step incurs signaling overhead, resource overhead, and time consumption
  • steps such as cell handover measurement, measurement result reporting, handover decision, and handover execution
  • each step incurs signaling overhead, resource overhead, and time consumption
  • problems such as high signaling overhead, high resource overhead, and long time consumption.
  • the long time consumption also results in prolonged mobility interruption.
  • Type I nodes may move frequently in a frequently mobile network system, the first and second functional units may frequently perform access handovers, and executing their own handover procedures will also lead to low handover efficiency.
  • this embodiment considers that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first type of node are connected to the same second type of node, and the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first type of node need to switch to the same second type of node.
  • IAB-node-MT taking the first functional unit as IAB-node-MT, the second functional unit as IAB-node-DU, and the second type of node as IAB-donor, in the connected state, IAB-node-MT and IAB-node-DU of the IAB-node are simultaneously connected to the first IAB-donor, and IAB-node-MT and IAB-node-DU need to switch to the second IAB-donor.
  • the access handover of the first functional unit and the access handover of the second functional unit can be performed together using the same handover process. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, reduce resource overhead, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thereby achieving efficient mobility management.
  • the following embodiment uses an example where a first type of node includes a first node, a second type of node includes a second node and a third node, and the first and second functional units of the first node need to switch from the second node to the third node.
  • This example will specifically illustrate the switching process executed for the access switching of the first functional unit and the access switching of the second functional unit. Based on the above description, the first node, the second node, and the third node will be further explained below.
  • the first node can be used to provide backhaul access functionality, providing access services to child nodes and/or terminal devices.
  • the first node can be in the following states: 1) The first node can support mobility, for example, the first node is a mIAB-node; 2) The first node may not support mobility, for example, the first node is a non-mIAB-node, an IAB-node, or a stationary/fixed IAB-node; 3) The first node can support NTN, for example, the first node is an NTN IAB-node or an NTN mIAB-node; 4) The first node can support TN, for example, the first node is a TN IAB-node or a TN mIAB-node.
  • the second node can connect to the core network and provide access services to the first type of nodes and/or terminal equipment.
  • the second node can be in the following situations: 1) The second node can support mobility, for example, the second node is a mIAB-donor; 2) The second node may not support mobility, for example, it can be a non-mIAB-donor, an IAB-donor, or a stationary/fixed IAB-donor; 3) The second node can support NTN, for example, the second node is an NTN IAB-donor or an NTN mIAB-donor; 4) The second node can support TN, for example, the second node is a TN IAB-donor or a TN mIAB-donor.
  • the third node can connect to the core network and provide access services to Type 1 nodes and/or terminal equipment.
  • the third node can exist in the following ways: 1) The third node can support mobility, for example, the third node is a mIAB-donor; 2) The third node may not support mobility, for example, it can be a non-mIAB-donor, an IAB-donor, or a stationary/fixed IAB-donor; 3) The third node can support NTN, for example, the third node is an NTN IAB-donor or an NTN mIAB-donor; 4) The third node can support TN, for example, the third node is a TN IAB-donor or a TN mIAB-donor.
  • Figure 13 is a flowchart illustrating an access handover method in a frequent mobility network system according to an embodiment of this application.
  • Figure 13 includes the following steps:
  • the second node sends a handover request to the third node.
  • the third node receives the handover request information.
  • the switching request information can be used to request the switching of the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node.
  • the second node since the second node provides access services to the first node, it can determine whether an access handover to the first node is necessary. For example, the second node can make a handover decision based on measurement reports reported by the first node.
  • the second node can request the third node to switch the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node through a handover request message, so that the third node can perform handover admission control.
  • the switching request information includes first identification information and second identification information.
  • the first identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the first node
  • the second identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the first identification information and the second identification information are used to indicate the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node, so that the third node can confirm that the switching request is for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the switching request information may also include at least one of the following: third identification information, first context information, fourth identification information, or second context information.
  • the third identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the terminal device served by the first node
  • the first context information is used to indicate the context of the terminal device served by the first node
  • the fourth identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the sub-node served by the first node and the identifier of the second functional unit of the sub-node served by the first node
  • the second context information is used to indicate the context of the sub-node served by the first node.
  • the switch request information includes third identification information and/or first context information.
  • the third identification information and/or first context information inform the third node of the terminal device's request to switch from the second node to the third node, so that the third node can perform the relevant access control.
  • the switch request information includes fourth identification information and/or second context information.
  • the fourth identification information and/or second context information inform the third node of the child node's request to switch from the second node to the third node, so that the third node can perform the relevant admission control.
  • the third node sends a handover response message.
  • the second node receives the handover response information.
  • the switching response information is used to indicate that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node are permitted to switch from the second node to the third node.
  • the third node will perform handover admission control to decide whether to allow the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node, and inform the second node through the handover response information to allow the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node.
  • the switching response information may include at least one of the following: first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information.
  • the first information is used to configure the backhaul adaptation protocol (BAP) address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node;
  • the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node;
  • the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node;
  • the fourth information is used to configure the backhaul radio link control (BH-RLC);
  • the fifth information is used to configure the F1 application protocol (F1-AP); and the sixth information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the third node needs to reserve at least one of the following information for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform access handover: BAP address, transmission path from the second node to the third node, resources on the transmission path, BH-RLC configuration, F1-AP configuration, or configuration of the second functional unit of the first node. This information is used by the first node to perform access handover and ensure successful access handover.
  • the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: a list of Physical Cell Identifiers (PCIs), resource configuration information, Tracking Area Identifier (TAI) configuration information, or Tracking Area Code (TAC) configuration information.
  • PCIs Physical Cell Identifiers
  • TAI Tracking Area Identifier
  • TAC Tracking Area Code
  • the third node needs to configure at least one of the following for the second functional unit of the first node during the handover admission control process: PCI list, resources, TAI, or TAC, in order to ensure that the first node can successfully perform the access handover.
  • the handover response information may also include random access information required for the handover of the terminal equipment and/or sub-nodes served by the first node.
  • random access information may include a cell-specific radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI), a preamble, a random access channel occurrence (RO), and random access time-frequency resources.
  • C-RNTI cell-specific radio network temporary identifier
  • RO random access channel occurrence
  • the third node needs to configure the random access information required for the terminal device and/or sub-node to perform the handover during the handover admission control process, so that the terminal device and/or sub-node can perform random access based on the random access information to complete the access handover.
  • the second node sends a handover message to the first node.
  • the first node receives the switching information.
  • the switching information is used to instruct the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node.
  • the second node can inform the first node through the handover information that an access handover needs to be performed, and begin to switch the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node.
  • the switching information may include at least one of the following: first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information.
  • the first information is used to configure the BAP address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the fourth information is used to configure BH-RLC; the fifth information is used to configure F1-AP; and the sixth information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the second node will inform the first node of at least one of the following information: the BAP address reserved by the third node for the first functional unit of the first node and the second functional unit of the first node for access switching, the transmission path from the second node to the third node, the resources on the transmission path, the BH-RLC configuration, the F1-AP configuration, or the configuration of the second functional unit of the first node, so that the first node can perform access switching based on this information and ensure successful access switching.
  • the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: PCI list, resource configuration information, TAI configuration information, or TAC configuration information.
  • the second node will inform the first node of at least one of the PCI list, resources, TAI or TAC configured by the third node, thereby ensuring that the first node's access handover is successful.
  • the handover information is carried by RRC signaling (such as an RRC reconfiguration request message).
  • RRC signaling such as an RRC reconfiguration request message.
  • the second node informs the first access node to perform an access handover via RRC signaling.
  • the first node switches its first functional unit and second functional unit from the second node to the third node according to the switching information.
  • the first node needs to complete uplink and downlink synchronization with the third node.
  • Figure 14 is a flowchart illustrating another access handover method in a frequently mobile network system provided in this embodiment.
  • Figure 14 includes the following steps:
  • the second node sends measurement configuration information to the first node.
  • the first node receives the measurement configuration information.
  • the second node can send measurement configuration information corresponding to multiple second-type nodes (including the third node) to the first node.
  • This measurement configuration information can be used to configure Layer 1 (L1) and/or Layer 3 (L3) measurements, and may include measurement frequency points, synchronization signal block measurement timing configuration (SMTC), measurement reporting trigger conditions (e.g., periodic, non-periodic, event-triggered), and measurement objects (e.g., location, signal quality).
  • the measurement configuration information can be carried by RRC signaling.
  • the first node can measure signal quality (e.g., RSRP and/or RSRQ) according to the measurement configuration information to obtain signal quality results.
  • the measurement signal can be a downlink synchronization signal SSB (e.g., cell defining SSB, CD-SSB) or a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), etc.
  • SSB downlink synchronization signal
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • the first node sends a measurement report to the second node.
  • the second node receives the measurement report.
  • the first node can report measurement results to the second node.
  • the measurement report may include the first node's location-related information (such as its Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) position or position ID, satellite ephemeris, etc.) and signal quality results.
  • GNSS Global Navigation Satellite System
  • the reporting method can be periodic reporting or event-triggered reporting. In event-triggered reporting, the reporting condition can be that the second node's signal quality is less than a first preset threshold and/or the third node's signal quality is greater than a second preset threshold.
  • the second node determines the switching decision corresponding to the first node based on the measurement report.
  • the second node determines the switching decision for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node based on the measurement report.
  • the second node sends a handover request to the third node.
  • the third node receives the handover request information.
  • the switching request information can be used to request the switching of the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node.
  • the second node can request the third node to switch the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node.
  • the switching request information includes first identification information and second identification information.
  • the first identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the first node
  • the second identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the first identification information and the second identification information are used to indicate the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node, so that the third node can confirm that the switching request is for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the handover request information may further include at least one of the following: third identification information, first context information, fourth identification information, or second context information.
  • the third identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the terminal device served by the first node
  • the first context information is used to indicate the context of the terminal device served by the first node
  • the fourth identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the child node served by the first node and the identifier of the second functional unit of the child node served by the first node
  • the second context information is used to indicate the context of the child node served by the first node.
  • the switch request information includes third identification information and/or first context information.
  • the third identification information and/or first context information are used to inform the third node of the terminal device's request to switch from the second node to the third node.
  • the switch request information includes fourth identification information and/or second context information.
  • the fourth identification information and/or second context information are used to inform the third node of the child node's request to switch from the second node to the third node.
  • the third node sends a handover response message.
  • the second node receives the handover response information.
  • the switching response information is used to indicate that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node are permitted to switch from the second node to the third node.
  • the third node will perform handover admission control to determine whether the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node are allowed to switch from the second node to the third node, and inform the second node through the handover response information.
  • the handover response information includes at least one of the following: first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information; the first information is used to configure the BAP required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the fourth information is used to configure BH-RLC; the fifth information is used to configure F1-AP; and the sixth information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.
  • first information is used to configure the BAP required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node
  • the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node
  • the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node
  • the fourth information is used to configure BH-RLC
  • the fifth information
  • the third node needs to reserve one of the following information for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform the access handover: BAP address, transmission path from the second node to the third node, resources on the transmission path, BH-RLC configuration, F1-AP configuration, or configuration of the second functional unit of the first node. This information is used by the first node to perform the access handover and ensure that the access handover is successful.
  • the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: PCI list, resource configuration information, TAI configuration information, or TAC configuration information.
  • the third node needs to configure at least one of the following for the second functional unit of the first node during the handover admission control process: PCI list, resources, TAI, or TAC, in order to ensure that the first node can successfully access the handover.
  • the handover response information may also include random access information required for the handover of the terminal devices and/or sub-nodes served by the first node.
  • random access information may include C-RNTI, preamble, RO, and random access time-frequency resources.
  • the third node needs to configure the random access information required for the terminal device and/or sub-node to perform the handover during the handover admission control process, so that the terminal device and/or sub-node can perform random access based on the random access information to complete the access handover.
  • the second node sends a handover message to the first node.
  • the first node receives the switching information.
  • the switching information is used to instruct the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node.
  • the second node can inform the first node through the handover information that an access handover needs to be performed, and begin to switch the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node.
  • the switching information includes at least one of the following: first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information; the first information is used to configure the BAP address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the fourth information is used to configure BH-RLC; the fifth information is used to configure F1-AP; and the sixth information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.
  • first information is used to configure the BAP address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node
  • the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node
  • the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node
  • the fourth information is used to configure BH-RLC
  • the fifth information
  • the second node will inform the first node of one of the following information: the BAP address reserved by the third node for the first functional unit of the first node and the second functional unit of the first node for access switching; the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the resources on the transmission path; the BH-RLC configuration; the F1-AP configuration; or the configuration of the second functional unit of the first node.
  • This information will enable the first node to perform access switching and ensure successful access switching.
  • the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: PCI list, resource configuration information, TAI configuration information, or TAC configuration information.
  • the second node will inform the first node of at least one of the PCI list, resources, TAI or TAC configured by the third node, thereby ensuring that the first node's access handover is successful.
  • the handover information is carried by RRC signaling (such as an RRC reconfiguration request message).
  • RRC signaling such as an RRC reconfiguration request message.
  • the second node informs the first access node to perform an access handover via RRC signaling.
  • the first node switches its first functional unit and second functional unit from the second node to the third node according to the switching information.
  • the first node needs to complete uplink and downlink synchronization with the third node.
  • the second node sends context information to the third node.
  • the third node receives the context information.
  • the context information includes the context information of the first node.
  • the context information may also include the context information of the terminal devices and/or child nodes served by the first node.
  • the third node sends user data to the second node.
  • the second node receives user data.
  • This user data can be the same as the user data from the first node.
  • the first node sends a handover completion message to the third node.
  • the third node receives the handover completion information.
  • the switching completion information indicates that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node have completed the switching from the second node to the third node.
  • the third node sends a handover success response message to the second node.
  • the second node receives a successful handover response message.
  • the successful switchover response information indicates that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node have completed the switchover from the second node to the third node.
  • the second node sends a path switching request to the core network equipment.
  • the path switching request information is used to request a path switching.
  • core network equipment may include AMF and/or UPF.
  • the core network equipment executes a path switching decision based on the path switching request information.
  • the core network equipment sends path switching response information to the third node.
  • the third node receives the path switching response information.
  • the path switching response information is used to indicate that the path switching is complete.
  • the third node sends a context release message to the second node.
  • the second node receives the context release information.
  • the context release information is used to instruct the second node to release the context information of the first node.
  • the following example illustrates the access switching of the terminal devices or sub-nodes served by the first node.
  • the second node when it involves the access handover of terminal devices or sub-nodes served by the first node, if the terminal devices or sub-nodes served by the first node do not move with the first node, and the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node switch from the second node to the third node, then the second node can trigger the terminal devices or sub-nodes served by the first node to switch from the second node to the fourth node.
  • the fourth node is different from the third node, and the fourth node is used to provide core network connectivity or to provide backhaul access.
  • the fourth node is an IAB-node or an IAB-donor.
  • the access handover method for the terminal devices or sub-nodes served by the first node can be the traditional L3 handover, L1/L2 triggered mobility (LTM) handover, conditional handover (CHO) or a combination of the above methods, which will not be elaborated further.
  • LTM L1/L2 triggered mobility
  • CHO conditional handover
  • mIAB-node 1540 includes mIAB-node-MT 1541 and mIAB-node-DU 1542.
  • mIAB-node-MT 1541 is connected to IAB-donor-CU 1511 through IAB-donor-DU 1512
  • mIAB-node-DU 1542 is connected to IAB-donor-CU 1511 and UE 1560 respectively.
  • IAB-node 1550 includes IAB-node-MT 1551 and IAB-node-DU 1552.
  • IAB-node-MT 1551 is connected to IAB-donor-DU 1532
  • IAB-node-DU 1552 is connected to IAB-donor-CU 1531
  • IAB-donor-CU 1531 is connected to IAB-donor-DU 1532.
  • IAB-donor-CU 1511 will trigger UE 1560 to switch from IAB-donor-CU 1511 to IAB-donor-CU 1531, or IAB-donor-CU 1511 will trigger UE 1560 to switch from miAB-node 1540 to IAB-node 1550, and UE 1560 will connect to IAB-node-DU 1552.
  • miAB-node-MT 1541 and miAB-node-DU 1542 will switch from IAB-donor-CU 1511 to IAB-donor-CU 1521.
  • the mIAB-node-MT 1541 connects to the IAB-donor-DU 1522, and the mIAB-node-DU 1542 connects to the IAB-donor-CU 1521.
  • the following example illustrates the reporting of node capabilities of the first node.
  • the first node may report or broadcast its node capabilities to the second node. These capabilities may indicate whether the first node supports access handover for its first functional unit and/or second functional unit. Specifically, the first node may support access handover for both the first and second functional units simultaneously, or it may support only the first functional unit, or only the second functional unit, or it may not support either. Thus, the second node will only determine whether an access handover to the first node is necessary if the first node supports access handover for both the first and/or second functional units.
  • the first node sends capability indication information to the second node; correspondingly, the second node receives the capability indication information.
  • the capability indication information is used to indicate whether the first node supports or does not support access switching for the first functional unit and/or the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the capability indication information is used to indicate that the first node supports the access handover between the first functional unit and the second functional unit; if the capability indication information takes a second value, the capability indication information is used to indicate that the first node supports the access handover between the first functional unit; if the capability indication information takes a third value, the capability indication information is used to indicate that the first node supports the access handover between the second functional unit; if the capability indication information takes a fourth value, the capability indication information is used to indicate that the first node does not support the access handover between the first functional unit and the second functional unit.
  • a capability indication information consisting of 2 bits as an example, if the value of the 2 bits is 00, it indicates that the first node supports the access switching between the first functional unit and the second functional unit; if the value of the 2 bits is 01, it indicates that the first node supports the access switching between the first functional unit; if the value of the 2 bits is 10, it indicates that the first node supports the access switching between the second functional unit; if the value of the 2 bits is 11, it indicates that the first node does not support the access switching between the first functional unit and the second functional unit.
  • capability indication information can be associated with time and/or location information.
  • the time information associated with the capability indication information can indicate the effective time of the capability indication information;
  • the location information associated with the capability indication information can indicate the effective area of the capability indication information. That is, the content indicated by the capability indication information is only effective within the effective time period and within the effective area of the capability indication information.
  • the capability indication information takes the first value and the effective time of the capability indication information is [t1, t2] (where t1 represents the start time and t2 represents the end time), then within the time [t1, t2], the first node supports the first functional unit and the second functional unit to switch access.
  • the capability indication information is the fourth value and the effective area is the first area (where the first area can refer to the area where the distance from the reference position is less than the distance threshold), then within the first area, the first node does not support the access switching between the first functional unit and the second functional unit.
  • Figure 16 is a flowchart illustrating an access handover method in a frequent mobile network system based on conditional handover, according to an embodiment of this application.
  • Figure 16 includes the following steps:
  • the second node sends a condition switching request to the third node.
  • the third node receives the condition switching request information.
  • condition switching request information can be used to request a conditional switch between the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the second node since the second node provides access services to the first node, it can determine whether a conditional handover of the first node is necessary. For example, the second node can make a conditional handover decision based on measurement reports reported by the first node. When the second node decides that a conditional handover of the first node is necessary, it can request the third node to perform a conditional handover between the first node's first functional unit and its second functional unit via a conditional handover request message, so that the third node can execute conditional handover access control.
  • condition switching request information includes first identification information and second identification information.
  • the first identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the first node
  • the second identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the first identification information and the second identification information are used to indicate the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node, so that the third node can confirm that the condition switching request is made for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node.
  • condition switching request information may further include at least one of the following: third identification information, first context information, fourth identification information, or second context information.
  • the third identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the terminal device served by the first node
  • the first context information is used to indicate the context of the terminal device served by the first node
  • the fourth identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the child node served by the first node and the identifier of the second functional unit of the child node served by the first node
  • the second context information is used to indicate the context of the child node served by the first node.
  • conditional switching request information includes third identification information and/or first context information.
  • third identification information and/or first context information are used to inform the third node about configuring conditional switching for the terminal device.
  • the condition switching request information includes fourth identification information and/or second context information.
  • the fourth identification information and/or second context information are used to inform the third node about configuring condition switching for that child node.
  • the third node sends a condition switching response message.
  • the second node receives the condition switching response information.
  • condition switching response information is used to instruct the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.
  • the third node after the third node receives the conditional switching request information, the third node will perform conditional switching admission control to decide whether to allow the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform conditional switching, and inform the second node to allow the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform conditional switching through conditional switching response information.
  • condition switching response information includes at least one of the following: switching condition information, first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information.
  • the switching condition information is used to indicate the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to meet to switch from the second node to the third node; the first information is used to configure the BAP address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the fourth information is used to configure BH-RLC; the fifth information is used to configure F1-AP; and the sixth information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the third node in order to ensure that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node switch from the second node to the third node through conditional handover, the third node needs to configure at least one of the following information: the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to meet when switching from the second node to the third node; the BAP address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform access handover; the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the resources on the transmission path; the BH-RLC configuration; the F1-AP configuration; or the configuration of the second functional unit of the first node.
  • This information is used by the first node to perform conditional handover and ensure that the conditional handover is successful.
  • the conditions indicated by the switching condition information include: the distance between the reference position of the second node is greater than a first distance threshold, and/or the distance between the reference position of the third node is less than a second distance threshold; or, the BH-RLC validity time of at least one relay node on the transmission path to the second node is less than a validity time threshold.
  • the reference location of the second node can represent its geographical location.
  • the second node can have one or more reference locations.
  • the reference location of the third node can represent its geographical location.
  • the third node can have one or more reference locations.
  • the third node is located on the ground/land (e.g., TN IAB-donor)
  • its reference location is determined based on the location deployment of the frequent mobility network system, and this reference location is fixed.
  • the switching condition information indicates that the distance between the first node and the reference position of the second node is greater than a first distance threshold
  • the first node can determine whether the distance between its own position and the reference position of the second node is greater than the first distance threshold, in order to determine whether the conditions indicated by the switching condition information are met.
  • the first node can execute the switching of its first functional unit and its second functional unit from the second node to the third node.
  • the switching condition information indicates that the distance between the first node and the reference position of the third node is less than a second distance threshold
  • the first node can determine whether the distance between its own position and the reference position of the third node is less than the second distance threshold, in order to determine whether the conditions indicated by the switching condition information are met.
  • the first node can switch its first functional unit and second functional unit from the second node to the third node.
  • the handover condition information indicates that at least one relay node on the transmission path to the second node has a BH-RLC validity period less than a validity period threshold
  • the first node can determine whether there is a relay node on the transmission path from the first node to the second node whose BH-RLC validity period is less than the validity period threshold, in order to determine whether the conditions indicated by the handover condition information are met.
  • the first node can execute the handover of its first functional unit and second functional unit from the second node to the third node.
  • the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: PCI list, resource configuration information, TAI configuration information, or TAC configuration information.
  • the third node needs to configure at least one of the following for the second functional unit of the first node in the condition switching admission control process: PCI list, resources, TAI or TAC, in order to ensure that the first node can successfully perform condition switching.
  • conditional handover response information may also include random access information required for the handover of the terminal equipment and/or sub-nodes served by the first node.
  • random access information may include C-RNTI, preamble, RO, and random access time-frequency resources.
  • the third node needs to configure the random access information required for the terminal device and/or sub-node to perform conditional handover in the conditional handover admission control process, so that the terminal device and/or sub-node can perform random access based on the random access information to complete the conditional handover.
  • the second node sends condition switching information to the first node.
  • the first node receives the condition switching information.
  • condition switching information is used to configure the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch conditions.
  • the second node can inform the first node of the need to perform the conditional switch via conditional switch information. Additionally, after receiving the conditional switch information, the first node may send an RRC reconfiguration completion message to the third node.
  • condition switching information includes at least one of the following: switching condition information, first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information.
  • the switching condition information is used to indicate the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to meet to switch from the second node to the third node; the first information is used to configure the BAP address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the fourth information is used to configure BH-RLC; the fifth information is used to configure F1-AP; and the sixth information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the second node will inform the first node of at least one of the following information: the switching conditions configured by the third node, the BAP address reserved for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform access switching, the transmission path from the second node to the third node, the resources on the transmission path, the BH-RLC configuration, the F1-AP configuration, or the second functional unit configuration of the first node, so that the first node can perform access switching based on this information and ensure successful access switching.
  • the conditions indicated by the switching condition information include: the distance between the reference position of the second node is greater than a first distance threshold, and/or the distance between the reference position of the third node is less than a second distance threshold; or, the BH-RLC validity time of at least one relay node on the transmission path to the second node is less than a validity time threshold.
  • the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: PCI list, resource configuration information, TAI configuration information, or TAC configuration information.
  • the second node will inform the first node of at least one of the PCI list, resources, TAI or TAC configured by the third node, thereby ensuring that the first node's access handover is successful.
  • conditional handover information can be carried by RRC signaling (such as an RRC reconfiguration request message).
  • RRC signaling such as an RRC reconfiguration request message.
  • the second node informs the first access node to perform a conditional handover via RRC signaling.
  • the first node performs condition switching between the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node according to the condition switching information.
  • the first node will determine whether the conditions indicated by the switching condition information are met. If the conditions indicated by the switching condition information are met, the condition switching will be performed, switching the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node.
  • the following example illustrates a possible complete process for access handover in a frequent mobile network system based on conditional handover, based on the handover process shown in Figure 17 above.
  • Figure 17 is a flowchart illustrating another access handover method for a frequent mobile network system based on conditional handover provided in this embodiment.
  • Figure 17 includes the following steps:
  • the second node sends measurement configuration information to the first node.
  • the first node receives the measurement configuration information.
  • the second node can send measurement configuration information corresponding to multiple second-type nodes (including the third node) to the first node.
  • This measurement configuration information can be used to configure L1 and/or L3 measurements, and may include measurement frequency points, synchronization signal block measurement timing configuration (SMTC), measurement reporting trigger conditions (e.g., periodic, non-periodic, event-triggered), and measurement objects (e.g., location, signal quality).
  • SMTC synchronization signal block measurement timing configuration
  • measurement reporting trigger conditions e.g., periodic, non-periodic, event-triggered
  • measurement objects e.g., location, signal quality
  • the measurement configuration information can be carried by RRC signaling.
  • the first node can then measure signal quality (e.g., RSRP and/or RSRQ) according to the measurement configuration information to obtain signal quality results.
  • the measured signal can be an SSB (e.g., CD-SSB or CSI-RS).
  • the first node sends a measurement report to the second node.
  • the second node receives the measurement report.
  • the first node can report measurement results to the second node.
  • the measurement report may include location-related information of the first node (such as GNSS position or wavelet ID, satellite ephemeris, etc.) and signal quality results.
  • the reporting method can be periodic reporting or event-triggered reporting. In event-triggered reporting, the reporting condition can be that the signal quality of the second node is less than a first preset threshold and/or the signal quality of the third node is greater than a second preset threshold.
  • the second node determines the condition switching decision corresponding to the first node based on the measurement report.
  • the second node determines the conditional switching between the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node based on the measurement report.
  • the second node sends a condition switching request to the third node.
  • the third node receives the condition switching request information.
  • condition switching request information can be used to request a conditional switch between the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the second node since the second node provides access services to the first node, it can determine whether a conditional handover of the first node is necessary. For example, the second node can make a conditional handover decision based on measurement reports reported by the first node. When the second node decides that a conditional handover of the first node is necessary, it can request the third node to perform a conditional handover between the first node's first functional unit and its second functional unit via a conditional handover request message, so that the third node can execute conditional handover access control.
  • condition switching request information includes first identification information and second identification information.
  • the first identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the first node
  • the second identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the first identification information and the second identification information are used to indicate the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node, so that the third node can confirm that the condition switching request is made for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node.
  • condition switching request information may further include at least one of the following: third identification information, first context information, fourth identification information, or second context information.
  • the third identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the terminal device served by the first node
  • the first context information is used to indicate the context of the terminal device served by the first node
  • the fourth identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the child node served by the first node and the identifier of the second functional unit of the child node served by the first node
  • the second context information is used to indicate the context of the child node served by the first node.
  • the conditional switching request information includes third identification information and/or first context information. In this way, the third identification information and/or first context information are used to inform the third node of the terminal device's conditional switching configuration information. If a child node served by the first node needs to configure conditional switching, the conditional switching request information includes fourth identification information and/or second context information. In this way, the fourth identification information and/or second context information are used to inform the third node of the child node's conditional switching configuration information.
  • the third node sends a condition switching response message.
  • the second node receives the condition switching response information.
  • condition switching response information is used to instruct the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.
  • the third node after the third node receives the conditional switching request information, the third node will perform conditional switching admission control to decide whether to allow the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform conditional switching, and inform the second node to allow the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform conditional switching through conditional switching response information.
  • condition switching response information includes at least one of the following: switching condition information, first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information.
  • the switching condition information is used to indicate the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to meet to switch from the second node to the third node; the first information is used to configure the BAP address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the fourth information is used to configure BH-RLC; the fifth information is used to configure F1-AP; and the sixth information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the third node in order to ensure that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node switch from the second node to the third node through conditional handover, the third node needs to configure at least one of the following information: the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to meet when switching from the second node to the third node; the BAP address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform access handover; the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the resources on the transmission path; the BH-RLC configuration; the F1-AP configuration; or the configuration of the second functional unit of the first node.
  • This information is used by the first node to perform conditional handover and ensure that the conditional handover is successful.
  • the conditions indicated by the switching condition information include: the distance between the reference position of the second node is greater than a first distance threshold, and/or the distance between the reference position of the third node is less than a second distance threshold; or, the BH-RLC validity time of at least one relay node on the transmission path to the second node is less than a validity time threshold.
  • the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: PCI list, resource configuration information, TAI configuration information, or TAC configuration information.
  • the third node needs to configure at least one of the following for the second functional unit of the first node in the condition switching admission control process: PCI list, resources, TAI or TAC, in order to ensure that the first node can successfully perform condition switching.
  • the handover response information may also include random access information required for the handover of the terminal devices and/or sub-nodes served by the first node.
  • random access information may include C-RNTI, preamble, RO, and random access time-frequency resources.
  • the third node needs to configure the random access information required for the terminal device and/or sub-node to perform conditional handover in the conditional handover admission control process, so that the terminal device and/or sub-node can perform random access based on the random access information to complete the conditional handover.
  • the second node sends condition switching information to the first node.
  • the first node receives the condition switching information.
  • condition switching information is used to configure the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch conditions.
  • the second node can inform the first node of the need to perform the conditional switch via conditional switch information. Additionally, after receiving the conditional switch information, the first node may send an RRC reconfiguration completion message to the third node.
  • condition switching information includes at least one of the following: switching condition information, first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information.
  • the switching condition information is used to indicate the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to meet to switch from the second node to the third node; the first information is used to configure the BAP address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the fourth information is used to configure BH-RLC; the fifth information is used to configure F1-AP; and the sixth information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the second node will inform the first node of at least one of the following information: the switching conditions configured by the third node, the BAP address reserved for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform access switching, the transmission path from the second node to the third node, the resources on the transmission path, the BH-RLC configuration, the F1-AP configuration, or the second functional unit configuration of the first node, so that the first node can perform access switching based on this information and ensure successful access switching.
  • the conditions indicated by the switching condition information include: the distance between the reference position of the second node is greater than a first distance threshold, and/or the distance between the reference position of the third node is less than a second distance threshold; or, the BH-RLC validity time of at least one relay node on the transmission path to the second node is less than a validity time threshold.
  • the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: PCI list, resource configuration information, TAI configuration information, or TAC configuration information.
  • the second node will inform the first node of at least one of the PCI list, resources, TAI or TAC configured by the third node, thereby ensuring that the first node's access handover is successful.
  • conditional handover information can be carried by RRC signaling (such as an RRC reconfiguration request message).
  • RRC signaling such as an RRC reconfiguration request message.
  • the second node informs the first access node to perform a conditional handover via RRC signaling.
  • the first node performs condition switching between the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node according to the condition switching information.
  • the first node will determine whether the conditions indicated by the switching condition information are met. If the conditions indicated by the switching condition information are met, the condition switching will be performed, switching the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node.
  • the second node sends context information and user data to the third node.
  • the third node receives context information and user data.
  • the context information includes the context information of the first node, and the user data can be the user data of the first node.
  • the context information may also include the context information of the terminal devices and/or child nodes served by the first node.
  • steps S1707 and S1708 can be dynamically interchanged.
  • the first node determines and performs uplink and downlink synchronization with the third node.
  • the first node sends a handover completion message to the third node.
  • the third node receives the handover completion information.
  • the switching completion information indicates that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node have completed the switching from the second node to the third node.
  • the third node sends a handover success response message to the second node.
  • the second node receives a handover success response message.
  • the successful switchover response information indicates that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node have completed the switchover from the second node to the third node.
  • the second node sends a path switching request to the core network equipment.
  • the path switching request information is used to request a path switching.
  • core network equipment may include AMF and/or UPF.
  • the core network equipment executes path switching decisions based on the path switching request information.
  • the core network equipment sends path switching response information to the third node.
  • the third node receives the path switching response information.
  • the path switching response information is used to indicate that the path switching is complete.
  • the third node sends a context release message to the second node.
  • the second node receives the context release information.
  • the context release information is used to instruct the second node to release the context information of the first node.
  • the following provides examples illustrating the access switching of terminal devices or sub-nodes served by the first node, as well as the reporting of the first node's node capabilities.
  • the second node when it involves the access handover of terminal devices or sub-nodes served by the first node, if the terminal devices or sub-nodes served by the first node do not move with the first node, and the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node switch from the second node to the third node, then the second node can trigger the terminal devices or sub-nodes served by the first node to switch from the second node to the fourth node.
  • the fourth node is different from the third node, and the fourth node is used to provide core network connectivity or to provide backhaul access.
  • the fourth node is an IAB-node or an IAB-donor.
  • the access handover method for terminal devices or sub-nodes served by the first node can adopt traditional L3 handover, LTM handover, conditional handover (CHO), or a combination of the above methods, which will not be elaborated further.
  • the first node may report or broadcast its node capabilities to the second node. These capabilities may indicate whether the first node supports conditional switching of its first functional unit and/or second functional unit. Specifically, the first node may support conditional switching of both the first and second functional units simultaneously, or it may support only the first functional unit, or only the second functional unit, or it may not support either. Thus, the second node will only determine whether a conditional switch is needed for the first node if the first node supports conditional switching of both the first and/or second functional units.
  • the first node sends capability indication information to the second node; correspondingly, the second node receives the capability indication information.
  • the capability indication information is used to instruct the first node to support or not support conditional switching of its first functional unit and/or its second functional unit.
  • the capability indication information is used to indicate that the first node supports conditional switching between the first functional unit and the second functional unit; if the capability indication information takes a second value, the capability indication information is used to indicate that the first node supports conditional switching between the first functional unit; if the capability indication information takes a third value, the capability indication information is used to indicate that the first node supports conditional switching between the second functional unit; if the capability indication information takes a fourth value, the capability indication information is used to indicate that the first node does not support conditional switching between the first functional unit and the second functional unit.
  • a capability indication information of 2 bits if the value of the 2 bits is 00, it indicates that the first node supports conditional switching between the first functional unit and the second functional unit; if the value of the 2 bits is 01, it indicates that the first node supports conditional switching between the first functional unit; if the value of the 2 bits is 10, it indicates that the first node supports conditional switching between the second functional unit; if the value of the 2 bits is 11, it indicates that the first node does not support conditional switching between the first functional unit and the second functional unit.
  • capability indication information can be associated with time and/or location information.
  • the time information associated with the capability indication information can indicate the effective time of the capability indication information;
  • the location information associated with the capability indication information can indicate the effective area of the capability indication information. That is, the content indicated by the capability indication information is only effective within the effective time period and within the effective area of the capability indication information.
  • the first node supports conditional switching between the first functional unit and the second functional unit.
  • the capability indication information is the fourth value and the effective area is the first area (where the first area can refer to the area where the distance from the reference position is less than the distance threshold), then within the first area, the first node does not support conditional switching between the first functional unit and the second functional unit.
  • this embodiment will now explain the reselection of the second type of node where the first type of node resides in the idle/inactive state in a frequently moving network system.
  • this embodiment will use the example of a first type of node including a first node and a second type of node including a second node and a third node to specifically explain the reselection of the second node where the first node resides.
  • "reselection of the second node where the first node resides" can be simply referred to as “reselection of the node resides of the first node”.
  • the first node can be used to provide backhaul access functionality; the second node can be used to provide core network connectivity functionality and can provide access services to the first node; the third node can be used to provide core network connectivity functionality.
  • the first node is an IAB-node, the second node is the first IAB-donor, and the third node is the second IAB-donor.
  • the first node can support movement, and the second and third nodes can support movement or no movement.
  • the first node is a mIAB-node
  • the second node is the first mIAB-donor
  • the third node is the second mIAB-donor.
  • the first node can support NTN, for example, the first node is an NTN IAB-node.
  • the second and third nodes can support either NTN or TN, for example, the second node is the first NTN IAB-donor or the first TN IAB-donor, and the third node is the second NTN IAB-donor or the second TN IAB-donor.
  • Figure 18 is a flowchart illustrating a node relocation method in a frequently moving network system according to an embodiment of this application.
  • Figure 18 includes the following steps:
  • the second node sends node reselection information to the first node.
  • the second node receives node relocation information and performs node relocation relocation for the second node based on the node relocation information.
  • the node residency reselection information is used to indicate at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or valid information.
  • the second node assists the first node in reselecting the second node by using node reselection information, thereby realizing node reselection in a frequent mobility network system and achieving efficient mobility management.
  • Type information can be used to indicate the type of the second node.
  • the type of the second node can include one of the following: the second node supports TN, the second node supports NTN, the second node supports mobile, or the second node does not support mobile.
  • the second node can tell the first node its type through type information, so that the first node can reselect the second node based on the type information.
  • the second node supports TN, which means the second node is located on the ground/land or belongs to the TN system, such as a TN IAB-donor or a TN miIAB-donor.
  • the second node supports NTN, which means the second node is located off-ground (in the air) or belongs to the NTN system, such as an NTN IAB-donor or an NTN miIAB-donor.
  • the second node supports movement, meaning its location can be moved, such as a miIAB-donor.
  • the second node does not support movement, meaning its location is fixed, such as a non-mIAB-donor, an IAB-donor, or a stationary/fixed IAB-donor.
  • the first node can reselect its node based on the type of the second node. For example, if the second node is an NTN mIAB-donor, and the coverage of the NTN mIAB-donor changes due to relocation, the first node can reselect a TN IAB-donor from the original NTN mIAB-donor to reside in.
  • Coverage information can be used to indicate the service coverage of the second node.
  • the second node can inform the first node of its service coverage through coverage information, so that the first node can reselect the second node based on the coverage information.
  • coverage information includes the reference location and distance threshold of the second node, and/or the service validity time information and service validity time threshold of the second node.
  • the coverage area of the second node is the range where the distance between the second node and its reference location is less than the distance threshold.
  • the reference location of the second node can represent its geographical location.
  • the second node can have one or more reference locations.
  • its reference location can be determined based on the location deployment of the frequent mobility network system, and this reference location is fixed.
  • the first node can determine whether it is within the coverage area of the second node based on whether the distance between its own location and the second node's reference location is less than a distance threshold. Specifically, if the distance between the first node's location and the second node's reference location is less than the distance threshold, then the first node is within the second node's coverage area.
  • the first node may not be within the second node's coverage area, and in this case, the first node needs to perform a node reselection.
  • the service validity period information of the second node indicates the valid time during which the second node can provide services to the first node.
  • the first node can determine whether the second node can continue to provide access services based on whether the service validity period indicated by the second node's service validity period information is less than a service validity period threshold, or whether the service validity period indicated by the second node's service validity period information has ended. Specifically, if the service validity period indicated by the second node's service validity period information is greater than or equal to the service validity period threshold, or if the service validity period indicated by the second node's service validity period information has not ended, then it is determined that the second node can continue to provide access services to the first node.
  • the service validity period indicated by the second node's service validity period information is less than the service validity period threshold, or if the service validity period indicated by the second node's service validity period information has ended, then it is determined that the second node cannot continue to provide access services to the first node, and the first node needs to perform node reselection.
  • the coverage information includes at least one of the following: satellite ephemeris information of the second node, service validity time information and service validity time threshold of the second node, coverage area information of the second node, or reference location information of the core network anchor point associated with the second node.
  • the coverage information may include at least one of the following: the second node's satellite ephemeris information (such as satellite position, velocity, orbit, etc.), the second node's service validity time information and service validity time threshold, the second node's coverage area information (such as spectral position, etc.), and the reference location information of the core network anchor point associated with the second node.
  • the reference location information of the core network anchor point may include the reference location of the NTN gateway.
  • Path information can be used to indicate the transmission path of the second node.
  • the second node can tell the first node its transmission path through the path information, so that the first node can reselect the second node based on the path information.
  • the path information includes at least one of the following: the number of hops, the number of hops, the first delay, the second delay, the first distance, or the second distance.
  • the first hop count information can be used to indicate the number of hops on the transmission path from the node served by the second node to the second node itself. It should be noted that the number of hops on the transmission path from the node served by the second node to the second node can be understood as the number of intermediate nodes through which data passes from the node served by the second node to the second node, i.e., the number of hops.
  • the nodes served by the second node include the first node.
  • the second node can use the first hop count information to inform the first node of the number of hops on the transmission path from the first node to the second node, so that the first node can determine whether to perform node reselection based on this number. For example, when the number of hops exceeds the first hop count threshold, the first node performs node reselection.
  • the second hop count information can be used to indicate the number of hops on the transmission path from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node. It should be noted that the number of hops on the transmission path from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node can be understood as the number of intermediate nodes through which data passes from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node, i.e., the number of hops. In this way, the second node can use the second hop count information to inform the terminal device of the number of hops on the transmission path from the terminal device to the second node, so that the terminal device can determine whether to perform node reselection based on this hop count. For example, when the hop count is greater than the second hop count threshold, the terminal device performs node reselection.
  • the first delay information can be used to indicate the transmission delay from the node served by the second node to the second node itself.
  • the nodes served by the second node include the first node.
  • the second node can use the first delay information to inform the first node of the transmission delay from the first node to the second node, so that the first node can determine whether to perform node reselection based on this transmission delay. For example, when the transmission delay is greater than a first transmission time domain threshold, the first node performs node reselection.
  • the second delay information can be used to indicate the transmission delay from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node.
  • the second node can inform the terminal device of the transmission delay from the terminal device to the second node through the second delay information, so that the terminal device can determine whether to perform node reselection based on the transmission delay. For example, when the transmission delay is greater than a second transmission time domain threshold, the terminal device performs node reselection.
  • the first distance information can be used to indicate the distance from the nodes served by the second node to the second node itself.
  • the nodes served by the second node include the first node.
  • the second node can use the first distance information to inform the first node of the distance from the first node to the second node, so that the first node can determine whether to perform node reselection based on this distance. For example, when the distance is greater than a first distance threshold, the first node performs node reselection.
  • the second distance information can be used to indicate the distance from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node.
  • the second node can use the second distance information to inform the terminal device of the distance from the terminal device to the second node, so that the terminal device can determine whether to perform node reselection based on this distance. For example, when the distance is greater than the second distance threshold, the terminal device performs node reselection.
  • Valid information can be used to indicate the validity period of the F1 interface of the second node.
  • the second node can inform the first node of the validity period of its F1 interface through valid information, so that the first node can reselect the second node based on the valid information.
  • the second node can connect to the first node via the F1 interface.
  • the first node can determine whether the second node can continue to provide access services based on whether the validity period of the second node's F1 interface is less than the F1 interface validity period threshold, or whether the validity period of the second node's F1 interface has expired. Specifically, if the validity period of the second node's F1 interface is greater than or equal to the F1 interface validity period threshold, or if the validity period of the second node's F1 interface has not expired, then the second node can continue to provide access services to the first node.
  • the second node cannot continue to provide access services to the first node, and in this case, the second node needs to perform node reselection.
  • valid information includes a valid time period or a timer; the valid time period is the valid time period of the F1 interface between the second node and the nodes served by the second node; the runtime of the timer is the valid duration of the F1 interface between the second node and the nodes served by the second node.
  • the effective time of the F1 interface of the second node is determined by the effective time period or timer.
  • the process also includes the following steps:
  • the first node sends node residency reselection information to the child nodes or terminal devices it serves. In this way, the child nodes or terminal devices served by the first node can determine whether to perform node residency reselection based on the node residency reselection information.
  • IAB-node DU can send node reselection information to the child IAB-node or terminal device it serves.
  • the process also includes the following steps:
  • the first node determines the third node based on the node reselection information.
  • the first node determines the third node based on the node residency reselection information, and thus chooses to reside on the third node, thereby realizing node residency reselection.
  • IAB-node MT can determine the third node based on the node relocation information.
  • the first node may reselect a suitable third node to reside on based on the type information. For example, if the second node is an NTN mIAB-donor, the first node may reselect a TN IAB-donor from the NTN mIAB-donor to reside on.
  • the first node may reselect a suitable third node to reside on based on coverage information. For example, if the distance between the location of the first node and the reference location of the second node is greater than or equal to a distance threshold, the first node may not be within the coverage area of the second node, and in this case, the first node may reselect a suitable third node to reside on.
  • the first node may reselect a suitable IAB-donor to reside on.
  • the first node may reselect a suitable third node to reside on based on the path information. For example, if the number of hops on the transmission path from the first node to the second node is greater than a first hop count threshold, the first node may reselect a suitable third node to reside on. Similarly, if the transmission delay from the first node to the second node is greater than a first transmission time threshold, the first node may reselect a suitable third node to reside on. Furthermore, if the distance from the first node to the second node is greater than a first distance threshold, the first node may reselect a suitable third node to reside on.
  • the following example illustrates Figure 18, with the first node being the IAB-node and the second node being the first IAB-donor.
  • the first IAB-donor sends node relocation information to one or more IAB-nodes within its service range.
  • the sending method can be unicast, multicast, or broadcast, such as carrying node relocation information via RRC messages, F1-AP messages, or Xn-AP messages.
  • the node relocation information includes at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or validity information.
  • type information can be used to indicate that the first IAB-donor is one of TN IAB-donor, NTN donor, stationary IAB-donor, or mIAB-donor.
  • the coverage information may include the reference positions and distance thresholds of one or more TN IAB-donors. Specifically, the range where the distance to the reference position of a TN IAB-donor is less than or equal to the distance threshold belongs to the coverage area of that TN IAB-donor. If the first IAB-donor is an NTN IAB-donor, the coverage information may include the satellite ephemeris information (i.e., satellite position, velocity, orbit, etc.), service validity period information, coverage area information, and the reference position information of the core network anchor point associated with that NTN IAB-donor.
  • satellite ephemeris information i.e., satellite position, velocity, orbit, etc.
  • the path information may include hop count, latency, distance, etc., which are used to indicate the hop count, latency, and distance of the transmission path from the IAB-node served by the first IAB-donor or the UE to the first IAB-donor.
  • the valid information it may include the valid time period or timer of the F1 interface between the first IAB-donor and the IAB-node served by the first IAB-donor.
  • the IAB-node DU served by the first IAB-donor can receive node reselection information and send it to its served child IAB-nodes and/or UEs.
  • the sending method can be unicast, multicast, or broadcast, such as carrying node reselection information through RRC messages or Uu messages. In this way, the node reselection information assists the served child IAB-nodes and/or UEs in performing node reselection.
  • the IAB-node MT served by the first IAB-donor can receive node relocation reselection information and reselect a suitable IAB-donor to reside in based on the reselection information.
  • the IAB-node MT may reselect a suitable IAB-donor based on the type information. For example, if the first IAB-donor is an NTN mIAB-donor, the IAB-node MT may reselect a TN IAB-donor from the NTN mIAB-donor for access.
  • the IAB-node MT may reselect a suitable IAB-donor based on coverage information. For example, if the distance between the location of the IAB-node MT and the reference location of the first IAB-donor is greater than or equal to a distance threshold, the IAB-node MT may not be within the coverage area of the first IAB-donor, and in this case, the IAB-node MT may reselect a suitable IAB-donor.
  • the IAB-node MT may reselect a suitable IAB-donor.
  • the IAB-node MT can reselect a suitable IAB-donor based on the path information. For example, if the number of hops on the transmission path from the IAB-node MT to the first IAB-donor is greater than a first hop count threshold, the IAB-node MT will reselect a suitable IAB-donor. Similarly, if the transmission delay from the IAB-node MT to the first IAB-donor is greater than a first transmission time threshold, the IAB-node MT will reselect a suitable IAB-donor. Furthermore, if the distance from the IAB-node MT to the first IAB-donor is greater than a first distance threshold, the IAB-node MT will reselect a suitable IAB-donor.
  • the sub-IAB-node MT can receive node relocation reselection information from the IAB-node DU, and reselect a suitable IAB-donor or IAB-node to reside in based on the reselection information. This will not be elaborated further.
  • Figure 19 is a flowchart illustrating another node relocation method in a frequently moving network system according to this embodiment.
  • Figure 19 includes the following steps:
  • the second node sends node reselection information to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives node relocation information and performs node relocation relocation for the second node based on the node relocation information.
  • the node residency reselection information is used to indicate at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, or path information.
  • the second node assists the terminal device in reselecting the node's relocation information.
  • the process also includes the following steps:
  • the terminal device determines the third node based on the node reselection information.
  • the terminal device determines the third node based on the node relocation information, and then chooses to relocate to the third node, thus realizing node relocation.
  • the terminal device may reselect a suitable third node to reside on based on the type information. For example, if the second node is an NTN mIAB-donor, the terminal device may reselect a TN IAB-donor from the NTN mIAB-donor to reside on.
  • the terminal device may reselect a suitable third node to reside on based on coverage information. For example, if the distance between the terminal device's location and the reference location of the second node is greater than or equal to a distance threshold, the terminal device may not be within the coverage area of the second node, and in this case, the terminal device may reselect a suitable third node to reside on.
  • the terminal device may reselect a suitable IAB-donor to reside on.
  • the terminal device may reselect a suitable third node to reside on based on the path information. For example, if the number of hops on the transmission path from the terminal device to the second node is greater than a first hop count threshold, the terminal device may reselect a suitable third node to reside on. Similarly, if the transmission delay from the terminal device to the second node is greater than a first transmission time threshold, the terminal device may reselect a suitable third node to reside on. Furthermore, if the distance from the terminal device to the second node is greater than a first distance threshold, the terminal device may reselect a suitable third node to reside on.
  • the process also includes the following steps:
  • the terminal device updates the PDCP layer system configuration information of the second node based on the node relocation information.
  • the terminal device only needs to update the PDCP layer configuration information of the second node according to the node relocation information, and does not need to update the relevant PHY/MAC/RLC layer configuration information.
  • the terminal device may be within the coverage area of the second node. If the second node can continue to provide access services to the terminal device, the terminal device only needs to update the PDCP layer configuration information of the second node.
  • the terminal device only needs to update the PDCP layer configuration information of the second node.
  • Figure 20 is a flowchart illustrating another node relocation method in a frequently moving network system according to this embodiment.
  • Figure 20 includes the following steps:
  • the first node sends node reselection information to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives node relocation information and performs node relocation relocation for the second node based on the node relocation information.
  • the node residency reselection information is used to indicate at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, or path information.
  • the first node assists the terminal device in reselecting the second node's node residency through node residency reselection information.
  • the terminal device determines the third node based on the node reselection information.
  • the terminal device determines the third node based on the node relocation information, and then chooses to relocate to the third node, thus realizing node relocation.
  • the process also includes the following steps:
  • the terminal device updates the PDCP layer system configuration information of the first node based on the node relocation information.
  • the terminal device only needs to update the PDCP layer configuration information of the first node according to the node relocation information, and does not need to update the relevant PHY/MAC/RLC layer configuration information.
  • the first node includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to the execution of each function.
  • this embodiment can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed in hardware or by computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Those skilled in the art can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this embodiment.
  • This application embodiment can divide the first node into functional units according to the above method example.
  • each function can be divided into different functional units, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing unit.
  • the integrated unit can be implemented in hardware or as a software program module. It should be noted that the unit division in this application embodiment is illustrative and only represents a logical functional division, while other division methods may be used in actual implementation.
  • FIG21 is a functional unit composition block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 2100 includes a receiving unit 2101.
  • the receiving unit 2101 can be a module unit for receiving and processing signals, information, etc., and there are no specific limitations on this.
  • the communication device 2100 may also include a transmitting unit.
  • the transmitting unit can be a module unit used for transmitting signals, information, etc., and there are no specific limitations on this.
  • the communication device 2100 may further include a storage unit for storing computer program code or instructions executed by the communication device 2100.
  • the storage unit may be a memory.
  • the communication device 2100 may be a chip or a chip module.
  • the receiving unit 2101 can be integrated into the same unit or into different units.
  • the receiving unit 2101 can be integrated into the communication unit.
  • the communication unit can be a communication interface, transceiver, transceiver circuit, etc.
  • the communication device 2100 may also include a processing unit.
  • the processing unit can be a processor or controller, such as a baseband processor, baseband chip, central processing unit (CPU), general-purpose processor, digital signal processor (DSP), application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), field-programmable gate array (FPGA), or other programmable logic device, transistor logic device, hardware component, or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute the various exemplary logic blocks, modules, and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of this embodiment.
  • the processing unit can also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as including one or more microprocessor combinations, a combination of DSP and microprocessor, etc.
  • the communication device 2100 is used to perform any of the steps performed by the first node/chip/chip module, etc., as described in the above method embodiments.
  • the receiving unit 2101 is used to perform any of the steps in the above method embodiments, and when performing actions such as sending, it can selectively call other units to complete the corresponding operations. A detailed description follows.
  • the receiving unit 2101 is used for:
  • the switching information is used to instruct the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node.
  • the second node in this embodiment informs the first node via handover information to switch the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node.
  • the access handover of the first functional unit and the access handover of the second functional unit of the first node are performed using the same handover process. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, reduce resource consumption, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thereby achieving efficient mobility management.
  • the switching information includes at least one of the following: first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information;
  • the first information is used to configure the backhaul adaptation protocol address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node.
  • the second piece of information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node;
  • the third information is used to configure resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node;
  • the fourth piece of information is used to configure backhaul radio link control
  • the fifth piece of information is used to configure the F1 application protocol
  • the sixth piece of information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: a list of physical cell identifiers, resource configuration information, tracking area identifier configuration information, or tracking area code configuration information.
  • the terminal equipment or sub-node served by the first node switches from the second node to the fourth node, whereby the fourth node is used to provide core network connection functions or to provide backhaul access functions.
  • the communication device 2100 also includes a transmitting unit
  • the sending unit is used to send capability indication information to the second node.
  • the capability indication information is used to indicate whether the first node supports or does not support the access switching of the first functional unit and/or the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the receiving unit 2101 is used for:
  • the condition switching information is used to configure the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch conditions.
  • this embodiment informs the first node to perform conditional handover of its first and second functional units through conditional handover information.
  • conditional handover information In this way, by performing conditional handover of the first and second functional units of the first node, the conditional handover of the first and second functional units of the first node is executed together using the same handover process. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, lower resource consumption, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thereby achieving efficient mobility management.
  • condition switching information includes at least one of the following: switching condition information, first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information;
  • the switching condition information is used to indicate the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to meet to switch from the second node to the third node, and the third node is used to provide core network connectivity functions.
  • the first information is used to configure the BAP address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node;
  • the second piece of information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node;
  • the third information is used to configure resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node;
  • the fourth piece of information is used to configure BH-RLC
  • the fifth piece of information is used to configure F1-AP
  • the sixth piece of information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the conditions indicated by the switching condition information include:
  • the distance to the reference position of the second node is greater than the first distance threshold, and/or the distance to the reference position of the third node is less than the second distance threshold; and/or,
  • the method further includes:
  • the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node will be switched from the second node to the third node.
  • the communication device 2100 also includes a transmitting unit
  • the sending unit is used to send capability indication information to the second node.
  • the capability indication information is used to instruct the first node to support or not support the first functional unit and/or the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.
  • the receiving unit 2101 is used for:
  • Receive node residency reselection information which indicates at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or valid information;
  • Type information is used to indicate the type of the second node, which is used to provide core network connectivity functions
  • Coverage information is used to indicate the service coverage of the second node
  • Path information is used to indicate the transmission path of the second node
  • the valid information is used to indicate the validity period of the F1 interface of the second node.
  • this embodiment assists the first node in reselecting the second node through node camp reselection information, thereby realizing node camp reselection in a frequent mobility network system and achieving efficient mobility management.
  • the communication device 2100 also includes a transmitting unit
  • the sending unit is used to send node reselection information to the child nodes or terminal devices served by the first node.
  • the communication device 2100 also includes a reselection unit
  • the reselection unit is used to determine the third node based on the node reselection information.
  • the third node is used to provide core network connectivity.
  • the coverage information includes the reference location and distance threshold of the second node, and/or the service validity time information and service validity time threshold of the second node; the coverage area of the second node is the area where the distance between the second node and its reference location is less than the distance threshold; or,
  • the coverage information includes at least one of the following: satellite ephemeris information of the second node, service validity time information and service validity time threshold of the second node, coverage area information of the second node, or reference location information of the core network anchor point associated with the second node.
  • the path information includes at least one of the following: first hop count information, second hop count information, first latency information, second latency information, first distance information, or second distance information;
  • the first hop count information is used to indicate the number of hops on the transmission path from the node served by the second node to the second node;
  • the second hop count information is used to indicate the number of hops on the transmission path from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node;
  • the first delay information is used to indicate the transmission delay from the node served by the second node to the second node;
  • the second delay information is used to indicate the transmission delay from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node;
  • the first distance information is used to indicate the distance from the node served by the second node to the second node;
  • the second distance information is used to indicate the distance from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node.
  • valid information may include a valid time period or a timer
  • the valid time period is the valid time period of the F1 interface between the second node and the node served by the second node;
  • the timer's runtime is the effective duration of the F1 interface between the second node and the nodes it serves.
  • the second node includes the corresponding hardware structure and/or software modules for executing each function.
  • FIG22 is a functional unit block diagram of another communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 2200 includes a transmitting unit 2201.
  • the transmitting unit 2201 can be a module unit used for transmitting signals, information, etc., and there are no specific limitations on this.
  • the communication device 2200 may also include a receiving unit.
  • the receiving unit can be a module unit for receiving and processing signals, information, etc., and there are no specific limitations on this.
  • the communication device 2200 may further include a storage unit for storing computer program code or instructions executed by the communication device 2200.
  • the storage unit may be a memory.
  • the communication device 2200 may be a chip or a chip module.
  • the transmitting unit 2201 can be integrated into the communication unit.
  • the communication unit can be a communication interface, transceiver, transceiver circuit, etc.
  • the communication device 2200 may also include a processing unit.
  • the processing unit can be a processor or controller, such as a baseband processor, baseband chip, CPU, general-purpose processor, DSP, ASIC, FPGA, or other programmable logic device, transistor logic device, hardware component, or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute the various exemplary logic blocks, modules, and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of this embodiment.
  • the processing unit can also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as including one or more microprocessor combinations, a combination of DSP and microprocessor, etc.
  • the communication device 2200 is used to perform any of the steps performed by the chip/chip module/SMF, etc., as described in the above method embodiments.
  • the sending unit 2201 is used to perform any of the steps in the above method embodiments, and when performing actions such as sending, it can selectively call other units to complete the corresponding operations. A detailed description follows.
  • the sending unit 2201 is used for:
  • a switching message is sent to the first node, which instructs the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node.
  • this embodiment informs the first node via handover information to switch its first functional unit and second functional unit from the second node to the third node.
  • the access handover of the first functional unit and the access handover of the second functional unit of the first node are performed using the same handover procedure. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, lower resource consumption, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thus achieving efficient mobility management.
  • the communication device 2200 includes a receiving unit
  • the sending unit 2201 is also used to send a switching request information to the third node.
  • the switching request information is used to request the first functional unit of the first IAB node and the second functional unit of the first node to be switched from the second node to the third node.
  • the receiving unit is used to receive handover response information from the third node.
  • the handover response information is used to indicate that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node are permitted to switch from the second node to the third node.
  • the communication device 2200 includes a receiving unit:
  • the receiving unit is used to receive capability indication information from the first node.
  • the capability indication information is used to indicate whether the first node supports or does not support the first functional unit and/or the second functional unit of the first node to perform access switching.
  • the switching request information includes first identification information and second identification information
  • the first identification information is used to indicate the identification of the first functional unit of the first node
  • the second identification information is used to indicate the identification of the second functional unit of the first node
  • the handover request information may also include at least one of the following: third identification information, first context information, fourth identification information, or second context information;
  • the third identification information is used to indicate the identification of the terminal device served by the first node
  • the first context information is used to indicate the context of the terminal device served by the first node; the fourth identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the sub-node served by the first node and the identifier of the second functional unit of the sub-node served by the first node.
  • the second context information is used to indicate the context of the child nodes served by the first node.
  • the switching response information includes at least one of the following: first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information;
  • the first information is used to configure the backhaul adaptation protocol address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node.
  • the second piece of information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node;
  • the third information is used to configure resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node;
  • the fourth piece of information is used to configure backhaul radio link control
  • the fifth piece of information is used to configure the F1 application protocol
  • the sixth piece of information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: a list of physical cell identifiers, resource configuration information, tracking area identifier configuration information, or tracking area code configuration information.
  • the sending unit 2201 is used for:
  • the condition switching information is used to configure the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch conditions.
  • this embodiment informs the first node to perform conditional handover of its first and second functional units through conditional handover information.
  • conditional handover information In this way, by performing conditional handover of the first and second functional units of the first node, the conditional handover of the first and second functional units of the first node is executed together using the same handover process. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, lower resource consumption, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thereby achieving efficient mobility management.
  • the transmitting unit 2201 is also used for:
  • the conditional switching request message is used to request the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform conditional switching.
  • the third node is used to provide core network connection functions.
  • the condition switching response information is used to instruct the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.
  • the communication device 2200 may also include a receiving unit;
  • the receiving unit is used to receive capability indication information from the first node.
  • the capability indication information is used to instruct the first node to support or not support the first functional unit and/or the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.
  • condition switching request information includes first identification information and second identification information
  • the first identification information is used to indicate the identification of the first functional unit of the first node
  • the second identification information is used to indicate the identification of the second functional unit of the first node
  • condition switching request information may also include at least one of the following: third identification information, first context information, fourth identification information, or second context information;
  • the third identification information is used to indicate the identification of the terminal device served by the first node
  • the first context information is used to indicate the context of the terminal device served by the first node
  • the fourth identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the child node served by the first node and the identifier of the second functional unit of the child node served by the first node;
  • the second context information is used to indicate the context of the child nodes served by the first node.
  • condition switching response information includes at least one of the following: switching condition information, first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information;
  • the switching condition information is used to indicate the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node must meet to switch from the second node to the third node;
  • the first information is used to configure the BAP address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node;
  • the second piece of information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node;
  • the third information is used to configure resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node;
  • the fourth piece of information is used to configure BH-RLC
  • the fifth piece of information is used to configure F1-AP; or,
  • the sixth piece of information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the conditions indicated by the switching condition information include:
  • the distance to the reference position of the second node is greater than the first distance threshold, and/or the distance to the reference position of the third node is less than the second distance threshold; or,
  • the sending unit 2201 is used for:
  • Send node relocation information which includes at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or valid information;
  • Type information is used to indicate the type of the second node
  • Coverage information is used to indicate the service coverage of the second node
  • Path information is used to indicate the transmission path of the second node
  • the valid information is used to indicate the validity period of the F1 interface of the second node.
  • this embodiment assists the first node in reselecting the second node through node camp reselection information, thereby realizing node camp reselection in a frequent mobility network system and achieving efficient mobility management.
  • the coverage information includes the reference location and distance threshold of the second node, and/or the service validity time information and service validity time threshold of the second node; the coverage area of the second node is the area where the distance between the second node and its reference location is less than the distance threshold; or,
  • the coverage information includes at least one of the following: satellite ephemeris information of the second node, service validity time information and service validity time threshold of the second node, coverage area information of the second node, or reference location information of the core network anchor point associated with the second node.
  • the path information includes at least one of the following: first hop count information, second hop count information, first latency information, second latency information, first distance information, or second distance information;
  • the first hop count information is used to indicate the number of hops on the transmission path from the node served by the second node to the second node;
  • the second hop count information is used to indicate the number of hops on the transmission path from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node;
  • the first delay information is used to indicate the transmission delay from the node served by the second node to the second node;
  • the second delay information is used to indicate the transmission delay from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node;
  • the first distance information is used to indicate the distance from the node served by the second node to the second node;
  • the second distance information is used to indicate the distance from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node.
  • valid information may include a valid time period or a timer
  • the valid time period is the valid time period of the F1 interface between the second node and the node served by the second node;
  • the timer's runtime is the effective duration of the F1 interface between the second node and the nodes it serves.
  • the third node includes the corresponding hardware structure and/or software modules for executing each function.
  • FIG23 is a functional unit block diagram of another communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 2300 includes a receiving unit 2301 and a transmitting unit 2302.
  • the receiving unit 2301 can be a module unit for receiving and processing signals, information, etc., and there are no specific limitations on this.
  • the transmitting unit 2302 can be a module unit used for transmitting signals, information, etc., and there are no specific limitations on this.
  • the communication device 2300 may further include a storage unit for storing computer program code or instructions executed by the communication device 2300.
  • the storage unit may be a memory.
  • the communication device 2300 may be a chip or a chip module.
  • the receiving unit 2301 and the transmitting unit 2302 can be integrated into the communication unit.
  • the communication unit can be a communication interface, transceiver, transceiver circuit, etc.
  • the communication device 2300 may also include a processing unit.
  • the processing unit can be a processor or controller, such as a baseband processor, baseband chip, CPU, general-purpose processor, DSP, ASIC, FPGA, or other programmable logic device, transistor logic device, hardware component, or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute the various exemplary logic blocks, modules, and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of this embodiment.
  • the processing unit can also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as including one or more microprocessor combinations, a combination of DSP and microprocessor, etc.
  • the communication device 2300 is used to perform any of the steps performed by the chip/chip module/SMF, etc., as described in the above method embodiments.
  • the receiving unit 2301 and the sending unit 2302 are used to perform any of the steps in the above method embodiments, and when performing actions such as sending, other units can be selectively invoked to complete the corresponding operation.
  • other units can be selectively invoked to complete the corresponding operation.
  • receiving unit 2301 is used to receive switching request information from the second node, the switching request information being used to request the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to be switched from the second node to the third node.
  • the sending unit 2302 is used to send a handover response information to the second node.
  • the handover response information is used to indicate that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node are allowed to switch from the second node to the third node.
  • the second node in this embodiment can determine whether an access handover to the first node is necessary.
  • the second node decides that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to be switched from the second node to the third node
  • the second node requests the third node to switch the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node through a handover request message, so that the third node can perform handover admission control.
  • the access handover of the first functional unit and the access handover of the second functional unit of the first node are performed together using the same handover process, which helps to reduce signaling overhead, reduce resource overhead, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thereby achieving efficient mobility management.
  • the switching request information includes first identification information and second identification information
  • the first identification information is used to indicate the identification of the first functional unit of the first node
  • the second identification information is used to indicate the identification of the second functional unit of the first node
  • the handover request information may also include at least one of the following: third identification information, first context information, fourth identification information, or second context information;
  • the third identification information is used to indicate the identification of the terminal device served by the first node
  • the first context information is used to indicate the context of the terminal device served by the first node; the fourth identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the sub-node served by the first node and the identifier of the second functional unit of the sub-node served by the first node.
  • the second context information is used to indicate the context of the child nodes served by the first node.
  • the switching response information includes at least one of the following: first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information;
  • the first information is used to configure the backhaul adaptation protocol address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node.
  • the second piece of information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node;
  • the third information is used to configure resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node;
  • the fourth piece of information is used to configure backhaul radio link control
  • the fifth piece of information is used to configure the F1 application protocol
  • the sixth piece of information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: a list of physical cell identifiers, resource configuration information, tracking area identifier configuration information, or tracking area code configuration information.
  • receiving unit 2301 is used to receive condition switching request information from the second node, the condition switching request information being used to request the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.
  • the sending unit 2302 is used to send condition switching response information to the second node.
  • the condition switching response information is used to instruct the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.
  • the second node in this embodiment can determine whether a conditional handover of the first node is necessary.
  • the second node requests the third node to perform the conditional handover of the first node's first and second functional units through a conditional handover request message, so that the third node can execute conditional handover admission control.
  • conditional handover of the first node's first and second functional units can be executed together using the same handover process, thereby reducing signaling overhead, reducing resource overhead, shortening mobility interruption time, and improving handover efficiency, achieving efficient mobility management.
  • condition switching request information includes first identification information and second identification information
  • the first identification information is used to indicate the identification of the first functional unit of the first node
  • the second identification information is used to indicate the identification of the second functional unit of the first node
  • condition switching request information may also include at least one of the following: third identification information, first context information, fourth identification information, or second context information;
  • the third identification information is used to indicate the identification of the terminal device served by the first node
  • the first context information is used to indicate the context of the terminal device served by the first node
  • the fourth identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the child node served by the first node and the identifier of the second functional unit of the child node served by the first node;
  • the second context information is used to indicate the context of the child nodes served by the first node.
  • condition switching response information includes at least one of the following: switching condition information, first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information;
  • the switching condition information is used to indicate the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node must meet to switch from the second node to the third node;
  • the first information is used to configure the BAP address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node;
  • the second piece of information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node;
  • the third information is used to configure resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node;
  • the fourth piece of information is used to configure BH-RLC
  • the fifth piece of information is used to configure F1-AP; or,
  • the sixth piece of information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.
  • the conditions indicated by the switching condition information include:
  • the distance to the reference position of the second node is greater than the first distance threshold, and/or the distance to the reference position of the third node is less than the second distance threshold; or,
  • the terminal device includes the corresponding hardware structure and/or software modules for executing each function.
  • FIG24 is a functional unit block diagram of another communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 2400 includes a receiving unit 2401.
  • the receiving unit 2401 can be a module unit for receiving and processing signals, information, etc., and there are no specific limitations on this.
  • the communication device 2400 may also include a transmitting unit.
  • This transmitting unit can be a module unit used for transmitting signals, information, etc., and there are no specific limitations on its use.
  • the communication device 2400 may further include a storage unit for storing computer program code or instructions executed by the communication device 2400.
  • the storage unit may be a memory.
  • the communication device 2400 may be a chip or a chip module.
  • the receiving unit 2401 can be integrated into the communication unit.
  • the communication unit can be a communication interface, transceiver, transceiver circuit, etc.
  • the communication device 2400 may also include a processing unit.
  • the processing unit can be a processor or controller, such as a baseband processor, baseband chip, CPU, general-purpose processor, DSP, ASIC, FPGA, or other programmable logic device, transistor logic device, hardware component, or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute the various exemplary logic blocks, modules, and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of this embodiment.
  • the processing unit can also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as including one or more microprocessor combinations, a combination of DSP and microprocessor, etc.
  • the communication device 2400 is used to perform any of the steps performed by the chip/chip module/SMF, etc., as described in the above method embodiments.
  • the receiving unit 2401 is used to perform any of the steps in the above method embodiments, and when performing actions such as sending, it can selectively call other units to complete the corresponding operations. A detailed description follows.
  • the receiving unit 2401 is used to receive node relocation information, which indicates at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or valid information;
  • Type information is used to indicate the type of the second node, which is used to provide core network connectivity functions
  • Coverage information is used to indicate the service coverage of the second node
  • Path information is used to indicate the transmission path of the second node
  • the valid information is used to indicate the validity period of the F1 interface of the second node.
  • this embodiment assists the terminal device in reselecting the second node through node camping reselection information, thereby realizing node camping reselection in a frequent mobility network system and achieving efficient mobility management.
  • the communication device 2400 also includes a reselection unit
  • the reselection unit is used to determine the third node based on the node reselection information.
  • the communication device 2400 also includes an update unit;
  • the update unit is used to update the PDCP layer configuration information of the first node or the second node based on the node residency reselection information.
  • the coverage information includes the reference location and distance threshold of the second node, and/or the service validity time information and service validity time threshold of the second node; the coverage area of the second node is the area where the distance between the second node and its reference location is less than the distance threshold; or,
  • the coverage information includes at least one of the following: satellite ephemeris information of the second node, service validity time information and service validity time threshold of the second node, coverage area information of the second node, or reference location information of the core network anchor point associated with the second node.
  • the path information includes at least one of the following: first hop count information, second hop count information, first latency information, second latency information, first distance information, or second distance information;
  • the first hop count information is used to indicate the number of hops on the transmission path from the node served by the second node to the second node;
  • the second hop count information is used to indicate the number of hops on the transmission path from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node;
  • the first delay information is used to indicate the transmission delay from the node served by the second node to the second node;
  • the second delay information is used to indicate the transmission delay from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node;
  • the first distance information is used to indicate the distance from the node served by the second node to the second node;
  • the second distance information is used to indicate the distance from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node.
  • valid information may include a valid time period or a timer
  • the valid time period is the valid time period of the F1 interface between the second node and the node served by the second node;
  • the timer's runtime is the effective duration of the F1 interface between the second node and the nodes it serves.
  • the node 2500 may include a processor 2510, a memory 2520, and a communication bus for connecting the processor 2510 and the memory 2520.
  • the memory 2520 may include, but is not limited to, random access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), or compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM).
  • RAM random access memory
  • ROM read-only memory
  • EPROM erasable programmable read-only memory
  • CD-ROM compact disc read-only memory
  • Node 2500 also includes a communication interface for receiving and sending data.
  • node 2500 can be the first UPF mentioned above.
  • the processor 2510 can be one or more CPUs. If the processor 2510 is a CPU, the CPU can be a single-core CPU or a multi-core CPU.
  • the processor 2510 can be a baseband chip, chip, CPU, general-purpose processor, DSP, ASIC, FPGA or other programmable logic device, transistor logic device, hardware component or any combination thereof.
  • the processor 2510 in node 2500 is used to execute a computer program or instruction 2521 stored in memory 2520, and to perform the following operations:
  • the switching information is used to instruct the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node.
  • the second node in this embodiment informs the first node via handover information to switch the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node.
  • the access handover of the first functional unit and the access handover of the second functional unit of the first node are performed using the same handover process. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, reduce resource consumption, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thereby achieving efficient mobility management.
  • the processor 2510 in node 2500 is used to execute a computer program or instruction 2521 stored in memory 2520, and to perform the following operations:
  • the condition switching information is used to configure the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch conditions.
  • this embodiment informs the first node to perform conditional handover of its first and second functional units through conditional handover information.
  • conditional handover information In this way, by performing conditional handover of the first and second functional units of the first node, the conditional handover of the first and second functional units of the first node is executed together using the same handover process. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, lower resource consumption, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thereby achieving efficient mobility management.
  • the processor 2510 in node 2500 is used to execute a computer program or instruction 2521 stored in memory 2520, and to perform the following operations:
  • Receive node residency reselection information which indicates at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or valid information;
  • Type information is used to indicate the type of the second node, which is used to provide core network connectivity functions
  • Coverage information is used to indicate the service coverage of the second node
  • Path information is used to indicate the transmission path of the second node
  • the valid information is used to indicate the validity period of the F1 interface of the second node.
  • this embodiment assists the first node in reselecting the second node through node camp reselection information, thereby realizing node camp reselection in a frequent mobility network system and achieving efficient mobility management.
  • the processor 2510 in node 2500 is used to execute a computer program or instruction 2521 stored in memory 2520, and to perform the following operations:
  • a switching message is sent to the first node, which instructs the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node.
  • this embodiment informs the first node via handover information to switch its first functional unit and second functional unit from the second node to the third node.
  • the access handover of the first functional unit and the access handover of the second functional unit of the first node are performed using the same handover procedure. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, lower resource consumption, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thus achieving efficient mobility management.
  • the processor 2510 in node 2500 is used to execute a computer program or instruction 2521 stored in memory 2520, and to perform the following operations:
  • the condition switching information is used to configure the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch conditions.
  • this embodiment informs the first node to perform conditional handover of its first and second functional units through conditional handover information.
  • conditional handover information In this way, by performing conditional handover of the first and second functional units of the first node, the conditional handover of the first and second functional units of the first node is executed together using the same handover process. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, lower resource consumption, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thereby achieving efficient mobility management.
  • the processor 2510 in node 2500 is used to execute a computer program or instruction 2521 stored in memory 2520, and to perform the following operations:
  • Send node relocation information which includes at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or valid information;
  • Type information is used to indicate the type of the second node
  • Coverage information is used to indicate the service coverage of the second node
  • Path information is used to indicate the transmission path of the second node
  • the valid information is used to indicate the validity period of the F1 interface of the second node.
  • this embodiment assists the first node in reselecting the second node through node camp reselection information, thereby realizing node camp reselection in a frequent mobility network system and achieving efficient mobility management.
  • the processor 2510 in node 2500 is used to execute a computer program or instruction 2521 stored in memory 2520, and to perform the following operations:
  • the switching request message is used to request that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node be switched from the second node to the third node.
  • a handover response message is sent to the second node.
  • the handover response message is used to indicate that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node are permitted to switch from the second node to the third node.
  • the second node in this embodiment can determine whether an access handover to the first node is necessary.
  • the second node decides that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to be switched from the second node to the third node
  • the second node requests the third node to switch the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node through a handover request message, so that the third node can perform handover admission control.
  • the access handover of the first functional unit and the access handover of the second functional unit of the first node are performed together using the same handover process, which helps to reduce signaling overhead, reduce resource overhead, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thereby achieving efficient mobility management.
  • the processor 2510 in node 2500 is used to execute a computer program or instruction 2521 stored in memory 2520, and to perform the following operations:
  • the condition switching request information is used to request the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.
  • the condition switching response message is used to instruct the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.
  • the second node in this embodiment can determine whether a conditional handover of the first node is necessary.
  • the second node requests the third node to perform the conditional handover of the first node's first and second functional units through a conditional handover request message, so that the third node can execute conditional handover admission control.
  • conditional handover of the first node's first and second functional units can be executed together using the same handover process, thereby reducing signaling overhead, reducing resource overhead, shortening mobility interruption time, and improving handover efficiency, achieving efficient mobility management.
  • Node 2500 can be used to execute the method embodiment described above in this embodiment, and will not be described again here.
  • the terminal device 2600 may include a processor 2610, a memory 2620, and a communication bus for connecting the processor 2610 and the memory 2620.
  • the memory 2620 may include, but is not limited to, random access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), or compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM).
  • RAM random access memory
  • ROM read-only memory
  • EPROM erasable programmable read-only memory
  • CD-ROM compact disc read-only memory
  • the terminal device 2600 also includes a communication interface for receiving and sending data.
  • the terminal device 2600 can be the first SMF mentioned above.
  • the processor 2610 can be one or more CPUs. If the processor 2610 is a CPU, the CPU can be a single-core CPU or a multi-core CPU.
  • the processor 2610 can be a baseband chip, chip, CPU, general-purpose processor, DSP, ASIC, FPGA or other programmable logic device, transistor logic device, hardware component or any combination thereof.
  • the processor 2610 in the terminal device 2600 executes the computer program or instruction 2621 stored in the memory 2620 to perform the following operations:
  • Receive node reselection information which indicates at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or validity information; type information indicates the type of the second node, which is used to provide core network connectivity functions; coverage information indicates the service coverage of the second node; path information indicates the transmission path of the second node; validity information indicates the validity period of the F1 interface of the second node.
  • this embodiment assists the terminal device in reselecting the second node through node camping reselection information, thereby realizing node camping reselection in a frequent mobility network system and achieving efficient mobility management.
  • the terminal device 2600 can be used to execute the method embodiment described above in this embodiment, and will not be described again.
  • This application also provides a chip, including a processor, a memory, and a computer program or instructions stored in the memory, wherein the processor executes the computer program or instructions to implement the steps described in the above method embodiments.
  • This application also provides a chip module, including a transceiver component and a chip.
  • the chip includes a processor, a memory, and a computer program or instructions stored in the memory, wherein the processor executes the computer program or instructions to implement the steps described in the above method embodiments.
  • This application also provides a computer-readable storage medium storing a computer program or instructions that, when executed, implement the steps described in the above method embodiments.
  • This application also provides a computer program product, including a computer program or instructions that, when executed, implement the steps described in the above method embodiments.
  • the steps of the methods or algorithms described in the embodiments of this application can be implemented in hardware or by a processor executing software instructions.
  • the software instructions can consist of corresponding software modules, which can be stored in RAM, flash memory, ROM, EPROM, electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), registers, hard disk, portable hard disk, read-only optical disk (CD-ROM), or any other form of storage medium well known in the art.
  • An exemplary storage medium is coupled to a processor, enabling the processor to read information from and write information to the storage medium.
  • the storage medium can also be a component of the processor.
  • the processor and storage medium can reside in an ASIC. Additionally, the ASIC can reside in a terminal device or management device. Alternatively, the processor and storage medium can exist as discrete components in the terminal device or management device.
  • the functions described in the embodiments of this application can be implemented, in whole or in part, by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented in software, it can be implemented, in whole or in part, as a computer program product.
  • This computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When these computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of this application are generated.
  • the computer can be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another.
  • the computer instructions can be transmitted from one website, computer, server, or data center to another via wired (e.g., coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (e.g., infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium accessible to a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center that integrates one or more available media.
  • the available media can be magnetic media (e.g., floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (e.g., digital video discs (DVDs)), or semiconductor media (e.g., solid-state drives (SSDs)).
  • the modules/units included in the various devices and products described in the above embodiments can be software modules/units, hardware modules/units, or a combination of both.
  • all modules/units can be implemented using hardware methods such as circuits, or at least some modules/units can be implemented using software programs that run on a processor integrated within the chip, while the remaining (if any) modules/units can be implemented using hardware methods such as circuits.
  • all modules/units can be implemented using hardware methods such as circuits.
  • Different modules/units can be located in the same component (e.g., chip, circuit module, etc.) or different components of the chip module, or at least some modules/units can be implemented using hardware methods such as circuits.
  • the implementation is achieved through a software program that runs on a processor integrated within the chip module.
  • the remaining modules/units (if any) can be implemented using hardware methods such as circuits.
  • each of their modules/units can be implemented using hardware methods such as circuits.
  • Different modules/units can be located in the same component (e.g., chip, circuit module, etc.) or different components within the terminal equipment.
  • at least some modules/units can be implemented using a software program that runs on a processor integrated within the terminal equipment, while the remaining modules/units (if any) can be implemented using hardware methods such as circuits.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present application relates to the technical field of communications, and discloses a communication method and apparatus. In the present application, for handover of a second node connected to a first node in a high-mobility network system, handover information is used to instruct the first node to hand over a first functional unit of the first node and a second functional unit of the first node from the second node to a third node, or conditional handover information is used to instruct the first node to carry out conditional handover on the first functional unit of the first node and the second functional unit of the first node, thereby realizing access handover under the high-mobility network system, and thus being conducive to reducing signaling overhead and resource overhead, shortening mobility interruption time, improving handover efficiency, and realizing efficient mobility management. For reselection of a second node where a first node in a connected state of a high-mobility network system camps, by means of node camping reselection information, the first node is assisted in reselecting the second node, thereby realizing node camping reselection under the high-mobility network system.

Description

通信方法与装置Communication methods and devices

本申请要求在2024年04月29日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202410537790.0的中国专利申请的优先权,发明名称为“通信方法与装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to Chinese Patent Application No. 202410537790.0, filed on April 29, 2024, entitled "Communication Method and Apparatus", the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

技术领域Technical Field

本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法与装置。This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and apparatus.

背景技术Background Technology

目前,在地面网络/陆地网络(errestrial network,TN)系统下的移动性管理包括连接态下的小区切换、空闲态/非激活态下的小区重选、注册更新和跟踪区更新等。在TN系统下的移动性管理中,通常是因为终端设备的移动而导致需要进行小区切换或小区重选等,而用于提供接入功能的节点(如网络设备)通常看作是不移动或者移动不频繁。例如,小区切换和小区重选中无需考虑网络设备的移动。Currently, mobility management in terrestrial network (TN) systems includes cell handover in connected mode, cell reselection in idle/inactive mode, registration updates, and tracking area updates. In TN systems, cell handover or cell reselection is typically required due to the movement of terminal devices, while nodes providing access functions (such as network equipment) are generally considered to be stationary or infrequently moving. For example, the movement of network equipment is not considered during cell handover and cell reselection.

然而,针对频繁移动网络系统下的移动性管理,由于频繁移动网络系统中的用于提供接入功能的节点会存在频繁移动的特性,而当频繁移动网络系统直接复用TN系统下的移动性管理时,这可能会带来较大的信令开销和移动中断时延等问题,导致切换/重选失败,以及导致移动性管理非常低效,因此在频繁移动网络系统下如何进行高效移动性管理,还需要进一步研究。However, for mobility management in frequent mobility network systems, the nodes providing access functions in these systems are characterized by frequent movement. When frequent mobility network systems directly reuse mobility management from the TN system, this may lead to problems such as large signaling overhead and mobility interruption latency, resulting in handover/reselection failures and very inefficient mobility management. Therefore, how to perform efficient mobility management in frequent mobility network systems requires further research.

发明内容Summary of the Invention

本申请提供一种通信方法与装置,以实现在频繁移动网络系统下进行高效移动性管理。This application provides a communication method and apparatus to achieve efficient mobility management in a frequently moving network system.

第一方面,为本申请的一种通信方法,包括:第一节点接收来自第二节点的切换信息,切换信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点;第一节点根据切换信息将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。In a first aspect, a communication method according to this application includes: a first node receiving switching information from a second node, the switching information being used to instruct a first functional unit and a second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to a third node; and the first node switching the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node according to the switching information.

其中,第一节点用于提供回传接入功能,第二节点和第三节点用于提供核心网连接功能,第一节点的第一功能单元用于提供回传功能,第一节点的第二功能单元用于提供接入功能。The first node is used to provide backhaul access function, the second and third nodes are used to provide core network connection function, the first functional unit of the first node is used to provide backhaul function, and the second functional unit of the first node is used to provide access function.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第一节点、第二节点和第三节点,第二节点通过切换信息告知第一节点将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。这样,通过第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,实现第一节点的第一功能单元的接入切换和第二功能单元的接入切换一起执行同一套切换流程,从而有利于减少信令开销、降低资源开销、缩短移动中断时延以及提高切换效率,实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, in a frequently moving network system, the second node informs the first node via handover information to switch the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node. In this way, by switching the first and second functional units of the first node from the second node to the third node, the access handover of the first functional unit and the access handover of the second functional unit of the first node are performed using the same handover procedure. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, reduce resource consumption, shorten mobility interruption latency, and improve handover efficiency, thus achieving efficient mobility management.

在一些可能的示例中,切换信息包括以下至少一项:第一信息、第二信息、第三信息、第四信息、第五信息或者第六信息;第一信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元切换到第三节点所需的回传适配协议地址;第二信息用于配置第二节点到第三节点的传输路径;第三信息用于配置在第二节点到第三节点的传输路径上的资源;第四信息用于配置回程无线电链路控制;第五信息用于配置F1应用协议;第六信息用于配置第一节点的第二功能单元。In some possible examples, the handover information includes at least one of the following: first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information; the first information is used to configure the backhaul adaptation protocol address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the fourth information is used to configure backhaul radio link control; the fifth information is used to configure the F1 application protocol; and the sixth information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.

可见,第二节点会将第三节点所预留的第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行接入切换所需要的回传适配协议地址、第二节点到第三节点的传输路径、传输路径上的资源、回程无线电链路控制配置、F1应用协议配置、或者第一节点的第二功能单元配置等信息中的至少一项告知给第一节点,以便第一节点可以根据这些信息进行接入切换,保证接入切换成功。It is evident that the second node will inform the first node of at least one of the following information: the backhaul adaptation protocol address reserved by the third node for the first functional unit of the first node and the second functional unit of the first node, the transmission path from the second node to the third node, the resources on the transmission path, the backhaul radio link control configuration, the F1 application protocol configuration, or the configuration of the second functional unit of the first node, so that the first node can perform access switching based on this information and ensure successful access switching.

在一些可能的示例中,第六信息包括以下至少一项:物理小区标识列表、资源配置信息、跟踪区标识配置信息、或者跟踪区代码配置信息。In some possible examples, the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: a list of physical cell identifiers, resource configuration information, tracking area identifier configuration information, or tracking area code configuration information.

可见,第二节点会将第三节点所配置的物理小区标识列表、资源、跟踪区标识或者跟踪区代码等中的至少一项告知给第一节点,从而保证第一节点接入切换成功。As can be seen, the second node will inform the first node of at least one of the physical cell identifier list, resources, tracking area identifier or tracking area code configured by the third node, thereby ensuring that the first node's access handover is successful.

在一些可能的示例中,若第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,则第一节点所服务的终端设备或者子节点从第二节点切换到第四节点,第四节点用于提供核心网连接功能或者第四节点用于提供回传接入功能。In some possible examples, if the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node switch from the second node to the third node, then the terminal device or sub-node served by the first node switches from the second node to the fourth node, whereby the fourth node is used to provide core network connectivity or to provide backhaul access functionality.

可见,当涉及到第一节点所服务的终端设备或者子节点的接入切换时,若第一节点所服务的终端设备或者子节点不随着第一节点的移动而移动、且第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,则第二节点可以触发第一节点所服务的终端设备或者子节点从第二节点切换到第四节点。It can be seen that when the access switching of the terminal device or sub-node served by the first node is involved, if the terminal device or sub-node served by the first node does not move with the first node, and the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node switch from the second node to the third node, then the second node can trigger the terminal device or sub-node served by the first node to switch from the second node to the fourth node.

在一些可能的示例中,在接收来自第二节点的切换信息之前,第一节点向第二节点发送能力指示信息,能力指示信息用于指示第一节点支持或者不支持第一节点的第一功能单元和/或第一节点的第二功能单元进行接入切换。In some possible examples, before receiving handover information from the second node, the first node sends capability indication information to the second node. The capability indication information is used to indicate whether the first node supports or does not support the access handover of the first node's first functional unit and/or the first node's second functional unit.

可见,在第二节点判决是否需要对第一节点进行接入切换之前,第一节点可以向第二节点上报或广播自己的节点能力,该节点能力可以指示第一节点是否支持第一节点的第一功能单元和/或第二功能单元进行接入切换。其中,第一节点可以同时支持第一功能单元和第二功能单元进行接入切换,或者可以仅支持第一功能单元进行接入切换,或者可以仅支持第二功能单元进行接入切换,或者不支持第一功能单元和第二功能单元进行接入切换。这样,只有在第一节点支持第一功能单元和/或第二功能单元进行接入切换时,第二节点才会判决是否需要对第一节点进行接入切换。As can be seen, before the second node determines whether an access handover to the first node is necessary, the first node can report or broadcast its node capabilities to the second node. These capabilities indicate whether the first node supports access handover for its first functional unit and/or second functional unit. Specifically, the first node may support access handover for both the first and second functional units simultaneously, or it may support only the first functional unit, or only the second functional unit, or it may not support either. Thus, the second node will only determine whether an access handover to the first node is necessary if the first node supports access handover for both the first and/or second functional units.

第二方面,为本申请的一种通信方法,包括:第二节点向第一节点发送切换信息,切换信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。其中,第一节点用于提供回传接入功能,第二节点和第三节点用于提供核心网连接功能,第一节点的第一功能单元用于提供回传功能,第一节点的第二功能单元用于提供接入功能。Secondly, a communication method according to this application includes: a second node sending handover information to a first node, the handover information being used to instruct the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to a third node. The first node is used to provide backhaul access functionality, the second and third nodes are used to provide core network connectivity functionality, the first functional unit of the first node is used to provide backhaul functionality, and the second functional unit of the first node is used to provide access functionality.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第一节点、第二节点和第三节点,第二节点通过切换信息告知第一节点将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。这样,通过第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,实现第一节点的第一功能单元的接入切换和第二功能单元的接入切换一起执行同一套切换流程,从而有利于减少信令开销、降低资源开销、缩短移动中断时间以及提高切换效率,实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the first, second, and third nodes in a frequently moving network system, the second node informs the first node via handover information to switch the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node. In this way, by switching the first and second functional units of the first node from the second node to the third node, the access handover of the first functional unit and the access handover of the second functional unit of the first node are performed using the same handover procedure. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, lower resource consumption, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thus achieving efficient mobility management.

在一些可能的示例中,在向第一节点发送切换信息之前,第二节点向第三节点发送切换请求信息,切换请求信息用于请求将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点;第二节点接收来自第三节点的切换响应信息,切换响应信息用于指示准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。In some possible examples, before sending the handover information to the first node, the second node sends a handover request information to the third node, which requests that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node be switched from the second node to the third node; the second node receives a handover response information from the third node, which indicates that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node are permitted to switch from the second node to the third node.

可见,由于第二节点为第一节点提供接入服务,因此第二节点可以判决是否需要对第一节点进行接入切换。例如,第二节点可以根据第一节点上报的测量报告等来进行切换决策。当第二节点决策需要将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点时,第二节点可以通过切换请求信息向第三节点请求将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,以便第三节点执行切换准入控制。As can be seen, since the second node provides access services to the first node, it can determine whether an access handover to the first node is necessary. For example, the second node can make a handover decision based on measurement reports reported by the first node. When the second node decides that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to be switched from the second node to the third node, the second node can request the third node to switch the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node through a handover request message, so that the third node can perform handover admission control.

在第三节点接收到切换请求信息之后,第三节点会执行切换准入控制,以决定准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,并通过切换响应信息告诉给第二节点准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。After receiving the handover request information, the third node will perform handover admission control to decide whether to allow the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node, and inform the second node through the handover response information to allow the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node.

在一些可能的示例中,在向第一节点发送切换信息之前,第二节点接收来自第一节点的能力指示信息,能力指示信息用于指示第一节点支持或者不支持第一节点的第一功能单元和/或第一节点的第二功能单元进行接入切换。In some possible examples, before sending the handover information to the first node, the second node receives capability indication information from the first node, which is used to indicate whether the first node supports or does not support the first functional unit and/or the second functional unit of the first node for access handover.

可见,在第二节点判决是否需要对第一节点进行接入切换之前,第一节点可以向第二节点上报或广播自己的节点能力,该节点能力可以指示第一节点是否支持第一节点的第一功能单元和/或第二功能单元进行接入切换。其中,第一节点可以同时支持第一功能单元和第二功能单元进行接入切换,或者可以仅支持第一功能单元进行接入切换,或者可以仅支持第二功能单元进行接入切换,或者不支持第一功能单元和第二功能单元进行接入切换。这样,只有在第一节点支持第一功能单元和/或第二功能单元进行接入切换时,第二节点才会判决是否需要对第一节点进行接入切换。As can be seen, before the second node determines whether an access handover to the first node is necessary, the first node can report or broadcast its node capabilities to the second node. These capabilities indicate whether the first node supports access handover for its first functional unit and/or second functional unit. Specifically, the first node may support access handover for both the first and second functional units simultaneously, or it may support only the first functional unit, or only the second functional unit, or it may not support either. Thus, the second node will only determine whether an access handover to the first node is necessary if the first node supports access handover for both the first and/or second functional units.

在一些可能的示例中,切换请求信息包括第一标识信息和第二标识信息;第一标识信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元的标识,第二标识信息用于指示第一节点的第二功能单元的标识。In some possible examples, the switching request information includes first identification information and second identification information; the first identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the first node, and the second identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the second functional unit of the first node.

可见,通过第一标识信息和第二标识信息实现指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元,以便第三节点确认是对第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行切换请求。As can be seen, the first identification information and the second identification information are used to indicate the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node, so that the third node can confirm that the switching request is for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node.

在一些可能的示例中,切换请求信息还包括以下至少一项:第三标识信息、第一上下文信息、第四标识信息、或者第二上下文信息;第三标识信息用于指示第一节点所服务的终端设备的标识;第一上下文信息用于指示第一节点所服务的终端设备的上下文;第四标识信息用于指示所第一节点所服务的子节点的第一功能单元的标识和第一节点所服务的子节点的第二功能单元的标识;第二上下文信息用于指示第一节点所服务的子节点的上下文。In some possible examples, the handover request information may further include at least one of the following: third identification information, first context information, fourth identification information, or second context information; the third identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the terminal device served by the first node; the first context information is used to indicate the context of the terminal device served by the first node; the fourth identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the child node served by the first node and the identifier of the second functional unit of the child node served by the first node; the second context information is used to indicate the context of the child node served by the first node.

可见,若第一节点所服务的终端设备请求从第二节点切换到第三节点,则切换请求信息包括第三标识信息和/或第一上下文信息。这样,通过第三标识信息和/或第一上下文信息实现将该终端设备请求从第二节点切换到第三节点的信息告诉给第三节点,以便第三节点执行相关的切入准入控制。As can be seen, if a terminal device served by the first node requests to switch from the second node to the third node, the switch request information includes third identification information and/or first context information. Thus, the third identification information and/or first context information are used to inform the third node of the terminal device's request to switch from the second node to the third node, enabling the third node to perform relevant access control.

若第一节点所服务的子节点请求从第二节点切换到第三节点,则切换请求信息包括第四标识信息和/或第二上下文信息。这样,通过第四标识信息和/或第二上下文信息实现将该子节点请求从第二节点切换到第三节点的信息告诉给第三节点,以便第三节点执行相关的切入准入控制。If a child node served by the first node requests to switch from the second node to the third node, the switch request information includes fourth identification information and/or second context information. In this way, the fourth identification information and/or second context information inform the third node of the child node's request to switch from the second node to the third node, so that the third node can perform the relevant admission control.

在一些可能的示例中,切换响应信息包括以下至少一项:第一信息、第二信息、第三信息、第四信息、第五信息、或者第六信息;第一信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元切换到第三节点所需的回传适配协议地址;第二信息用于配置第二节点到第三节点的传输路径;第三信息用于配置在第二节点到第三节点的传输路径上的资源;第四信息用于配置回程无线电链路控制;第五信息用于配置F1应用协议;第六信息用于配置第一节点的第二功能单元。In some possible examples, the handover response information includes at least one of the following: first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information; the first information is used to configure the backhaul adaptation protocol address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the fourth information is used to configure backhaul radio link control; the fifth information is used to configure the F1 application protocol; and the sixth information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.

可见,在第三节点执行切换准入控制中,为了保证第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,第三节点需要预留第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行接入切换所需要的回传适配协议地址、第二节点到第三节点的传输路径、传输路径上的资源、回程无线电链路控制配置、F1应用协议配置、或者第一节点的第二功能单元配置等信息中的至少一项,以便第一节点可以根据这些信息进行接入切换,保证接入切换成功。As can be seen, in order to ensure that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node switch from the second node to the third node during the handover admission control in the third node, the third node needs to reserve at least one of the following information for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform the access handover: backhaul adaptation protocol address, transmission path from the second node to the third node, resources on the transmission path, backhaul radio link control configuration, F1 application protocol configuration, or configuration of the second functional unit of the first node. This information is used by the first node to perform the access handover and ensure that the access handover is successful.

在一些可能的示例中,第六信息包括以下至少一项:物理小区标识列表、资源配置信息、跟踪区标识配置信息、或者跟踪区代码配置信息。In some possible examples, the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: a list of physical cell identifiers, resource configuration information, tracking area identifier configuration information, or tracking area code configuration information.

可见,第三节点在执行切换准入控制中需要为第一节点的第二功能单元配置物理小区标识列表、资源、跟踪区标识或者跟踪区代码等中的至少一项,从而保证第一节点执行接入切换成功。It is evident that the third node needs to configure at least one of the following for the second functional unit of the first node during the handover admission control process: physical cell identifier list, resources, tracking area identifier, or tracking area code, in order to ensure that the first node can successfully perform the access handover.

第三方面,为本申请的一种通信方法,包括:第三节点接收来自第二节点的切换请求信息,切换请求信息用于请求将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点;第三节点向第二节点发送切换响应信息,切换响应信息用于指示准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。Thirdly, a communication method according to this application includes: a third node receiving a handover request message from a second node, the handover request message being used to request the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to be switched from the second node to the third node; the third node sending a handover response message to the second node, the handover response message being used to indicate permission for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to be switched from the second node to the third node.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第一节点、第二节点和第三节点,本实施例的第二节点可以判决是否需要对第一节点进行接入切换。当第二节点决策需要将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点时,第二节点通过切换请求信息向第三节点请求将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,以便第三节点执行切换准入控制。As can be seen, for the first node, second node, and third node in a frequently moving network system, the second node in this embodiment can determine whether an access handover to the first node is required. When the second node decides that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to be switched from the second node to the third node, the second node requests the third node to switch the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node through a handover request message, so that the third node can perform handover admission control.

这样,通过第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,实现第一节点的第一功能单元的接入切换和第二功能单元的接入切换一起执行同一套切换流程,从而有利于减少信令开销、降低资源开销、缩短移动中断时间以及提高切换效率,实现高效移动性管理。In this way, by switching from the second node to the third node through the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node, the access handover of the first functional unit and the access handover of the second functional unit of the first node are performed together using the same handover process. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, reduce resource overhead, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thereby achieving efficient mobility management.

第四方面,为本申请的一种通信方法,包括:第一节点接收来自第二节点的条件切换信息,条件切换信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。Fourthly, a communication method according to this application includes: a first node receiving condition switching information from a second node, the condition switching information being used to configure a first functional unit of the first node and a second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第一节点、第二节点和第三节点,本实施例通过条件切换信息告知第一节点对第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。这样,通过第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换,实现第一节点的第一功能单元的条件切换和第二功能单元的条件切换一起执行同一套切换流程,从而有利于减少信令开销、降低资源开销、缩短移动中断时间以及提高切换效率,实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the first, second, and third nodes in a frequently moving network system, this embodiment informs the first node to perform conditional handover of its first and second functional units through conditional handover information. In this way, by performing conditional handover of the first and second functional units of the first node, the conditional handover of the first and second functional units of the first node is executed together using the same handover process. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, lower resource consumption, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thereby achieving efficient mobility management.

在一些可能的示例中,条件切换信息包括以下至少一项:切换条件信息、第一信息、第二信息、第三信息、第四信息、第五信息或者第六信息;切换条件信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点所需满足的条件,第三节点用于提供核心网连接功能;第一信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元切换到第三节点所需的回传适配协议地址;第二信息用于配置第二节点到第三节点的传输路径;第三信息用于配置在第二节点到第三节点的传输路径上的资源;第四信息用于配置回程无线电链路控制;第五信息用于配置F1应用协议;第六信息用于配置第一节点的第二功能单元。In some possible examples, the conditional handover information includes at least one of the following: handover condition information, first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information; the handover condition information is used to indicate the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to meet to switch from the second node to the third node, and the third node is used to provide core network connectivity functions; the first information is used to configure the backhaul adaptation protocol address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the fourth information is used to configure backhaul radio link control; the fifth information is used to configure the F1 application protocol; and the sixth information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.

可见,第二节点会将第三节点所配置的切换条件、所预留的第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行接入切换所需要的回传适配协议地址、第二节点到第三节点的传输路径、传输路径上的资源、回程无线电链路控制配置、F1应用协议配置、或者第一节点的第二功能单元配置等信息中的至少一项告知给第一节点,以便第一节点可以根据这些信息进行接入切换,保证接入切换成功。As can be seen, the second node will inform the first node of at least one of the following information: the switching conditions configured by the third node, the backhaul adaptation protocol address required for the access switching of the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node, the transmission path from the second node to the third node, the resources on the transmission path, the backhaul radio link control configuration, the F1 application protocol configuration, or the configuration of the second functional unit of the first node, so that the first node can perform access switching based on this information and ensure successful access switching.

在一些可能的示例中,切换条件信息所指示的条件包括:与第二节点的参考位置之间的距离大于第一距离门限,和/或与第三节点的参考位置之间的距离小于第二距离门限;和/或,到第二节点的传输路径上有至少一个中继节点的回程无线电链路控制有效时间小于有效时间门限。In some possible examples, the conditions indicated by the switching condition information include: the distance between the reference position of the second node is greater than a first distance threshold, and/or the distance between the reference position of the third node is less than a second distance threshold; and/or, the backhaul radio link control validity time of at least one relay node on the transmission path to the second node is less than a validity time threshold.

可见,若切换条件信息所指示的条件包括与第三节点的参考位置之间的距离小于第二距离门限,则在第一节点获取切换条件信息之后,第一节点可以判断自身的位置与第三节点的参考位置之间的距离是否小于第二距离门限,以便确定是否满足切换条件信息所指示的条件。当满足条件时,第一节点可以执行将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。As can be seen, if the switching condition information indicates that the distance between the first node and the reference position of the third node is less than the second distance threshold, then after the first node obtains the switching condition information, the first node can determine whether the distance between its own position and the reference position of the third node is less than the second distance threshold, in order to determine whether the conditions indicated by the switching condition information are met. When the conditions are met, the first node can execute the switching of its first functional unit and second functional unit from the second node to the third node.

若切换条件信息所指示的条件包括到第二节点的传输路径上有至少一个中继节点的BH-RLC有效时间小于有效时间门限,则在第一节点获取切换条件信息之后,第一节点可以判断第一节点到第二节点的传输路径上有是否有中继节点的BH-RLC有效时间小于有效时间门限,以便确定是否满足切换条件信息所指示的条件。当满足条件时,第一节点可以执行将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。If the handover condition information indicates that at least one relay node on the transmission path to the second node has a BH-RLC validity period less than a validity period threshold, then after the first node obtains the handover condition information, the first node can determine whether there is a relay node on the transmission path from the first node to the second node whose BH-RLC validity period is less than the validity period threshold, in order to determine whether the conditions indicated by the handover condition information are met. When the conditions are met, the first node can execute the handover of its first functional unit and second functional unit from the second node to the third node.

在一些可能的示例中,在接收来自第二节点的条件切换命令之后,该方法还包括:若满足切换条件信息所指示的条件,则第一节点将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。In some possible examples, after receiving a conditional switching command from the second node, the method further includes: if the conditions indicated by the switching condition information are met, the first node switches the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node.

在一些可能的示例中,在接收来自第二节点的条件切换信息之前,该方法还包括:第一节点向第二节点发送能力指示信息,能力指示信息用于指示第一节点支持或者不支持第一节点的第一功能单元和/或第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。In some possible examples, before receiving condition switching information from the second node, the method further includes: the first node sending capability indication information to the second node, the capability indication information being used to indicate whether the first node supports or does not support condition switching of the first node's first functional unit and/or the first node's second functional unit.

可见,在第二节点判决是否需要对第一节点进行条件切换之前,第一节点可以向第二节点上报或广播自己的节点能力,该节点能力可以指示第一节点是否支持第一节点的第一功能单元和/或第二功能单元进行条件切换。其中,第一节点可以同时支持第一功能单元和第二功能单元进行条件切换,或者可以仅支持第一功能单元进行条件切换,或者可以仅支持第二功能单元进行条件切换,或者不支持第一功能单元和第二功能单元进行条件切换。这样,只有在第一节点支持第一功能单元和/或第二功能单元进行条件切换时,第二节点才会判决是否需要对第一节点进行条件切换。As can be seen, before the second node determines whether a conditional switch is needed for the first node, the first node can report or broadcast its node capabilities to the second node. These capabilities indicate whether the first node supports conditional switching of its first functional unit and/or second functional unit. Specifically, the first node may support conditional switching of both the first and second functional units simultaneously, or it may support only the first functional unit, or only the second functional unit, or it may not support either. Thus, the second node will only determine whether a conditional switch is needed for the first node if the first node supports conditional switching of both the first and/or second functional units.

第五方面,为本申请的一种通信方法,包括:第二节点向第一节点发送条件切换信息,条件切换信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。Fifthly, a communication method according to this application includes: a second node sending condition switching information to a first node, the condition switching information being used to configure a first functional unit of the first node and a second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第一节点、第二节点和第三节点,本实施例通过条件切换信息告知第一节点对第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。这样,通过第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换,实现第一节点的第一功能单元的条件切换和第二功能单元的条件切换一起执行同一套切换流程,从而有利于减少信令开销、降低资源开销、缩短移动中断时间以及提高切换效率,实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the first, second, and third nodes in a frequently moving network system, this embodiment informs the first node to perform conditional handover of its first and second functional units through conditional handover information. In this way, by performing conditional handover of the first and second functional units of the first node, the conditional handover of the first and second functional units of the first node is executed together using the same handover process. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, lower resource consumption, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thereby achieving efficient mobility management.

在一些可能的示例中,在向第一节点发送条件切换信息之前,该方法还包括:第二节点向第三节点发送条件切换请求信息,条件切换请求信息用于请求第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换;第二节点接收来自第三节点的条件切换响应信息,条件切换响应信息用于指示准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。In some possible examples, before sending condition switching information to the first node, the method further includes: the second node sending condition switching request information to the third node, the condition switching request information being used to request the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching; the second node receiving condition switching response information from the third node, the condition switching response information being used to instruct permission for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.

可见,由于第二节点为第一节点提供接入服务,因此第二节点可以判决是否需要对第一节点进行条件切换。例如,第二节点可以根据第一节点上报的测量报告等来进行条件切换决策。当第二节点决策需要对第一节点进行条件切换时,第二节点可以通过条件切换请求信息向第三节点请求将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换,以便第三节点执行条件切换准入控制。As can be seen, since the second node provides access services to the first node, it can determine whether a conditional handover of the first node is necessary. For example, the second node can make a conditional handover decision based on measurement reports reported by the first node. When the second node decides that a conditional handover of the first node is necessary, it can request the third node to perform a conditional handover between the first node's first functional unit and its second functional unit via a conditional handover request message, so that the third node can execute conditional handover access control.

在第三节点接收到条件切换请求信息之后,第三节点会执行条件切换准入控制,以决定准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换,并通过条件切换响应信息告诉给第二节点准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。After receiving the conditional switching request information, the third node will perform conditional switching admission control to decide whether to allow the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform conditional switching, and inform the second node to allow the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform conditional switching through conditional switching response information.

在一些可能的示例中,在向第一节点发送条件切换信息之前,该方法还包括:第二节点接收来自第一节点的能力指示信息,能力指示信息用于指示第一节点支持或者不支持第一节点的第一功能单元和/或第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。In some possible examples, before sending condition switching information to the first node, the method further includes: the second node receiving capability indication information from the first node, the capability indication information being used to indicate whether the first node supports or does not support condition switching of the first node's first functional unit and/or the first node's second functional unit.

可见,在第二节点判决是否需要对第一节点进行条件切换之前,第一节点可以向第二节点上报或广播自己的节点能力,该节点能力可以指示第一节点是否支持第一节点的第一功能单元和/或第二功能单元进行条件切换。其中,第一节点可以同时支持第一功能单元和第二功能单元进行条件切换,或者可以仅支持第一功能单元进行条件切换,或者可以仅支持第二功能单元进行条件切换,或者不支持第一功能单元和第二功能单元进行条件切换。这样,只有在第一节点支持第一功能单元和/或第二功能单元进行条件切换时,第二节点才会判决是否需要对第一节点进行条件切换。As can be seen, before the second node determines whether a conditional switch is needed for the first node, the first node can report or broadcast its node capabilities to the second node. These capabilities indicate whether the first node supports conditional switching of its first functional unit and/or second functional unit. Specifically, the first node may support conditional switching of both the first and second functional units simultaneously, or it may support only the first functional unit, or only the second functional unit, or it may not support either. Thus, the second node will only determine whether a conditional switch is needed for the first node if the first node supports conditional switching of both the first and/or second functional units.

在一些可能的示例中,条件切换请求信息包括第一标识信息和第二标识信息;第一标识信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元的标识,第二标识信息用于指示第一节点的第二功能单元的标识。In some possible examples, the condition switching request information includes first identification information and second identification information; the first identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the first node, and the second identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the second functional unit of the first node.

可见,通过第一标识信息和第二标识信息实现指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元,以便第三节点确认是对第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换请求。As can be seen, the first identification information and the second identification information are used to indicate the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node, so that the third node can confirm that the condition switching request is made for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node.

在一些可能的示例中,条件切换请求信息还包括以下至少一项:第三标识信息、第一上下文信息、第四标识信息、或者第二上下文信息;第三标识信息用于指示第一节点所服务的终端设备的标识;第一上下文信息用于指示第一节点所服务的终端设备的上下文;第四标识信息用于指示第一节点所服务的子节点的第一功能单元的标识和第一节点所服务的子节点的第二功能单元的标识;第二上下文信息用于指示第一节点所服务的子节点的上下文。In some possible examples, the condition switching request information may further include at least one of the following: third identification information, first context information, fourth identification information, or second context information; the third identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the terminal device served by the first node; the first context information is used to indicate the context of the terminal device served by the first node; the fourth identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the child node served by the first node and the identifier of the second functional unit of the child node served by the first node; the second context information is used to indicate the context of the child node served by the first node.

可见,若第一节点所服务的终端设备需要配置条件切换,则条件切换请求信息包括第三标识信息和/或第一上下文信息。这样,通过第三标识信息和/或第一上下文信息实现将该终端设备配置条件切换告诉给第三节点。As can be seen, if the terminal device served by the first node needs to configure conditional switching, the conditional switching request information includes third identification information and/or first context information. In this way, the third identification information and/or first context information are used to inform the third node of the conditional switching configuration of the terminal device.

若第一节点所服务的子节点需要配置条件切换,则条件切换请求信息包括第四标识信息和/或第二上下文信息。这样,通过第四标识信息和/或第二上下文信息实现将该子节点配置条件切换告诉给第三节点。If a child node served by the first node needs to be configured with condition switching, the condition switching request information includes fourth identification information and/or second context information. In this way, the fourth identification information and/or second context information are used to inform the third node about configuring condition switching for that child node.

在一些可能的示例中,条件切换响应信息包括以下至少一项:切换条件信息、第一信息、第二信息、第三信息、第四信息、第五信息、或者第六信息;切换条件信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点所需满足的条件;第一信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元切换到第三节点所需的回传适配协议地址;第二信息用于配置第二节点到第三节点的传输路径;第三信息用于配置在第二节点到第三节点的传输路径上的资源;第四信息用于配置回程无线电链路控制;第五信息用于配置F1应用协议;或者,第六信息用于配置第一节点的第二功能单元。In some possible examples, the conditional handover response information includes at least one of the following: handover condition information, first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information; the handover condition information is used to indicate the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to meet to switch from the second node to the third node; the first information is used to configure the backhaul adaptation protocol address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the fourth information is used to configure backhaul radio link control; the fifth information is used to configure the F1 application protocol; or, the sixth information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.

可见,在第三节点执行条件切换准入控制中,为了保证第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元通过条件切换方式从第二节点切换到第三节点,第三节点需要配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点所需满足的条件、预留第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行接入切换所需要的回传适配协议地址、第二节点到第三节点的传输路径、传输路径上的资源、回程无线电链路控制配置、F1应用协议配置、或者第一节点的第二功能单元配置等信息中的至少一项,以便第一节点可以根据这些信息进行条件切换,保证条件切换成功。As can be seen, in the conditional handover admission control performed by the third node, in order to ensure that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node switch from the second node to the third node through conditional handover, the third node needs to configure at least one of the following information: the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to meet when switching from the second node to the third node; the backhaul adaptation protocol address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform access handover; the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the resources on the transmission path; the backhaul radio link control configuration; the F1 application protocol configuration; or the configuration of the second functional unit of the first node. This information is used by the first node to perform conditional handover and ensure that the conditional handover is successful.

在一些可能的示例中,切换条件信息所指示的条件包括:与第二节点的参考位置之间的距离大于第一距离门限,和/或与第三节点的参考位置之间的距离小于第二距离门限;或者,到第二节点的传输路径上有至少一个中继节点的回程无线电链路控制有效时间小于有效时间门限。In some possible examples, the conditions indicated by the switching condition information include: the distance between the reference position of the second node is greater than a first distance threshold, and/or the distance between the reference position of the third node is less than a second distance threshold; or, the backhaul radio link control validity time of at least one relay node on the transmission path to the second node is less than a validity time threshold.

可见,若切换条件信息所指示的条件包括与第三节点的参考位置之间的距离小于第二距离门限,则在第一节点获取切换条件信息之后,第一节点可以判断自身的位置与第三节点的参考位置之间的距离是否小于第二距离门限,以便确定是否满足切换条件信息所指示的条件。当满足条件时,第一节点可以执行将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。As can be seen, if the switching condition information indicates that the distance between the first node and the reference position of the third node is less than the second distance threshold, then after the first node obtains the switching condition information, the first node can determine whether the distance between its own position and the reference position of the third node is less than the second distance threshold, in order to determine whether the conditions indicated by the switching condition information are met. When the conditions are met, the first node can execute the switching of its first functional unit and second functional unit from the second node to the third node.

若切换条件信息所指示的条件包括到第二节点的传输路径上有至少一个中继节点的BH-RLC有效时间小于有效时间门限,则在第一节点获取切换条件信息之后,第一节点可以判断第一节点到第二节点的传输路径上有是否有中继节点的BH-RLC有效时间小于有效时间门限,以便确定是否满足切换条件信息所指示的条件。当满足条件时,第一节点可以执行将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。If the handover condition information indicates that at least one relay node on the transmission path to the second node has a BH-RLC validity period less than a validity period threshold, then after the first node obtains the handover condition information, the first node can determine whether there is a relay node on the transmission path from the first node to the second node whose BH-RLC validity period is less than the validity period threshold, in order to determine whether the conditions indicated by the handover condition information are met. When the conditions are met, the first node can execute the handover of its first functional unit and second functional unit from the second node to the third node.

第六方面,为本申请的一种通信方法,包括:第三节点接收来自第二节点的条件切换请求信息,条件切换请求信息用于请求第一节点的第一功能单元和所述第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换;第三节点向第二节点发送条件切换响应信息,条件切换响应信息用于指示准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。A sixth aspect is a communication method according to this application, comprising: a third node receiving condition switching request information from a second node, the condition switching request information being used to request a first functional unit of a first node and a second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching; the third node sending condition switching response information to the second node, the condition switching response information being used to instruct permission for the first functional unit of the first node and the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第一节点、第二节点和第三节点,本实施例的第二节点可以判决是否需要对第一节点进行条件切换。当第二节点决策需要将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换时,第二节点通过条件切换请求信息向第三节点请求第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换,以便第三节点执行条件切换准入控制。这样,通过第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换,实现第一节点的第一功能单元的条件切换和第二功能单元的条件切换一起执行同一套切换流程,从而有利于减少信令开销、降低资源开销、缩短移动中断时间以及提高切换效率,实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the first, second, and third nodes in a frequently moving network system, the second node in this embodiment can determine whether a conditional handover of the first node is necessary. When the second node decides that a conditional handover of the first node's first and second functional units is required, the second node requests the third node to perform the conditional handover of the first node's first and second functional units through a conditional handover request message, so that the third node can execute conditional handover admission control. In this way, by performing a conditional handover of the first node's first and second functional units, the conditional handover of the first node's first and second functional units can be executed together using the same handover process, thereby reducing signaling overhead, reducing resource overhead, shortening mobility interruption time, and improving handover efficiency, achieving efficient mobility management.

第七方面,为本申请的一种通信方法,包括:第一节点接收节点驻留重选信息,节点驻留重选信息用于指示以下至少一项:类型信息、覆盖信息、路径信息、或者有效信息;类型信息用于指示第二节点的类型,第二节点用于提供核心网连接功能;覆盖信息用于指示第二节点的服务覆盖;路径信息用于指示第二节点的传输路径;有效信息用于指示第二节点的F1接口有效时间。A seventh aspect is a communication method according to this application, comprising: a first node receiving node reselection information, wherein the node reselection information is used to indicate at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or validity information; the type information is used to indicate the type of a second node, wherein the second node is used to provide core network connection functions; the coverage information is used to indicate the service coverage of the second node; the path information is used to indicate the transmission path of the second node; and the validity information is used to indicate the validity time of the F1 interface of the second node.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第一节点和第二节点,当第一节点驻留到第二节点时,本实施例通过节点驻留重选信息辅助第一节点对第二节点进行重选,实现频繁移动网络系统下的节点驻留重选,以及实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the first node and the second node in a frequent mobility network system, when the first node camps on the second node, this embodiment assists the first node in reselecting the second node through node camp reselection information, thereby realizing node camp reselection in a frequent mobility network system and achieving efficient mobility management.

在一些可能的示例中,在接收节点驻留重选信息之后,该方法还包括:第一节点向第一节点所服务的子节点或者终端设备发送节点驻留重选信息。In some possible examples, after receiving the node residency reselection information, the method further includes: the first node sending the node residency reselection information to the child nodes or terminal devices served by the first node.

可见,第一节点所服务的子节点或者终端设备可以根据节点驻留重选信息对第二节点进行重选。As can be seen, the child nodes or terminal devices served by the first node can reselect the second node based on the node reselection information.

在一些可能的示例中,在接收节点驻留重选信息之后,该方法还包括:第一节点根据节点驻留重选信息确定第三节点,第三节点用于提供核心网连接功能。In some possible examples, after receiving node relocation information, the method further includes: the first node determining a third node based on the node relocation information, the third node being used to provide core network connectivity functions.

可见,当第一节点驻留到第二节点时,第一节点根据节点驻留重选信息确定第三节点,从而选择向第三节点进行驻留,实现节点驻留重选。As can be seen, when the first node resides on the second node, the first node determines the third node based on the node residency reselection information, and thus chooses to reside on the third node, thereby realizing node residency reselection.

在一些可能的示例中,覆盖信息包括第二节点的参考位置和距离门限、和/或第二节点的服务有效时间信息和服务有效时间门限;第二节点的覆盖范围为与第二节点的参考位置之间的距离小于距离门限所在的范围;或者,覆盖信息包括以下至少一项:第二节点的卫星星历信息、第二节点的服务有效时间信息和服务有效时间门限、第二节点的覆盖区域信息、或者第二节点所关联的核心网锚点的参考位置信息。In some possible examples, the coverage information includes the reference location and distance threshold of the second node, and/or the service validity time information and service validity time threshold of the second node; the coverage range of the second node is the range where the distance between the second node and its reference location is less than the distance threshold; or, the coverage information includes at least one of the following: satellite ephemeris information of the second node, service validity time information and service validity time threshold of the second node, coverage area information of the second node, or reference location information of the core network anchor point associated with the second node.

在一些可能的示例中,路径信息包括以下至少一项:第一跳数信息、第二跳数信息、第一时延信息、第二时延信息、第一距离信息、或者第二距离信息;第一跳数信息用于指示在第二节点所服务的节点到第二节点的传输路径上的跳数;第二跳数信息用于指示在第二节点所服务的终端设备到第二节点的传输路径上的跳数;第一时延信息用于指示从第二节点所服务的节点到第二节点的传输时延;第二时延信息用于指示从第二节点所服务的终端设备到第二节点的传输时延;第一距离信息用于指示从第二节点所服务的节点到第二节点的距离;第二距离信息用于指示从第二节点所服务的终端设备到第二节点的距离。In some possible examples, the path information includes at least one of the following: first hop count information, second hop count information, first delay information, second delay information, first distance information, or second distance information; the first hop count information is used to indicate the number of hops on the transmission path from the node served by the second node to the second node; the second hop count information is used to indicate the number of hops on the transmission path from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node; the first delay information is used to indicate the transmission delay from the node served by the second node to the second node; the second delay information is used to indicate the transmission delay from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node; the first distance information is used to indicate the distance from the node served by the second node to the second node; the second distance information is used to indicate the distance from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node.

在一些可能的示例中,有效信息包括有效时间段或者计时器;有效时间段为第二节点与第二节点所服务的节点之间的F1接口的有效时间段;计时器的运行时长为第二节点与第二节点所服务的节点之间的F1接口的有效时长。In some possible examples, valid information includes a valid time period or a timer; the valid time period is the valid time period of the F1 interface between the second node and the nodes served by the second node; the runtime of the timer is the valid duration of the F1 interface between the second node and the nodes served by the second node.

第八方面,为本申请的一种通信方法,包括:第二节点发送节点驻留重选信息,节点驻留重选信息用于指示以下至少一项:类型信息、覆盖信息、路径信息、或者有效信息;类型信息用于指示第二节点的类型,第二节点用于提供核心网连接功能;覆盖信息用于指示第二节点的服务覆盖;路径信息用于指示第二节点的传输路径;有效信息用于指示第二节点的F1接口有效时间。Eighthly, a communication method according to this application includes: a second node sending node reselection information, wherein the node reselection information is used to indicate at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or validity information; the type information is used to indicate the type of the second node, which is used to provide core network connection functions; the coverage information is used to indicate the service coverage of the second node; the path information is used to indicate the transmission path of the second node; and the validity information is used to indicate the validity period of the F1 interface of the second node.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第一节点、第二节点和终端设备,当第一节点驻留到第二节点时,本实施例通过节点驻留重选信息辅助第一节点或终端设备对第二节点进行重选,实现频繁移动网络系统下的节点驻留重选,实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the first node, the second node, and the terminal device in a frequent mobility network system, when the first node camps on the second node, this embodiment assists the first node or the terminal device in reselecting the second node through node camping reselection information, thereby realizing node camping reselection in a frequent mobility network system and achieving efficient mobility management.

第九方面,为本申请的一种通信方法,包括:终端设备接收节点驻留重选信息,节点驻留重选信息用于指示以下至少一项:类型信息、覆盖信息、路径信息、或者有效信息;类型信息用于指示第二节点的类型,第二节点用于提供核心网连接功能;覆盖信息用于指示第二节点的服务覆盖;路径信息用于指示第二节点的传输路径;有效信息用于指示第二节点的F1接口有效时间。A ninth aspect is a communication method according to this application, comprising: a terminal device receiving node reselection information, wherein the node reselection information is used to indicate at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or validity information; the type information is used to indicate the type of a second node, the second node being used to provide core network connection functions; the coverage information is used to indicate the service coverage of the second node; the path information is used to indicate the transmission path of the second node; and the validity information is used to indicate the validity time of the F1 interface of the second node.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第二节点和终端设备,当终端设备驻留到第二节点时,本实施例通过节点驻留重选信息辅助终端设备对第二节点进行重选,实现频繁移动网络系统下的节点驻留重选,以及实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the second node and terminal device in a frequent mobility network system, when the terminal device camps on the second node, this embodiment assists the terminal device in reselecting the second node through node camping reselection information, thereby realizing node camping reselection in a frequent mobility network system and achieving efficient mobility management.

在一些可能的示例中,在接收节点驻留重选信息之后,该方法还包括:终端设备根据节点驻留重选信息确定第三节点,或者根据节点驻留重选信息更新第一节点或所述第二节点的分组数据汇聚层协层配置信息。In some possible examples, after receiving node relocation information, the method further includes: the terminal device determining a third node based on the node relocation information, or updating the packet data aggregation layer co-processor configuration information of the first node or the second node based on the node relocation information.

可见,若第一节点能继续为终端设备提供接入服务,则终端设备仅需要根据节点驻留重选信息更新第一节点的分组数据汇聚层协层层配置信息,无需更新相关的其他层配置信息。As can be seen, if the first node can continue to provide access services to the terminal device, the terminal device only needs to update the first node's packet data aggregation layer protocol layer configuration information according to the node relocation information, without needing to update the configuration information of other related layers.

第十方面,为本申请的一种通信装置,包括处理单元,处理单元用于执行上述第一方面、第四方面、或者第七方面所设计的方法中的步骤,或者处理单元用于执行上述第二方面、第五方面、或者第八方面所设计的方法中的步骤,或者处理单元用于执行上述第三方面或者第六方面所设计的方法中的步骤,处理单元用于执行上述第九方面所设计的方法中的步骤。The tenth aspect is a communication device according to this application, comprising a processing unit, which is configured to perform the steps in the methods designed in the first, fourth, or seventh aspects described above, or the processing unit is configured to perform the steps in the methods designed in the second, fifth, or eighth aspects described above, or the processing unit is configured to perform the steps in the methods designed in the third or sixth aspects described above, and the processing unit is configured to perform the steps in the methods designed in the ninth aspect described above.

第十一方面,为本申请的一种通信装置,包括处理器、存储器及存储在所述存储器上的计算机程序或指令,其中,所述处理器执行所述计算机程序或指令以实现第一方面、第四方面、或者第七方面所设计的方法中的步骤,或者所述处理器执行所述计算机程序或指令以实现上述第二方面、第五方面、或者第八方面所设计的方法中的步骤,或者所述处理器执行所述计算机程序或指令以实现上述第三方面或者第六方面所设计的方法中的步骤。Eleventhly, a communication device according to this application includes a processor, a memory, and a computer program or instructions stored in the memory, wherein the processor executes the computer program or instructions to implement the steps in the methods designed in the first, fourth, or seventh aspects, or the processor executes the computer program or instructions to implement the steps in the methods designed in the second, fifth, or eighth aspects, or the processor executes the computer program or instructions to implement the steps in the methods designed in the third or sixth aspects.

可选的,通信装置为节点或者芯片。Optionally, the communication device can be a node or a chip.

第十二方面,为本申请的一种终端设备,包括处理器、存储器及存储在所述存储器上的计算机程序或指令,其中,所述处理器执行所述计算机程序或指令以实现上述第九方面所设计的方法中的步骤。The twelfth aspect is a terminal device according to this application, including a processor, a memory, and a computer program or instructions stored in the memory, wherein the processor executes the computer program or instructions to implement the steps in the method designed in the ninth aspect above.

第十三方面,为本申请的一种芯片,包括处理器,其中,所述处理器执行上述第一方面至第九方面中任一项所设计的方法中的步骤。Thirteenth aspect, a chip according to this application, includes a processor, wherein the processor performs the steps of the method designed in any one of the first to ninth aspects described above.

可选的,芯片还包括通信接口,所述处理器通过所述通信接口执行上述第一方面至第九方面中任一项所设计的方法中的发送步骤和/或接收步骤。Optionally, the chip also includes a communication interface through which the processor executes the sending and/or receiving steps in the method designed in any one of the first to ninth aspects described above.

第十四方面,为本申请的一种芯片模组,包括芯片,所述芯片包括处理器,其中,所述处理器执行上述第一方面至第九方面中任一项所设计的方法中的步骤。The fourteenth aspect is a chip module according to this application, including a chip, the chip including a processor, wherein the processor performs the steps of the method designed in any one of the first to ninth aspects described above.

可选的,芯片模组还包括收发组件,所述处理器通过所述收发组件执行上述第一方面至第九方面中任一项中的发送步骤和/或接收步骤。Optionally, the chip module further includes a transceiver component, through which the processor performs the transmission step and/or reception step in any of the first to ninth aspects described above.

第十五方面,为本申请的一种计算机可读存储介质,其中,其存储有计算机程序或指令,所述计算机程序或指令被执行时实现上述第一方面至第九方面中任一项所设计的方法中的步骤。例如,所述计算机程序或指令被处理器执行。The fifteenth aspect is a computer-readable storage medium of this application, wherein it stores a computer program or instructions that, when executed, implement the steps of the method designed in any one of the first to ninth aspects described above. For example, the computer program or instructions are executed by a processor.

第十六方面,为本申请的一种计算机程序产品,包括计算机程序或指令,其中,该计算机程序或指令被执行时上述第一方面至第九方面中任一项所设计的方法中的步骤被执行。例如,所述计算机程序或指令被处理器执行。The sixteenth aspect is a computer program product of this application, comprising a computer program or instructions, wherein when the computer program or instructions are executed, the steps in the method designed in any one of the first to ninth aspects described above are performed. For example, the computer program or instructions are executed by a processor.

附图说明Attached Figure Description

图1是本申请实施例的一种频繁移动网络系统的架构示意图;Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a frequent mobility network system according to an embodiment of this application;

图2是本申请实施例的一种NTN系统的透传架构的示意图;Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of the transparent transmission architecture of an NTN system according to an embodiment of this application;

图3是本申请实施例的一种NTN系统的再生架构的示意图;Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of the regeneration architecture of an NTN system according to an embodiment of this application;

图4是本申请实施例的一种NTN系统的架构示意图;Figure 4 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of an NTN system according to an embodiment of this application;

图5是本申请实施例的又一种NTN系统的架构示意图;Figure 5 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of another NTN system according to an embodiment of this application;

图6是本申请实施例的一种IAB的架构示意图;Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of an IAB according to an embodiment of this application;

图7是本申请实施例的一种TN IAB的移动性管理的架构示意图;Figure 7 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of TN IAB mobility management according to an embodiment of this application;

图8是本申请实施例的又一种TN IAB的移动性管理的架构示意图;Figure 8 is a schematic diagram of the mobility management architecture of another TN IAB according to an embodiment of this application;

图9至图12是本申请实施例的又一种频繁移动网络系统的架构示意图;Figures 9 to 12 are schematic diagrams of the architecture of another frequent mobility network system according to an embodiment of this application;

图13是本申请实施例的一种频繁移动网络系统下的接入切换方法的流程示意图;Figure 13 is a flowchart illustrating an access handover method in a frequent mobility network system according to an embodiment of this application;

图14是本申请实施例的又一种频繁移动网络系统下的接入切换方法的流程示意图;Figure 14 is a flowchart illustrating another access handover method in a frequent mobile network system according to an embodiment of this application;

图15是本申请实施例的一种频繁移动网络系统的移动性管理的架构的示意图;Figure 15 is a schematic diagram of the mobility management architecture of a frequent mobility network system according to an embodiment of this application;

图16是本申请实施例的一种基于条件切换的频繁移动网络系统下的接入切换方法的流程示意图;Figure 16 is a flowchart illustrating an access handover method in a frequent mobile network system based on conditional handover according to an embodiment of this application.

图17是本申请实施例的又一种基于条件切换的频繁移动网络系统下的接入切换方法的流程示意图;Figure 17 is a flowchart illustrating another access handover method in a frequent mobile network system based on conditional handover according to an embodiment of this application.

图18至图20是本申请实施例的一种频繁移动网络系统下的节点驻留重选方法的流程示意图;Figures 18 to 20 are schematic flowcharts of a node relocation method in a frequent mobility network system according to an embodiment of this application;

图21至图24是本申请实施例的一种通信装置的功能单元组成框图;Figures 21 to 24 are functional unit block diagrams of a communication device according to an embodiment of this application;

图25是本申请实施例的一种节点的结构示意图;Figure 25 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a node according to an embodiment of this application;

图26是本申请实施例的一种终端设备的结构示意图。Figure 26 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a terminal device according to an embodiment of this application.

具体实施方式Detailed Implementation

应理解,本申请实施例中涉及的术语“第一”、“第二”等是用于区别不同对象,而不是用于描述特定顺序。此外,术语“包括”和“具有”以及它们任何变形,意图在于覆盖不排他的包含。例如,包含了一系列步骤或单元的过程、方法、软件、产品或设备没有限定于已列出的步骤或单元,而是可能还包括没有列出的步骤或单元,或还可能包括对于这些过程、方法、产品或设备固有的其他步骤或单元。It should be understood that the terms "first," "second," etc., used in the embodiments of this application are used to distinguish different objects, rather than to describe a specific order. Furthermore, the terms "comprising" and "having," and any variations thereof, are intended to cover non-exclusive inclusion. For example, a process, method, software, product, or device that includes a series of steps or units is not limited to the listed steps or units, but may also include steps or units not listed, or may also include other steps or units inherent to these processes, methods, products, or devices.

本申请实施例中涉及的“实施例”意味着,结合实施例描述的特定特征、结构或特性可以包含在本申请的至少一个实施例中。在说明书中的各个位置出现该短语并不一定均是指相同的实施例,也不是与其它实施例互斥的独立的或备选的实施例。本领域技术人员显式地和隐式地理解的是,本文所描述的实施例可以与其它实施例相结合。The term "embodiment" as used in the embodiments of this application means that a specific feature, structure, or characteristic described in connection with an embodiment may be included in at least one embodiment of this application. The appearance of this phrase in various places in the specification does not necessarily refer to the same embodiment, nor is it a mutually exclusive, independent, or alternative embodiment. It will be explicitly and implicitly understood by those skilled in the art that the embodiments described herein can be combined with other embodiments.

本申请实施例中的“至少一个”或“至少一项”,指的是一个或多个,多个指的是两个或两个以上。In the embodiments of this application, "at least one" or "at least one item" refers to one or more, and "multiple" refers to two or more.

本申请实施例中的“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示如下三种情况:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B。其中,A、B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”可以表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。In this application's embodiments, "and/or" describes the association relationship between related objects, indicating that three relationships can exist. For example, A and/or B can represent the following three cases: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone. A and B can be singular or plural. The character "/" indicates that the preceding and following related objects have an "or" relationship.

本申请实施例中的“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,指的是这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a、b或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示如下七种情况:a,b,c,a和b,a和c,b和c,a、b和c。其中,a、b、c中的每一个可以是元素,也可以是包含一个或多个元素的集合。In the embodiments of this application, "at least one of the following" or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item or a plurality of items. For example, at least one of a, b, or c can represent the following seven cases: a, b, c, a and b, a and c, b and c, a, b, and c. Each of a, b, and c can be an element or a set containing one or more elements.

本申请实施例中涉及“的(of)”、“相应的(corresponding,relevant)”、“对应的(corresponding)”、“关联的(associated,related)”、“映射的(mapped)”有时可以混用。应当指出的是,在不强调区别时,所要表达的概念或含义是一致的。In the embodiments of this application, the terms "of," "corresponding (relevant)," "corresponding," "associated (related)," and "mapped" may sometimes be used interchangeably. It should be noted that when no distinction is emphasized, the concepts or meanings expressed are consistent.

本申请实施例中的“网络”可以与“系统”等表达为同一概念,通信系统即为通信网络。In the embodiments of this application, "network" can be expressed as the same concept as "system," and a communication system is a communication network.

本申请实施例中的“连接”是指直接连接或者间接连接等各种连接方式,以实现设备间的通信,对此不做具体限定。In this application, "connection" refers to various connection methods, such as direct connection or indirect connection, to achieve communication between devices, and is not specifically limited thereto.

下面对本实施例的频繁移动网络系统进行具体说明。The frequent mobility network system of this embodiment will be described in detail below.

TN系统是指由位于地面上的节点和基础设施组成的通信网络系统。这些节点可以包括终端设备和/或用于提供接入功能的节点等。通常,TN系统中的用于提供接入功能的节点的位置是固定不变的或者不会频繁变动。例如,TN系统中的用于提供接入功能的节点可以为网络设备,而网络设备的位置通常是固定不变的。A TN system refers to a communication network system composed of nodes and infrastructure located on the ground. These nodes may include terminal equipment and/or nodes that provide access functions. Typically, the locations of nodes providing access functions in a TN system are fixed or do not change frequently. For example, a node providing access functions in a TN system can be a network device, and the location of network devices is usually fixed.

但是,不同于TN系统,本实施例考虑频繁移动网络系统。其中,频繁移动网络,可以理解为网络中的用于提供接入功能的节点的位置是频繁移动的。However, unlike the TN system, this embodiment considers a frequently moving network system. A frequently moving network can be understood as a network in which the locations of nodes providing access functions move frequently.

例如,频繁移动网络系统可以包括非地面网络(non-terrestrial networks,NTN)系统或者TN与NTN融合网络系统。其中,在NTN系统或者TN与NTN融合网络系统中的用于提供接入功能的节点可以为卫星,而卫星的位置是频繁移动的。For example, frequently moving network systems can include non-terrestrial networks (NTN) systems or converged TN and NTN network systems. In these systems, the nodes providing access functionality can be satellites, whose locations are frequently changing.

需要说明的是,频繁移动网络系统可以包括终端设备、用于提供接入功能的节点。其中,用于提供接入功能的节点可以向终端设备提供接入。例如,如图1所示,用于提供接入功能的节点120向终端设备110提供接入服务。另外,在频繁移动网络系统中,终端设备可以随着用于提供接入功能的节点的移动而移动,或者终端设备可以不随着用于提供接入功能的节点的移动而移动。It should be noted that a frequent mobility network system may include terminal devices and nodes for providing access functionality. The nodes for providing access functionality can provide access to the terminal devices. For example, as shown in Figure 1, node 120 provides access services to terminal device 110. Furthermore, in a frequent mobility network system, the terminal device may move along with the nodes for providing access functionality, or it may not move with the nodes for providing access functionality.

在频繁移动网络系统中,用于提供接入功能的节点可以包括第一类节点和/或第二类节点。In a frequently moving network system, the nodes used to provide access functionality may include type I nodes and/or type II nodes.

第一类节点可以用于提供回传接入功能,可以包含第一功能单元和第二功能单元。其中,第一功能单元可以用于提供回传功能,第二功能单元可以用于提供接入功能。The first type of node can be used to provide backhaul access functionality and may include a first functional unit and a second functional unit. The first functional unit can be used to provide backhaul functionality, and the second functional unit can be used to provide access functionality.

例如,以接入回传一体化(Integrated Access and Backhaul,IAB)为例,第一类节点可以为IAB节点(IAB-node)。其中,IAB-node可以提供接入和回传功能,可以包含IAB节点的移动终端(IAB-node-Mobile-Termination,IAB-node-MT)和IAB节点的分布单元(IAB-node-distributed unit,IAB-node-DU)。其中,IAB-node-MT可以作为终端设备,可以提供回传功能。IAB-node-DU可以作为接入侧的杆站小区,可以提供补盲覆盖,可以为终端设备或子IAB-node-MT(或者称为下级IAB-node-MT)提供接入。此时,第一功能单元可以为IAB-node-MT,第二功能单元可以为IAB-node-DU。For example, taking Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB) as an example, the first type of node can be an IAB node (IAB-node). An IAB-node can provide both access and backhaul functions and may include an IAB-node-Mobile-Termination (IAB-node-MT) and an IAB-node-Distributed Unit (IAB-node-DU). The IAB-node-MT can act as a terminal device, providing backhaul functionality. The IAB-node-DU can act as a pole-mounted cell on the access side, providing coverage gaps and providing access to terminal devices or sub-IAB-node-MTs (or lower-level IAB-node-MTs). In this case, the first functional unit can be an IAB-node-MT, and the second functional unit can be an IAB-node-DU.

第二类节点可以用于提供核心网连接功能以及接入功能,可以包括第三功能单元和第四功能单元。其中,第三功能单元可以用于提供核心网连接功能以及接入功能,可以为第二功能单元和/或第四功能单元提供接入服务。第四功能单元可以用于提供接入功能,可以为终端设备和/或第一功能单元提供接入服务。The second type of node can be used to provide core network connectivity and access functions, and may include a third functional unit and a fourth functional unit. The third functional unit can provide core network connectivity and access functions, and can provide access services to the second functional unit and/or the fourth functional unit. The fourth functional unit can provide access functions, and can provide access services to terminal devices and/or the first functional unit.

例如,以IAB为例,第二类节点可以为IAB宿主(IAB-donor)。其中,IAB-donor可以看作支持IAB附加功能的网络设备,可以通过非IAB连接到核心网,可以包含IAB宿主的汇聚单元(IAB-donor-central unit,IAB-donor-CU)和IAB宿主的分布单元(IAB-donor-DU)。其中,IAB-donor-CU可以为IAB-donor-DU和IAB-node-DU提供接入服务;IAB-donor-DU可以为终端设备或IAB-node-MT提供接入服务。此时,第三功能单元可以为IAB-donor-CU,第四功能单元可以为IAB-donor-DU。For example, taking IAB as an example, the second type of node can be an IAB host (IAB-donor). An IAB-donor can be viewed as a network device supporting additional IAB functions, capable of connecting to the core network via non-IAB methods. It can include an IAB host aggregation unit (IAB-donor-central unit, IAB-donor-CU) and an IAB host distribution unit (IAB-donor-DU). The IAB-donor-CU can provide access services to IAB-donor-DU and IAB-node-DU; the IAB-donor-DU can provide access services to terminal devices or IAB-node-MT. In this case, the third functional unit can be an IAB-donor-CU, and the fourth functional unit can be an IAB-donor-DU.

下面本实施例对上文提到的终端设备进行具体说明。The following embodiment will provide a detailed description of the terminal device mentioned above.

终端设备,可以为一种具有收发功能的设备,又可以称之为终端、用户设备(user equipment,UE)、远程终端设备(remote UE)、中继设备(relay UE)、接入终端设备、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、移动设备、用户终端设备、智能终端设备、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。需要说明的是,中继设备是能够为其他终端设备(包括远程终端设备)提供中继转发服务的终端设备。A terminal device can be a device with transceiver capabilities, and can also be called a terminal, user equipment (UE), remote terminal equipment (relay UE), relay equipment (relay UE), access terminal equipment, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, mobile device, user terminal equipment, smart terminal equipment, wireless communication equipment, user agent, or user device. It should be noted that a relay device is a terminal device capable of providing relay forwarding services to other terminal devices (including remote terminal devices).

例如,终端设备可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(Pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端设备、无人自动驾驶中的无线终端设备、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端设备、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端设备、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端设备、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端设备或者智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端设备等。For example, terminal devices can be mobile phones, tablets, computers with wireless transceiver capabilities, virtual reality (VR) terminal devices, augmented reality (AR) terminal devices, wireless terminal devices in industrial control, wireless terminal devices in autonomous driving, wireless terminal devices in remote medical care, wireless terminal devices in smart grids, wireless terminal devices in transportation safety, wireless terminal devices in smart cities, or wireless terminal devices in smart homes, etc.

又例如,终端设备可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备、下一代通信系统(例如NR通信系统、6G通信系统)中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的终端设备等,对此不作具体限定。For example, a terminal device can be a cellular phone, cordless phone, session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, wireless local loop (WLL) station, personal digital assistant (PDA), handheld device with wireless communication capabilities, computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, in-vehicle device, wearable device, terminal device in next-generation communication systems (such as NR communication systems, 6G communication systems), or terminal device in a future public land mobile network (PLMN), etc., without specific limitations.

另外,终端设备可以部署在陆地上,包括室内或室外、手持、穿戴或车载;可以部署在水面上(如轮船等);可以部署在空中(如飞机、气球和卫星等)。终端设备可以包括无线通信功能的装置,例如芯片系统、芯片、芯片模组。示例的,该芯片系统可以包括芯片,还可以包括其它分立器件。终端设备可以是芯片、芯片模组、装置、单元等,对此不作具体限制。Furthermore, terminal devices can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld, wearable, or vehicle-mounted; on water (such as ships); or in the air (such as airplanes, balloons, and satellites). Terminal devices may include devices with wireless communication capabilities, such as chip systems, chips, or chip modules. For example, the chip system may include chips, and may also include other discrete devices. Terminal devices can be chips, chip modules, devices, units, etc., without specific limitations.

下面本实施例对上文提到的网络设备进行具体说明。网络设备,可以为一种具有收发功能的设备。在TN系统中,网络设备可以包括接入网设备和/或核心网(core network,CN)设备。在NTN系统中,网络设备可以包括卫星、接入网设备、NTN网关和核心网设备中的至少一项。下面对此分别进行说明。The following embodiment provides a detailed description of the network devices mentioned above. A network device can be a device with transceiver capabilities. In a TN system, the network device may include access network devices and/or core network (CN) devices. In an NTN system, the network device may include at least one of a satellite, access network device, NTN gateway, and core network device. These will be described separately below.

接入网设备可以为无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)。RAN可以由多个5G-RAN节点组成的,实现无线物理层功能、资源调度和无线资源管理、无线接入控制以及移动性管理功能。Access network equipment can be a radio access network (RAN). The RAN can consist of multiple 5G-RAN nodes, implementing radio physical layer functions, resource scheduling and radio resource management, radio access control, and mobility management functions.

例如,接入网设备可以为全球移动通讯(global system of mobile communication,GSM)系统或码分多址(code division multiple access,CDMA)中的基站(base transceiver station,BTS)、宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA)系统中的基站(nodeB,NB)、为LTE通信系统中的演进型节点B(evolutional node B,eNB或eNodeB)、NR通信系统中的下一代演进型的节点B(next generation evolved node B,ng-eNB)、NR通信系统中的下一代节点B(next generation node B,gNB或gNodeB)、双连接架构中的主节点(master node,MN)、双连接架构中的第二节点或辅节点(secondary node,SN)、传输接收点(transmission receiving point,TRP)等,对此不作具体限制。For example, access network equipment can be a base station (BTS) in a Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM) or Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) system, a base station (NodeB, NB) in a Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) system, an evolved Node B (eNB or eNodeB) in an LTE communication system, a next-generation evolved Node B (ng-eNB) in an NR communication system, a next-generation Node B (gNB or gNodeB) in an NR communication system, a master node (MN) in a dual connectivity architecture, a secondary node (SN) in a dual connectivity architecture, a transmission receiving point (TRP), etc., without specific restrictions.

接入网设备的功能被分为CU和DU。一个CU可以控制一个或多个DU。CU和DU物理上可以通过光纤连接,逻辑上存在一个专门定义的F1接口,用于CU与DU之间进行通信。Access network equipment functions as CUs and DUs. One CU can control one or more DUs. CUs and DUs are physically connected via optical fiber, and logically share a specially defined F1 interface for communication between them.

CU是指托管时延敏感度低的协议层的逻辑节点。其中,时延敏感度低的协议层包括接入网设备的无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)层、分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层、业务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)层。RRC层主要负责RAN相关的控制面过程。PDCP层主要负责IP报头压缩、加密和完整性保护。SDAP层是gNodeB的用户面协议栈中新加入的协议层,主要负责在数据包中添加QoS流标识(QoS Flow Identifier,QFI),并将QoS流映射到数据无线承载(data radio bearer,DRB)。A CU (Controller Unit) refers to a logical node that hosts protocol layers with low latency sensitivity. These low-latency-sensitivity protocol layers include the Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer, Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer, and Service Data Adaptation Protocol (SDAP) layer of the access network equipment. The RRC layer is primarily responsible for RAN-related control plane procedures. The PDCP layer is primarily responsible for IP header compression, encryption, and integrity protection. The SDAP layer is a newly added protocol layer in the gNodeB's user plane protocol stack, primarily responsible for adding QoS Flow Identifiers (QFIs) to data packets and mapping QoS flows to data radio bearers (DRBs).

DU是指托管时延敏感度高的协议层的逻辑节点,DU由CU控制,一个DU支持一个或多个小区,一个小区只能属于一个DU。其中,时延敏感度高的协议层包括无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层和物理(physical,PHY)层。RLC层主要负责数据分段和重组。MAC层主要负责逻辑信道的复用、混合自动重传请求(hybrid automatic repeat request,HARQ)重传以及与调度相关的功能。物理层主要负责编码、解码、调制、解调、多天线映射等功能。A DU (Dedicated Unit) refers to a logical node that hosts high-latency-sensitive protocol layers. A DU is controlled by a CU (Control Unit), and one DU supports one or more cells; a cell can only belong to one DU. The high-latency-sensitive protocol layers include the Radio Link Control (RLC) layer, the Media Access Control (MAC) layer, and the Physical (PHY) layer. The RLC layer is primarily responsible for data segmentation and reassembly. The MAC layer is primarily responsible for logical channel multiplexing, Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) retransmission, and scheduling-related functions. The Physical layer is primarily responsible for encoding, decoding, modulation, demodulation, and multi-antenna mapping.

核心网设备可以包括提供各类功能的网元。其中,“网元”也可以称为实体、设备、装置或模块等,对此不作具体限定。另外,为了便于描述和说明,在对部分描述中省略“网元”这一描述,例如,将网络功能开放功能(network exposure function,NEF)网元简称NEF,此情况下,该“NEF”应理解为NEF网元或NEF实体,以下,省略对相同或相似情况的说明。Core network equipment may include network elements that provide various functions. The term "network element" can also be referred to as an entity, device, apparatus, or module, etc., without specific limitations. Furthermore, for ease of description and explanation, the term "network element" is omitted in some descriptions. For example, a network exposure function (NEF) network element is abbreviated as NEF. In this case, "NEF" should be understood as either a NEF network element or a NEF entity. The following omits further explanation of similar or identical cases.

例如,核心网设备可以包括移动管理实体(mobility management entity,MME)、广播多播服务中心(broadcast multicast service center,BMSC)等,或者可以包括5G系统中的相应功能实体,如核心网控制面(control plane,CP)或用户面(user plan,UP)网络功能等,核心网控制面也可以理解为核心网的控制面功能(control plane function,CPF)实体。For example, core network equipment may include a mobility management entity (MME), a broadcast multicast service center (BMSC), or corresponding functional entities in the 5G system, such as core network control plane (CP) or user plan (UP) network functions. The core network control plane can also be understood as the core network control plane function (CPF) entity.

下面本实施例对上文提到的卫星、NTN网关和NTN系统进行具体说明。The following embodiment will provide a detailed description of the satellite, NTN gateway, and NTN system mentioned above.

卫星,可以是透传载荷(transparent payload)(或称为弯管载荷(bent pipe payload))或再生载荷(regenerative payload)信号发射机的航天器,也就是透传卫星(transparent satellite)或再生卫星(regenerative satellite)。A satellite can be a spacecraft that transmits signals using a transparent payload (or bent pipe payload) or a regenerative payload; that is, a transparent satellite or a regenerative satellite.

需要说明的是,卫星可以按照运行轨道高度的不同分为地球静止轨道geostationary earth orbit,GEO)卫星、中地轨道(medium earth orbit,MEO)卫星、近地轨道(low earth orbit,LEO)卫星以及高椭圆轨道(high elliptical orbit,HEO)卫星等。It should be noted that satellites can be classified according to their orbital altitude into geostationary orbit (GEO) satellites, medium earth orbit (MEO) satellites, low earth orbit (LEO) satellites, and high elliptical orbit (HEO) satellites, etc.

NTN网关,可以是位于地面的地球站或网关,能够提供足够的无线射频(radio frequency,RF)功率和RF灵敏度,用以实现地面设备(如网络设备)与卫星的连接。非地面网络网关是传输网络层(transport network layer,TNL)的节点。An NTN gateway, which can be a ground-based earth station or gateway, provides sufficient radio frequency (RF) power and RF sensitivity to enable connections between ground devices (such as network equipment) and satellites. A non-terrestrial network gateway is a node in the transport network layer (TNL).

根据载荷类型不同,NTN系统有透传架构和再生架构两种常见架构。下面分别进行说明。Depending on the type of payload, NTN systems have two common architectures: pass-through architecture and regenerative architecture. These will be explained below.

在透传架构中,信号在卫星上只进行了频率的转换,信号的放大等过程,卫星对于信号而言是透明的,仿佛不存在一样。例如,以接入网设备为gNB为例,NTN系统的透传架构如图2所示。在图2中,终端设备、NTN网关和gNB位于地球表面,卫星位于地球轨道。卫星、NTN网关和gNB组成无线接入网(NG-radio access network,NG-RAN)。NG-RAN通过NG接口连接5G核心网,5G核心网通过N6接口连接数据网。卫星和NTN网关可以认为是远程无线单元,卫星和NTN网关之间可以通过NR Uu接口通信。In a transparent transmission architecture, the signal only undergoes frequency conversion and amplification on the satellite; the satellite is transparent to the signal, as if it doesn't exist. For example, taking the gNB as the access network device, the transparent transmission architecture of the NTN system is shown in Figure 2. In Figure 2, the terminal device, NTN gateway, and gNB are located on the Earth's surface, while the satellite is in Earth orbit. The satellite, NTN gateway, and gNB constitute the radio access network (NG-RAN). The NG-RAN connects to the 5G core network through the NG interface, and the 5G core network connects to the data network through the N6 interface. The satellite and NTN gateway can be considered as remote radio units, and they can communicate with each other through the NR Uu interface.

在再生架构中,卫星工作在再生模式下,具有部分或部分基站功能。例如,以接入网设备为gNB为例,NTN系统的再生架构如图3所示。在图3的(a)中,终端设备位于地球表面,卫星具有gNB的全部功能。卫星和gNB组成NG-RAN。NG-RAN通过NG Uu接口连接5G核心网,5G核心网通过N6接口连接数据网。gNB和终端设备之间可以通过NR Uu接口通信。In a regenerative architecture, the satellite operates in regenerative mode and possesses some or all of the functions of a base station. For example, taking the access network equipment as a gNB, the regenerative architecture of the NTN system is shown in Figure 3. In Figure 3(a), the terminal equipment is located on the Earth's surface, and the satellite possesses all the functions of the gNB. The satellite and gNB together form the NG-RAN. The NG-RAN connects to the 5G core network via the NG Uu interface, and the 5G core network connects to the data network via the N6 interface. The gNB and the terminal equipment can communicate via the NR Uu interface.

在图3的(b)中,终端设备位于地球表面,卫星具有gNB-DU功能,卫星、gNB-DU和gNB-CU组成NG-RAN。NG-RAN通过NG Uu接口连接5G核心网,5G核心网通过N6接口连接数据网。gNB和终端设备之间可以通过NR Uu接口通信。In Figure 3(b), the terminal device is located on the Earth's surface, and the satellite has gNB-DU functionality. The satellite, gNB-DU, and gNB-CU together form the NG-RAN. The NG-RAN connects to the 5G core network via the NG Uu interface, and the 5G core network connects to the data network via the N6 interface. The gNB and the terminal device can communicate via the NR Uu interface.

另外,NTN系统依据载荷(如波束)的工作模式,通常可以分为凝视(earth-fixed或者quasi-earth fixed)和非凝视(earth-moving)NTN系统。In addition, based on the operating mode of the payload (such as beam), NTN systems can generally be divided into eye-fixed (earth-fixed or quasi-earth fixed) and non-eye-moving (earth-moving) NTN systems.

在非凝视系统中,在一段时间内卫星波束覆盖范围会随着卫星一起移动,如图4的(a)所示。在图4的(a)中,在卫星从时刻T1移动到时刻T3的一段时间内,卫星波束覆盖范围随着卫星一起移动。In a non-staring system, the satellite beam coverage area moves along with the satellite over a period of time, as shown in Figure 4(a). In Figure 4(a), the satellite beam coverage area moves along with the satellite over the period from time T1 to time T3.

在凝视系统中,在一段时间内卫星通过动态调整波束指向以使得波束近似覆盖地面同一区域,如图4的(b)所示。在图4的(b)中,在卫星从时刻T1移动到时刻T3的一段时间内,卫星波束覆盖范围在同一区域。In a staring system, the satellite dynamically adjusts its beam pointing over a period of time to ensure that the beam approximately covers the same area of the ground, as shown in Figure 4(b). In Figure 4(b), the satellite beam coverage area is the same during the period when the satellite moves from time T1 to time T3.

NTN系统中卫星网络的服务区域按地理位置划分成多个小的地理区域,每个地理区域称为一个波位。波位可以采用不同的形状表示,可以表示卫星波束覆盖范围。In an NTN system, the service area of a satellite network is divided into multiple smaller geographical regions, each called a beam position. Beam positions can be represented in different shapes to indicate the coverage area of a satellite beam.

在NTN系统中,LEO卫星的运动会导致某个区域(波位)内的终端设备发生群切换(如针对连接态的终端设备)或者群重选(如针对空闲态或者非激活态的终端设备)等问题。In the NTN system, the movement of LEO satellites can cause problems such as group handover (e.g. for connected terminal devices) or group reselection (e.g. for idle or inactive terminal devices) in a certain area (wavelength).

以群切换、且终端设备为UE为例。在时刻T1时,如图5的(a)所示,针对卫星510,区域530内多个波位(即波位5301、波位5302、波位5303、波位5304、波位5305和波位5306);针对卫星520,区域540内多个波位、且波位5401里面有UE簇,即UE-G1(UE-G1内包含多个UE)。其中,在时刻T1时,UE-G1被卫星520的一个或多个波束服务。Taking group handover with the terminal device being a UE as an example. At time T1, as shown in Figure 5(a), for satellite 510, there are multiple beams in area 530 (i.e., beams 5301, 5302, 5303, 5304, 5305, and 5306); for satellite 520, there are multiple beams in area 540, and beam 5401 contains a UE cluster, namely UE-G1 (UE-G1 contains multiple UEs). At time T1, UE-G1 is served by one or more beams of satellite 520.

卫星510和卫星520随着时间不断运动。在从时刻T1到时刻T2时,假设UE-G1内的UE不发生移动,如图5的(b)所示,因卫星520的运动而导致卫星520不再向UE-G1提供服务,而是卫星510的一个或多个波束向UE-G1提供服务。此时,UE-G1从卫星520切换到卫星510的过程可以称为群切换。Satellites 510 and 520 are constantly moving over time. From time T1 to time T2, assuming the UEs within UE-G1 do not move (as shown in Figure 5(b)), the movement of satellite 520 causes it to cease providing service to UE-G1. Instead, one or more beams of satellite 510 provide service to UE-G1. This process of UE-G1 switching from satellite 520 to satellite 510 can be called group handover.

由于卫星的运动速度较快,约7.5km/s,因此发生群切换的频次约为每次/几秒到几十秒。换言之,在跳波束LEO卫星网络中的群切换成为常态。Because satellites move at relatively high speeds, approximately 7.5 km/s, group handovers occur only once every few seconds to tens of seconds. In other words, group handovers are commonplace in hopping-beam LEO satellite networks.

下面本实施例对上文提到的IAB进行具体说明。The following embodiment will provide a detailed explanation of the IAB mentioned above.

IAB的目的是支持无线回传和中继链路,从而实现小区的灵活和非常密集的部署,而无需按比例加密有线传输网络。典型部署场景包括支持室外小基站部署、室内小基站部署甚至移动中继(例如,在公共汽车或火车上)。IAB的功能架构如下:The purpose of the IAB (Infrastructure Access Block) is to support wireless backhaul and relay links, enabling flexible and very dense cell deployments without proportionally encrypting the wired transmission network. Typical deployment scenarios include supporting outdoor small cell deployments, indoor small cell deployments, and even mobile relays (e.g., on buses or trains). The functional architecture of the IAB is as follows:

IAB-node,可以提供接入和回传功能,可以包含IAB-node-MT和IAB-node-DU。其中,IAB-node-MT可以作为终端设备,可以提供回传功能。IAB-node-DU可以作为接入侧的杆站小区,可以提供补盲覆盖,可以为终端设备或子IAB-node-MT提供接入服务。An IAB-node provides access and backhaul capabilities and can consist of an IAB-node-MT and an IAB-node-DU. The IAB-node-MT acts as a terminal device, providing backhaul functionality. The IAB-node-DU acts as an access-side pole cell, providing coverage coverage and offering access services to terminal devices or sub-IAB-node-MTs.

IAB-donor,可以看作支持IAB附加功能的网络设备(如gNodeB),可以通过非IAB连接到核心网,包含IAB-donor-DU和IAB-donor-CU。其中,IAB-donor-CU可以为IAB-donor-DU和IAB-node-DU提供接入服务;IAB-donor-DU可以为终端设备或IAB-node-MT提供接入服务。An IAB-donor can be viewed as a network device that supports additional IAB functions (such as a gNodeB). It can connect to the core network through non-IAB connections and includes IAB-donor-DU and IAB-donor-CU. Among them, IAB-donor-CU can provide access services for IAB-donor-DU and IAB-node-DU; IAB-donor-DU can provide access services for terminal devices or IAB-node-MT.

需要说明的是,当IAB-node为终端设备提供接入服务(由IAB-node-DU为终端设备提供接入服务)时,该终端设备称为“该IAB-node所连接的终端设备”、或者“该IAB-node所服务的终端设备”、或者“IAB-node所关联的终端设备”。It should be noted that when an IAB-node provides access services to a terminal device (or when an IAB-node-DU provides access services to a terminal device), the terminal device is referred to as "the terminal device connected to the IAB-node", "the terminal device served by the IAB-node", or "the terminal device associated with the IAB-node".

当IAB-donor为IAB-node提供接入服务(由IAB-donor-CU为IAB-node-DU提供接入服务)时,该IAB-node称为“该IAB-donor所连接的IAB-node”、或者“该IAB-donor所服务的IAB-node”、或者“该IAB-donor所关联的IAB-node”;该IAB-donor称为“该IAB-node所连接的IAB-donor”、或者“该IAB-node所关联的IAB-donor”。When an IAB-donor provides access services to an IAB-node (or when an IAB-donor-CU provides access services to an IAB-node-DU), the IAB-node is referred to as "the IAB-node to which the IAB-donor is connected", or "the IAB-node served by the IAB-donor", or "the IAB-node associated with the IAB-donor"; the IAB-donor is referred to as "the IAB-donor to which the IAB-node is connected", or "the IAB-donor associated with the IAB-node".

当IAB-donor为终端设备提供接入服务(由IAB-donor-DU为终端设备提供接入服务)时,该终端设备称为“该IAB-donor所连接的终端设备”、或者“该IAB-donor所服务的终端设备”、或者“该IAB-donor所关联的终端设备”;该IAB-donor可以称为“该终端设备所连接的IAB-donor”、或者“该终端设备所关联的IAB-donor”。When an IAB-donor provides access services to a terminal device (or when an IAB-donor-DU provides access services to a terminal device), the terminal device is referred to as "the terminal device connected to the IAB-donor", "the terminal device served by the IAB-donor", or "the terminal device associated with the IAB-donor"; the IAB-donor can be referred to as "the IAB-donor connected to the terminal device" or "the IAB-donor associated with the terminal device".

当第一IAB-node为第二IAB-node提供接入服务(由第一IAB-node-DU为第二IAB-node-MT提供接入服务)时,第二IAB-node称为“第一IAB-node所连接的子IAB-node或者下级IAB-node”、或者“第一IAB-node所服务的子IAB-node或者下级IAB-node”、或者“第一IAB-node所关联的子IAB-node或者下级IAB-node”。同时,第一IAB-node称为“第二IAB-node的父IAB-node或者上级IAB-node”、或者“第二IAB-node所连接的IAB-node”。When the first IAB-node provides access services to the second IAB-node (the first IAB-node-DU provides access services to the second IAB-node-MT), the second IAB-node is referred to as "the child IAB-node or lower-level IAB-node connected to the first IAB-node," or "the child IAB-node or lower-level IAB-node served by the first IAB-node," or "the child IAB-node or lower-level IAB-node associated with the first IAB-node." Simultaneously, the first IAB-node is referred to as "the parent IAB-node or superior IAB-node of the second IAB-node," or "the IAB-node connected to the second IAB-node."

当IAB-node为终端设备提供接入服务(由IAB-node-DU为终端设备提供接入服务)时,该终端设备称为“该IAB-node所连接的终端设备”、或者“该IAB-node所服务的终端设备”、或者“该IAB-node所关联的终端设备”;该IAB-node称为“该终端设备所连接的IAB-node”、或者“该终端设备所关联的IAB-node”。When an IAB-node provides access services to a terminal device (or when an IAB-node-DU provides access services to a terminal device), the terminal device is referred to as "the terminal device connected to the IAB-node", "the terminal device served by the IAB-node", or "the terminal device associated with the IAB-node"; the IAB-node is referred to as "the IAB-node connected to the terminal device" or "the IAB-node associated with the terminal device".

例如,以基站为gNodeB、且终端设备为UE为例,如图6所示。在图6中,gNodeB 620、IAB-donor630、IAB-node 650和IAB-node 670组成NR-RAN。For example, taking a base station as gNodeB and a terminal device as UE as an example, as shown in Figure 6. In Figure 6, gNodeB 620, IAB-donor 630, IAB-node 650 and IAB-node 670 constitute NR-RAN.

gNodeB 620通过NG接口连接5G核心网(5G CN)610。IAB-donor 630包含IAB-donor-CU 6301和IAB-donor-DU 6302,IAB-donor-CU 6301通过F1接口连接IAB-donor-DU 6302,IAB-donor-CU 6301通过Xn-C接口连接gNodeB 620,IAB-donor-CU 6301通过NG接口连接5G CN 610;IAB-donor-DU 6302通过NR Uu接口连接UE 640。The gNodeB 620 connects to the 5G core network (5G CN) 610 via the NG interface. The IAB-donor 630 includes IAB-donor-CU 6301 and IAB-donor-DU 6302. IAB-donor-CU 6301 connects to IAB-donor-DU 6302 via the F1 interface, IAB-donor-CU 6301 connects to the gNodeB 620 via the Xn-C interface, and IAB-donor-CU 6301 connects to the 5G CN 610 via the NG interface; IAB-donor-DU 6302 connects to the UE 640 via the NR Uu interface.

IAB-node 650包含IAB-node-MT 6501和IAB-node-DU 6502,IAB-node-MT 6501通过NR Uu接口连接IAB-donor-DU 6302,IAB-node-DU 6502通过F1接口连接IAB-donor-CU 6301,IAB-node-DU 6502通过NR Uu接口连接UE 660。The IAB-node 650 includes IAB-node-MT 6501 and IAB-node-DU 6502. IAB-node-MT 6501 is connected to IAB-donor-DU 6302 via the NR Uu interface. IAB-node-DU 6502 is connected to IAB-donor-CU 6301 via the F1 interface. IAB-node-DU 6502 is connected to UE 660 via the NR Uu interface.

IAB-node 670包含IAB-node-MT 6701和IAB-node-DU 6702,IAB-node-MT 6701通过NR Uu接口连接IAB-node-DU 6502,IAB-node-DU 6702通过F1接口连接IAB-donor-CU 6301。其中,IAB-node 670可以看作IAB-node 650的子IAB-node或者下级IAB-node,IAB-node 650可以看作是IAB-node 670的父IAB-node或者上级IAB-node。IAB-node 670 includes IAB-node-MT 6701 and IAB-node-DU 6702. IAB-node-MT 6701 is connected to IAB-node-DU 6702 via the NR Uu interface, and IAB-node-DU 6702 is connected to IAB-donor-CU 6301 via the F1 interface. IAB-node 670 can be considered a child or lower-level IAB-node of IAB-node 650, and IAB-node 650 can be considered a parent or upper-level IAB-node of IAB-node 670.

另外,位置能够发生移动的IAB可以称为“移动IAB(mobile IAB,mIAB)”。mIAB的功能架构如下:Additionally, an IAB whose location can be moved can be called a "mobile IAB (mIAB)". The functional architecture of a mIAB is as follows:

mIAB-node,可以包含mIAB-node-MT和mIAB-node-DU。其中,mIAB-node-MT可以为位置能够发生移动的IAB-node-MT,mIAB-node-DU可以为位置能够发生移动的IAB-node-DU。A mIAB-node can contain mIAB-node-MT and mIAB-node-DU. mIAB-node-MT can be an IAB-node-MT whose location can be moved, and mIAB-node-DU can be an IAB-node-DU whose location can be moved.

mIAB-donor,可以包含mIAB-donor-MT和mIAB-donor-DU。其中,mIAB-donor-MT可以为位置能够发生移动的IAB-donor-MT,mIAB-donor-DU可以为位置能够发生移动的IAB-donor-DU。A mIAB-donor can include mIAB-donor-MT and mIAB-donor-DU. Among them, mIAB-donor-MT can be an IAB-donor-MT whose position can be moved, and mIAB-donor-DU can be an IAB-donor-DU whose position can be moved.

下面本实施例对TNIAB的移动性管理进行具体说明。The following embodiment provides a detailed description of TNIAB's mobility management.

需要说明的是,TN IAB可以是指位于地面的IAB或者地面/陆地IAB。其中,TN IAB-node可以为位于地面网络/陆地网络的IAB-node、或者属于TN系统的IAB-node;TN IAB-donor可以为位于地面网络/陆地网络的IAB-donor、或者属于TN系统的IAB-donor;TN mIAB-node可以为位于地面网络/陆地网络的mIAB-node、或者属于TN系统的mIAB-node;TN mIAB-donor可以为位于地面网络/陆地网络的mIAB-donor、或属于TN系统的IAB-node。It should be noted that TN IAB can refer to an IAB located on the ground or a ground/land-based IAB. Specifically, a TN IAB-node can be an IAB-node located in a ground/land-based network or an IAB-node belonging to the TN system; a TN IAB-donor can be an IAB-donor located in a ground/land-based network or an IAB-donor belonging to the TN system; a TN mIAB-node can be a mIAB-node located in a ground/land-based network or a mIAB-node belonging to the TN system; and a TN mIAB-donor can be a mIAB-donor located in a ground/land-based network or an IAB-node belonging to the TN system.

NTN IAB-node可以为位于非地面网络/非陆地网络的IAB-node、或者属于NTN系统的IAB-node;NTN IAB-donor可以为位于非地面网络/非陆地网络的IAB-donor、或者属于NTN系统的IAB-donor;NTN mIAB-node可以为位于非地面网络/非陆地网络的mIAB-node、或者属于NTN系统的mIAB-node;NTN mIAB-donor可以为位于非地面网络/非陆地网络的mIAB-donor、或属于NTN系统的IAB-node。在TN IAB的移动性管理中,TN mIAB-node的移动性包含以下情形:NTN IAB-nodes can be IAB-nodes located in non-terrestrial/non-land network networks, or IAB-nodes belonging to the NTN system; NTN IAB-donors can be IAB-donors located in non-terrestrial/non-land network networks, or IAB-donors belonging to the NTN system; NTN mIAB-nodes can be mIAB-nodes located in non-terrestrial/non-land network networks, or mIAB-nodes belonging to the NTN system; NTN mIAB-donors can be mIAB-donors located in non-terrestrial/non-land network networks, or IAB-nodes belonging to the NTN system. In TN IAB mobility management, the mobility of TN mIAB-nodes includes the following scenarios:

在第一种情形中,随着TN mIAB-node的移动,TN mIAB-node-MT所连接的TN IAB-donor-CU需要进行切换,而TN mIAB-node-DU所连接的TN IAB-donor-CU不需要进行切换,即TN mIAB-node-DU仍需维持与原TN IAB-donor-CU的连接。但是,由于TN mIAB-node-MT所连接的TN IAB-donor-CU发生切换,因此TN mIAB-node-DU到该TN IAB-donor-CU的传输路径会发生改变。另外,由于mIAB的场景通常伴随着mIAB所服务的至少一个UE的切换,但是现有网络中,UE和TN mIAB-node节点通常一起移动(如车载mIAB服务的一群UE),即UE和TN mIAB-node节点的相对位置关系未发生改变,因此通常可以考虑采用免接入(RACH-less)切换进一步减少切换开销。In the first scenario, as the TN mIAB-node moves, the TN IAB-donor-CU connected to the TN mIAB-node-MT needs to be switched, while the TN IAB-donor-CU connected to the TN mIAB-node-DU does not need to be switched; that is, the TN mIAB-node-DU still needs to maintain its connection with the original TN IAB-donor-CU. However, because the TN IAB-donor-CU connected to the TN mIAB-node-MT is switched, the transmission path from the TN mIAB-node-DU to that TN IAB-donor-CU will change. Furthermore, since mIAB scenarios typically involve the switching of at least one UE served by the mIAB, but in existing networks, UEs and TN mIAB-nodes usually move together (e.g., a group of UEs served by a vehicle-mounted mIAB), meaning the relative positional relationship between the UE and the TN mIAB-node remains unchanged, RACH-less handover can usually be considered to further reduce handover overhead.

例如,以终端设备为UE为例,如图7所示。在图7的(a)中,TN mIAB-node 740包含TN mIAB-node-MT 7401和TN mIAB-node-DU 7402。TN mIAB-node-MT7401通过TN IAB-donor-DU 7202连接TN IAB-donor-CU 7201,TN mIAB-node-DU 7402分别连接TN IAB-donor-CU 7101和UE 750。其中,TN mIAB-node-DU 7402至TN IAB-donor-CU 7101的传输路径需要经过TN IAB-donor-DU 7202。然后,UE 750随着TN mIAB-node 740的移动而移动。For example, taking the UE as the terminal device, as shown in Figure 7. In Figure 7(a), TN mIAB-node 740 includes TN mIAB-node-MT 7401 and TN mIAB-node-DU 7402. TN mIAB-node-MT 7401 is connected to TN IAB-donor-CU 7201 via TN IAB-donor-DU 7202, and TN mIAB-node-DU 7402 is connected to TN IAB-donor-CU 7101 and UE 750 respectively. The transmission path from TN mIAB-node-DU 7402 to TN IAB-donor-CU 7101 requires passing through TN IAB-donor-DU 7202. Then, UE 750 moves along with TN mIAB-node 740.

在图7的(b)中,TN mIAB-node-MT 7401从TN IAB-donor-CU 7201切换到TN IAB-donor-CU 7301、且TN mIAB-node-MT 7401通过TN IAB-donor-DU 7302连接TN IAB-donor-CU 7301,TN mIAB-node-DU 7402继续维持与TN IAB-donor-CU 7101的连接。其中,TN mIAB-node-DU 7402至TN IAB-donor-CU 7101的传输路径需要经过TN IAB-donor-DU 7302。In Figure 7(b), TN miAB-node-MT 7401 switches from TN IAB-donor-CU 7201 to TN IAB-donor-CU 7301, and TN miAB-node-MT 7401 is connected to TN IAB-donor-CU 7301 via TN IAB-donor-DU 7302. TN miAB-node-DU 7402 continues to maintain its connection with TN IAB-donor-CU 7101. The transmission path from TN miAB-node-DU 7402 to TN IAB-donor-CU 7101 requires traversing TN IAB-donor-DU 7302.

在第二种情形中,随着TN mIAB-node节点的移动,TN mIAB-node-DU所连接的TN IAB-donor-CU需要进行切换,而TN mIAB-node-MT所连接的TN IAB-donor-CU不需要进行切换,即TN mIAB-node-MT继续维持与原TN IAB-donor-CU的连接。针对TN mIAB-node-DU的切换,TN mIAB-node节点需要支持同时服务多个逻辑的TN mIAB-node-DU功能,从而最小化切换带来的移动中断时间。此外,由于mIAB的场景通常伴随着UE的切换,但是现有网络中,UE和TN mIAB-node通常一起移动,即UE和TN mIAB-node的相对位置关系未发生改变,因此通常可以考虑采用免接入(RACH-less)切换进一步减少切换开销。In the second scenario, as the TN mIAB-node moves, the TN IAB-donor-CU connected to the TN mIAB-node-DU needs to be switched, while the TN IAB-donor-CU connected to the TN mIAB-node-MT does not need to be switched; that is, the TN mIAB-node-MT continues to maintain its connection with the original TN IAB-donor-CU. For the TN mIAB-node-DU switch, the TN mIAB-node needs to support simultaneous service of multiple logical TN mIAB-node-DU functions to minimize the mobility interruption time caused by the switch. Furthermore, since mIAB scenarios are usually accompanied by UE switchover, but in existing networks, the UE and TN mIAB-node typically move together, meaning their relative positions remain unchanged, RACH-less handover can often be considered to further reduce handover overhead.

例如,如图8所示。在图8的(a)中,TN mIAB-node 840包含TN mIAB-node-MT 8401和TN mIAB-node-DU 8402。TN mIAB-node-MT 8401通过TN IAB-donor-DU 8202连接TN IAB-donor-CU 8201,TN mIAB-node-DU 8402分别连接TN IAB-donor-CU 8101和UE 850。其中,TN mIAB-node-DU 8402至TN IAB-donor-CU 8101的传输路径需要经过TN IAB-donor-DU 8202。然后,UE 850随着TN mIAB-node840的移动而移动。For example, as shown in Figure 8. In Figure 8(a), TN mIAB-node 840 includes TN mIAB-node-MT 8401 and TN mIAB-node-DU 8402. TN mIAB-node-MT 8401 is connected to TN IAB-donor-CU 8201 via TN IAB-donor-DU 8202, and TN mIAB-node-DU 8402 is connected to TN IAB-donor-CU 8101 and UE 850 respectively. The transmission path from TN mIAB-node-DU 8402 to TN IAB-donor-CU 8101 requires passing through TN IAB-donor-DU 8202. Then, UE 850 moves along with TN mIAB-node 840.

在图8的(b)中,TN mIAB-node-DU 8402从TN IAB-donor-CU 8201切换到TN IAB-donor-CU 8301,TN mIAB-node-DU 8403分别连接TN IAB-donor-CU 8301和UE 850,TN mIAB-node-MT 8401继续维持与TN IAB-donor-CU 8101的连接。其中,TN mIAB-node-DU 8403至TN IAB-donor-CU 8301的传输路径需要经过TN IAB-donor-DU 8302。In Figure 8(b), TN miAB-node-DU 8402 switches from TN IAB-donor-CU 8201 to TN IAB-donor-CU 8301. TN miAB-node-DU 8403 connects TN IAB-donor-CU 8301 and UE 850, while TN miAB-node-MT 8401 maintains its connection with TN IAB-donor-CU 8101. The transmission path from TN miAB-node-DU 8403 to TN IAB-donor-CU 8301 requires traversing TN IAB-donor-DU 8302.

下面本实施例对频繁移动网络系统下的移动性管理进行具体说明。The following embodiment provides a detailed description of mobility management in a frequently moving network system.

目前,在TN系统下的移动性管理包括连接态下的小区切换、空闲态/非激活态下的小区重选、注册更新和跟踪区更新等。以地面网络的小区切换为例,小区切换流程主要包含小区切换测量、测量结果上报、切换判决和切换执行等步骤。Currently, mobility management in the TN system includes cell handover in connected mode, cell reselection in idle/inactive mode, registration update, and tracking area update. Taking cell handover in terrestrial networks as an example, the cell handover process mainly includes steps such as cell handover measurement, measurement result reporting, handover decision, and handover execution.

例如,在小区切换测量中,源基站向终端设备下发多个小区(包含服务小区和邻区)对应的测量配置,而终端设备可以根据测量配置对小区信号质量(如参考信号接收功率(Reference Signal Receiving Power,RSRP)和/或参考信号接收质量(Reference Signal Receiving Quality,RSRQ)等)进行测量。在测量结果上报中,终端设备可以将测量结果上报至源基站,上报方式可以为周期性上报或事件触发上报。在切换判决中,源基站可以根据上报结果选择合适的邻区,并交互小区切换相关的上下文信息、准入控制和预留资源等信息。在切换执行中,终端设备从源基站接收切换相关的控制信息,并在目标基站完成接入流程。For example, in cell handover measurement, the source base station sends measurement configurations for multiple cells (including the serving cell and neighboring cells) to the terminal device. The terminal device can then measure the cell signal quality (such as Reference Signal Receiving Power (RSRP) and/or Reference Signal Receiving Quality (RSRQ)) based on these configurations. In measurement result reporting, the terminal device can report the measurement results to the source base station, either periodically or via event-triggered reporting. During handover decision-making, the source base station can select suitable neighboring cells based on the reported results and exchange information related to cell handover context, admission control, and reserved resources. During handover execution, the terminal device receives handover-related control information from the source base station and completes the access procedure at the target base station.

在TN系统下的移动性管理中,通常是因为终端设备的移动而导致需要进行小区切换或小区重选,而用于提供接入功能的节点通常看作是不移动或者移动不频繁。例如,小区切换和小区重选中无需考虑网络设备的移动。In mobility management under a TN system, cell handover or cell reselection is usually required due to the movement of terminal devices, while nodes providing access functions are typically considered to be stationary or move infrequently. For example, cell handover and cell reselection do not require consideration of network device movement.

但是,针对频繁移动网络系统下的移动性管理,由于频繁移动网络系统中的用于提供接入功能的节点会存在频繁移动的特性,而当频繁移动网络系统直接复用TN系统下的移动性管理时,这可能会带来较大的信令开销和移动中断时延等问题,导致切换/重选失败,以及导致移动性管理非常低效。基于此,本实施例需要讨论在频繁移动网络系统下如何进行高效移动性管理。However, for mobility management in frequent mobility network systems, the nodes providing access functions in these systems are prone to frequent movement. Directly reusing mobility management from the TN system can lead to significant signaling overhead and mobility interruption latency, resulting in handover/reselection failures and highly inefficient mobility management. Therefore, this embodiment discusses how to perform efficient mobility management in frequent mobility network systems.

结合上述描述,本实施例的繁移动网络系统包括终端设备、第一类节点、第二类节点和核心网。下面对第一类节点、第二类节点再进行具体说明。Based on the above description, the mobile network system of this embodiment includes terminal equipment, a first type of node, a second type of node, and a core network. The first type of node and the second type of node will be further described in detail below.

第一类节点可以为终端设备和/或第一类节点的子第一类节点提供接入服务。其中,第一类节点可以存在如下情况:1)第一类节点可以支持移动,可以理解为第一类节点的位置可以移动,例如第一类节点为mIAB-node;2)第一类节点可以不支持移动,可以理解为第一类节点的位置是固定的,例如第一类节点为非mIAB-node或者IAB-node或者静止/固定IAB-node(fixed IAB-node);3)第一类节点可以支持NTN,可以理解为,第一类节点位于非地面(空中)或者第二节点属于NTN系统等,例如第一类节点为NTN IAB-node或者NTN mIAB-node;4)第一类节点可以支持TN,可以理解为,第一类节点位于地面/陆地或者第二节点属于TN系统等,例如第一类节点为TN IAB-node或者TN mIAB-node。Type I nodes can provide access services to terminal devices and/or their sub-Type I nodes. Type I nodes can exist in the following ways: 1) Type I nodes can be mobile, meaning their location can be moved, for example, a type I node is a mIAB-node; 2) Type I nodes may not be mobile, meaning their location is fixed, for example, a non-mIAB-node, an IAB-node, or a stationary/fixed IAB-node; 3) Type I nodes can support NTN, meaning they are located outside the ground (air) or the second node belongs to the NTN system, for example, a type I node is an NTN IAB-node or an NTN mIAB-node; 4) Type I nodes can support TN, meaning they are located on the ground or the second node belongs to the TN system, for example, a type I node is a TN IAB-node or a TN mIAB-node.

第二类节点可以连接核心网,可以为第一类节点和/或终端设备提供接入服务。其中,第二类节点可以存在如下情况:1)第二类节点可以支持移动,例如第二类节点为mIAB-donor;2)第二类节点可以不支持移动,例如非mIAB-donor或者IAB-node或者静止/固定IAB-donor;3)第二类节点可以支持NTN,例如第二类节点为NTN IAB-donor或者NTN mIAB-donor;4)第二类节点可以支持TN,例如第二类节点为TN IAB-donor或者TN mIAB-donor。Type II nodes can connect to the core network and provide access services to Type I nodes and/or terminal equipment. Type II nodes can exist in the following ways: 1) Type II nodes can support mobility, for example, a Type II node is a mIAB-donor; 2) Type II nodes may not support mobility, for example, a non-mIAB-donor, an IAB-node, or a stationary/fixed IAB-donor; 3) Type II nodes can support NTN, for example, a Type II node is an NTN IAB-donor or an NTN mIAB-donor; 4) Type II nodes can support TN, for example, a Type II node is a TN IAB-donor or a TN mIAB-donor.

基于此,该频繁移动网络系统下的移动性管理可以包括连接态下的第一类节点所连接的第二类节点的切换、空闲态/非激活态下的第一类节点所驻留的第二类节点的重选。Based on this, mobility management in this frequent mobility network system can include the switching of a second type of node connected to a first type of node in the connected state, and the reselection of a second type of node where a first type of node resides in the idle/inactive state.

下面以频繁移动网络系统为NTN IAB系统或者NTN IAB与TN IAB融合系统为例,对频繁移动网络系统下的移动性管理的四个场景进行示例说明。需要说明的是,在NTN IAB系统或者NTN IAB与TN IAB融合系统中,第一类节点可以包括NTN IAB-node和/或TN IAB-node,第二类节点可以包括NTN IAB-donor或者TN IAB-donor。The following examples, using NTN IAB systems or converged NTN IAB and TN IAB systems as examples, illustrate four scenarios for mobility management in frequent mobility network systems. It should be noted that in NTN IAB systems or converged NTN IAB and TN IAB systems, the first type of node can include NTN IAB-nodes and/or TN IAB-nodes, and the second type of node can include NTN IAB-donor or TN IAB-donor.

在“场景1”中,频繁移动网络系统包括TN IAB-donor、NTN IAB-node、UE和核心网。其中,核心网位于地面;TN IAB-donor连接核心网,可以为NTN IAB-node和/或UE提供接入服务;NTN IAB-node可以为子NTN IAB-node和/或UE提供接入服务。其中,“场景1”的频繁移动网络系统下的移动性管理包括连接态下的NTN IAB-node所连接的TN IAB-donor的切换、空闲态/非激活态下的NTN IAB-node所驻留的TN IAB-donor的重选。In "Scenario 1," the frequent mobility network system includes a TN IAB-donor, an NTN IAB-node, a UE, and a core network. The core network is located on the ground; the TN IAB-donor connects to the core network and provides access services to the NTN IAB-node and/or the UE; the NTN IAB-node can provide access services to its sub-NTN IAB-nodes and/or the UE. Mobility management in "Scenario 1" under the frequent mobility network system includes handover of the TN IAB-donor connected to the NTN IAB-node in connected mode and reselection of the TN IAB-donor where the NTN IAB-node resides in idle/inactive mode.

以连接态下的NTN IAB-node所连接的TN IAB-donor进行切换为例,如图9所示。在图9中,频繁移动网络系统包括核心网910、TN IAB-donor 920、TN IAB-donor 930、NTN IAB-node 940、NTN IAB-node 950、NTN IAB-node 960、UE 970、UE 980和UE 990。其中,核心网910位于地面;TN IAB-donor920连接核心网910,为NTN IAB-node 950提供接入服务;TN IAB-donor 930连接核心网910,为NTN IAB-node 940和UE 970提供接入服务;NTN IAB-node 940为NTN IAB-node 950提供接入服务;NTN IAB-node 950为NTN IAB-node 960、UE 980和UE 990提供接入服务。随着NTN IAB-node 950的移动,NTN IAB-node 950需要从TN IAB-donor 920切换到TN IAB-donor 930。Taking the handover of the TN IAB-donor connected to the NTN IAB-node in connected state as an example, as shown in Figure 9. In Figure 9, the frequent mobility network system includes core network 910, TN IAB-donor 920, TN IAB-donor 930, NTN IAB-node 940, NTN IAB-node 950, NTN IAB-node 960, UE 970, UE 980 and UE 990. The core network 910 is located on the ground; TN IAB-donor 920 connects to core network 910 and provides access services to NTN IAB-node 950; TN IAB-donor 930 connects to core network 910 and provides access services to NTN IAB-node 940 and UE 970; NTN IAB-node 940 provides access services to NTN IAB-node 950; and NTN IAB-node 950 provides access services to NTN IAB-node 960, UE 980, and UE 990. With the movement of NTN IAB-node 950, it needs to switch from TN IAB-donor 920 to TN IAB-donor 930.

在“场景2”中,频繁移动网络系统包括NTN IAB-donor、NTN IAB-node、UE、NTN网关和核心网。其中,核心网位于地面;NTN网关可以连接核心网和NTN IAB-donor;NTN IAB-donor可以为NTN IAB-node和/或UE提供接入服务;NTN IAB-node可以为子NTN IAB-node和/或UE提供接入服务。其中,“场景2”的频繁移动网络系统下的移动性管理包括连接态下的NTN IAB-node所连接的NTN IAB-donor的切换、空闲态/非激活态下的NTN IAB-node所驻留的NTN IAB-donor的重选。In "Scenario 2," the frequent mobility network system includes an NTN IAB-donor, an NTN IAB-node, a UE, an NTN gateway, and a core network. The core network is located on the ground; the NTN gateway connects the core network and the NTN IAB-donor; the NTN IAB-donor provides access services to the NTN IAB-node and/or the UE; and the NTN IAB-node provides access services to its sub-NTN IAB-nodes and/or the UE. Mobility management in "Scenario 2" under the frequent mobility network system includes handover of the NTN IAB-donor connected to the NTN IAB-node in connected mode and reselection of the NTN IAB-donor where the NTN IAB-node resides in idle/inactive mode.

以连接态下的NTN IAB-node所连接的NTN IAB-donor进行切换为例,如图10所示。在图10中,频繁移动网络系统包括核心网1010、NTN网关1020、NTN IAB-donor 1030、NTN IAB-donor 1040、NTN IAB-node 1050、NTN IAB-node 1060、UE 1070和UE 1080。其中,核心网1010位于地面;NTN网关1020连接核心网1010和NTN IAB-donor 1030;NTN IAB-donor 1030为NTN IAB-node 1050提供接入服务;NTN IAB-node 1050为NTN IAB-node 1060、UE 1070和UE 1080提供接入服务。随着NTN IAB-node 1050的移动,NTN IAB-node 1050需要从NTN IAB-donor 1030切换到NTN IAB-donor 1040。Taking the handover of the NTN IAB-donor connected to the NTN IAB-node in connected state as an example, as shown in Figure 10. In Figure 10, the frequent mobility network system includes core network 1010, NTN gateway 1020, NTN IAB-donor 1030, NTN IAB-donor 1040, NTN IAB-node 1050, NTN IAB-node 1060, UE 1070, and UE 1080. Among them, core network 1010 is located on the ground; NTN gateway 1020 connects core network 1010 and NTN IAB-donor 1030; NTN IAB-donor 1030 provides access services to NTN IAB-node 1050; NTN IAB-node 1050 provides access services to NTN IAB-node 1060, UE 1070, and UE 1080. With the relocation of NTN IAB-node 1050, NTN IAB-node 1050 needs to be switched from NTN IAB-donor 1030 to NTN IAB-donor 1040.

在“场景3”中,频繁移动网络系统包括NTN IAB-donor、TN IAB-donor、NTN IAB-node、UE、NTN网关和核心网。其中,核心网位于地面;NTN网关可以连接核心网和NTN IAB-donor;NTN IAB-donor可以为NTN IAB-node和/或UE提供接入服务;TN IAB-donor可以连接核心网,可以为NTN IAB-node和/或UE提供接入服务;NTN IAB-node可以为子NTN IAB-node和/或UE提供接入服务。其中,“场景3”的频繁移动网络系统下的移动性管理包括连接态下的NTN IAB-node所连接的NTN IAB-donor或者TN IAB-donor的切换、空闲态/非激活态下的NTN IAB-node所驻留的NTN IAB-donor或者TN IAB-donor的重选。In "Scenario 3," the frequent mobility network system includes an NTN IAB-donor, a TN IAB-donor, an NTN IAB-node, a UE, an NTN gateway, and a core network. The core network is located on the ground; the NTN gateway can connect to the core network and the NTN IAB-donor; the NTN IAB-donor can provide access services to the NTN IAB-node and/or the UE; the TN IAB-donor can connect to the core network and can provide access services to the NTN IAB-node and/or the UE; the NTN IAB-node can provide access services to its sub-NTN IAB-node and/or the UE. Mobility management in the frequent mobility network system of "Scenario 3" includes the handover of the NTN IAB-donor or TN IAB-donor to which the NTN IAB-node is connected in the connected state, and the reselection of the NTN IAB-donor or TN IAB-donor to which the NTN IAB-node resides in the idle/inactive state.

以连接态下的NTN IAB-node所连接的TN IAB-donor进行切换为例,如图11所示。在图11中,频繁移动网络系统包括核心网1110、NTN网关1120、TN IAB-donor 1130、NTN IAB-donor 1140、NTN IAB-node 1150、NTN IAB-node 1160、UE 1170和UE 1180。其中,核心网1110位于地面;NTN网关1120连接核心网1110和NTN IAB-donor 1140;TN IAB-donor 1130为NTN IAB-node 1150提供接入服务;NTN IAB-node 1150为NTN IAB-node 1160、UE 1170和UE 1180提供接入服务。随着NTN IAB-node1150的移动,NTN IAB-node 1150需要从TN IAB-donor 1130切换到NTN IAB-donor 1140。Taking the handover of the TN IAB-donor connected to the NTN IAB-node in connected state as an example, as shown in Figure 11. In Figure 11, the frequent mobility network system includes core network 1110, NTN gateway 1120, TN IAB-donor 1130, NTN IAB-donor 1140, NTN IAB-node 1150, NTN IAB-node 1160, UE 1170, and UE 1180. Among them, core network 1110 is located on the ground; NTN gateway 1120 connects core network 1110 and NTN IAB-donor 1140; TN IAB-donor 1130 provides access services to NTN IAB-node 1150; NTN IAB-node 1150 provides access services to NTN IAB-node 1160, UE 1170, and UE 1180. With the relocation of NTN IAB-node 1150, NTN IAB-node 1150 needs to be switched from TN IAB-donor 1130 to NTN IAB-donor 1140.

在“场景4”中,频繁移动网络系统包括NTN IAB-donor、TN IAB-donor、NTN IAB-node、TN IAB-node、UE和核心网。其中,核心网位于空中;NTN IAB-donor可以连接核心网,可以为NTN IAB-node和/或UE提供接入服务;TN IAB-donor可以连接核心网,可以为NTN IAB-node和/或UE提供接入服务;NTN IAB-node可以为子TN IAB-node和/或UE提供接入服务。其中,“场景4”的频繁移动网络系统下的移动性管理包括连接态下的NTN IAB-node所连接的NTN IAB-donor的切换、空闲态/非激活态下的NTN IAB-node所驻留的NTN IAB-donor的重选。In "Scenario 4," the frequent mobility network system includes an NTN IAB-donor, a TN IAB-donor, an NTN IAB-node, a TN IAB-node, a UE, and a core network. The core network is located in the air; the NTN IAB-donor can connect to the core network and provide access services to the NTN IAB-node and/or the UE; the TN IAB-donor can connect to the core network and provide access services to the NTN IAB-node and/or the UE; and the NTN IAB-node can provide access services to its sub-TN IAB-node and/or the UE. Mobility management in the frequent mobility network system of "Scenario 4" includes the handover of the NTN IAB-donor to which the NTN IAB-node is connected in the connected state, and the reselection of the NTN IAB-donor to which the NTN IAB-node resides in the idle/inactive state.

以连接态下的NTN IAB-node所连接的NTN IAB-donor进行切换为例,如图12所示。在图12中,频繁移动网络系统包括核心网1210、NTN IAB-donor 1220、NTN IAB-donor 1230、NTN IAB-node 1240、TN IAB-node 1250、UE 1260、UE 1270和UE 1280。其中,核心网1210位于卫星上;NTN IAB-donor1220为NTN IAB-node 1240提供接入服务;NTN IAB-node 1240为TN IAB-node 1250、UE 1270和UE 1280提供接入服务;TN IAB-node 1250为UE 1260提供接入服务。随着NTN IAB-node 1240的移动,NTN IAB-node 1240需要从NTN IAB-donor 1220切换到NTN IAB-donor 1230。Taking the handover of the NTN IAB-donor connected to the NTN IAB-node in connected state as an example, as shown in Figure 12. In Figure 12, the frequent mobility network system includes core network 1210, NTN IAB-donor 1220, NTN IAB-donor 1230, NTN IAB-node 1240, TN IAB-node 1250, UE 1260, UE 1270, and UE 1280. Among them, core network 1210 is located on a satellite; NTN IAB-donor 1220 provides access services to NTN IAB-node 1240; NTN IAB-node 1240 provides access services to TN IAB-node 1250, UE 1270, and UE 1280; and TN IAB-node 1250 provides access services to UE 1260. With the relocation of NTN IAB-node 1240, NTN IAB-node 1240 needs to be switched from NTN IAB-donor 1220 to NTN IAB-donor 1230.

结合上述描述,下面本实施例对频繁移动网络系统中连接态下的第一类节点所连接的第二类节点的切换进行说明。Based on the above description, this embodiment will now explain the handover of the second type of node connected to the first type of node in the connected state in a frequently moving network system.

需要说明的是,由于第一类节点包含第一功能单元和第二功能单元、且第一功能单元和第二功能单元会连接第二类节点,因此第一类节点所连接的第二类节点的切换包括第一功能单元所连接的第二类节点的切换和/或第二功能单元所连接的第二类节点的切换。It should be noted that, since the first type of node includes a first functional unit and a second functional unit, and the first functional unit and the second functional unit are connected to the second type of node, the switching of the second type of node connected to the first type of node includes the switching of the second type of node connected to the first functional unit and/or the switching of the second type of node connected to the second functional unit.

例如,以第一功能单元为IAB-node-MT、第二功能单元为IAB-node-DU、且第二类节点为IAB-donor为例,IAB-node所连接的IAB-donor的切换包括IAB-node-MT所连接的IAB-donor的切换和/或IAB-node-DU所连接的IAB-donor的切换。其中,IAB-node-MT所连接的IAB-donor与IAB-node-DU所连接的IAB-donor可以相同或不相同。例如,如图7或图8所示。For example, taking IAB-node-MT as the first functional unit, IAB-node-DU as the second functional unit, and IAB-donor as the second type of node, the switching of the IAB-donor connected to the IAB-node includes the switching of the IAB-donor connected to IAB-node-MT and/or the switching of the IAB-donor connected to IAB-node-DU. The IAB-donor connected to IAB-node-MT and the IAB-donor connected to IAB-node-DU can be the same or different. For example, as shown in Figure 7 or Figure 8.

为了便于描述,下面本实施例可以将“第一类节点所连接的第二类节点的切换”简称为“第一类节点的接入切换”,“第一功能单元所连接的第二类节点的切换”简称为“第一功能单元的接入切换”,“第二功能单元所连接的第二类节点的切换”简称“第二功能单元的接入切换”。For ease of description, in the following embodiment, "the switching of the second type of node connected to the first type of node" can be abbreviated as "the access switching of the first type of node", "the switching of the second type of node connected to the first functional unit" can be abbreviated as "the access switching of the first functional unit", and "the switching of the second type of node connected to the second functional unit" can be abbreviated as "the access switching of the second functional unit".

由于第一类节点的接入切换过程需要执行切换流程、且该切换流程包含小区切换测量、测量结果上报、切换判决和切换执行等步骤,而每个步骤都存在信令开销、资源开销和时间耗费等,因此当第一功能单元的接入切换与第二功能单元的接入切换各自执行一套切换流程时,这会导致信令开销大、资源开销大和时间耗费长等问题,且时间耗费长会导致移动中断时间长。同时,由于频繁移动网络系统中可能第一类节点可能会频繁移动,因此第一功能单元和第二功能单元可能会频繁进行接入切换,而各自执行一套切换流程也会导致切换效率低等问题。Because the access handover process for Type I nodes requires the execution of a handover procedure, which includes steps such as cell handover measurement, measurement result reporting, handover decision, and handover execution, and each step incurs signaling overhead, resource overhead, and time consumption, when the access handover of the first functional unit and the access handover of the second functional unit each execute their own handover procedure, this leads to problems such as high signaling overhead, high resource overhead, and long time consumption. The long time consumption also results in prolonged mobility interruption. Furthermore, since Type I nodes may move frequently in a frequently mobile network system, the first and second functional units may frequently perform access handovers, and executing their own handover procedures will also lead to low handover efficiency.

基于此,针对第一类节点的接入切换过程,本实施例考虑第一类节点的第一功能单元和第二功能单元连接同一个第二类节点、且第一类节点的第一功能单元和第二功能单元需要切换到同一个第二类节点。Based on this, for the access switching process of the first type of node, this embodiment considers that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first type of node are connected to the same second type of node, and the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first type of node need to switch to the same second type of node.

例如,以第一功能单元为IAB-node-MT、第二功能单元为IAB-node-DU、且第二类节点为IAB-donor为例,连接态下的IAB-node的IAB-node-MT和IAB-node-DU同时连接第一IAB-donor、且IAB-node-MT和IAB-node-DU需要切换到第二IAB-donor。For example, taking the first functional unit as IAB-node-MT, the second functional unit as IAB-node-DU, and the second type of node as IAB-donor, in the connected state, IAB-node-MT and IAB-node-DU of the IAB-node are simultaneously connected to the first IAB-donor, and IAB-node-MT and IAB-node-DU need to switch to the second IAB-donor.

可见,由于第一功能单元和第二功能单元连接同一个第二类节点、且第一功能单元和第二功能单元需要切换到同一个第二类节点,因此第一功能单元的接入切换和第二功能单元的接入切换可以一起执行同一套切换流程,从而有利于减少信令开销、降低资源开销、缩短移动中断时间以及提高切换效率,实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, since the first functional unit and the second functional unit are connected to the same second type node, and the first functional unit and the second functional unit need to switch to the same second type node, the access handover of the first functional unit and the access handover of the second functional unit can be performed together using the same handover process. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, reduce resource overhead, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thereby achieving efficient mobility management.

下面本实施例以第一类节点包括第一节点、第二类节点包括第二节点和第三节点、且第一节点的第一功能单元和第二功能单元需要从第二节点切换到第三节点为例,对第一功能单元的接入切换和第二功能单元的接入切换所执行的切换流程进行具体说明。结合上述描述,下面再对第一节点、第二节点和第三节点进行说明。The following embodiment uses an example where a first type of node includes a first node, a second type of node includes a second node and a third node, and the first and second functional units of the first node need to switch from the second node to the third node. This example will specifically illustrate the switching process executed for the access switching of the first functional unit and the access switching of the second functional unit. Based on the above description, the first node, the second node, and the third node will be further explained below.

第一节点可以用于提供回传接入功能,可以为子节点和/或终端设备提供接入服务。其中,第一节点可以存在如下情况:1)第一节点可以支持移动,例如第一节点为mIAB-node;2)第一节点可以不支持移动,例如第一节点为非mIAB-node或者IAB-node或者静止/固定IAB-node;3)第一节点可以支持NTN,例如第一节点为NTN IAB-node或者NTN mIAB-node;4)第一节点可以支持TN,例如第一节点为TN IAB-node或者TN mIAB-node。The first node can be used to provide backhaul access functionality, providing access services to child nodes and/or terminal devices. The first node can be in the following states: 1) The first node can support mobility, for example, the first node is a mIAB-node; 2) The first node may not support mobility, for example, the first node is a non-mIAB-node, an IAB-node, or a stationary/fixed IAB-node; 3) The first node can support NTN, for example, the first node is an NTN IAB-node or an NTN mIAB-node; 4) The first node can support TN, for example, the first node is a TN IAB-node or a TN mIAB-node.

第二节点可以连接核心网,可以为第一类节点和/或终端设备提供接入服务。其中,第二节点可以存在如下情况:1)第二节点可以支持移动,例如第二节点为mIAB-donor;2)第二节点可以不支持移动,例如非mIAB-donor或者IAB-donor或者静止/固定IAB-donor;3)第二节点可以支持NTN,例如第二节点为NTN IAB-donor或者NTN mIAB-donor;4)第二节点可以支持TN,例如第二节点为TN IAB-donor或者TN mIAB-donor。The second node can connect to the core network and provide access services to the first type of nodes and/or terminal equipment. The second node can be in the following situations: 1) The second node can support mobility, for example, the second node is a mIAB-donor; 2) The second node may not support mobility, for example, it can be a non-mIAB-donor, an IAB-donor, or a stationary/fixed IAB-donor; 3) The second node can support NTN, for example, the second node is an NTN IAB-donor or an NTN mIAB-donor; 4) The second node can support TN, for example, the second node is a TN IAB-donor or a TN mIAB-donor.

第三节点可以连接核心网,可以为第一类节点和/或终端设备提供接入服务。其中,第三节点可以存在如下情况:1)第三节点可以支持移动,例如第三节点为mIAB-donor;2)第三节点可以不支持移动,例如非mIAB-donor或者IAB-donor或者静止/固定IAB-donor;3)第三节点可以支持NTN,例如第三节点为NTN IAB-donor或者NTN mIAB-donor;4)第三节点可以支持TN,例如第三节点为TN IAB-donor或者TN mIAB-donor。The third node can connect to the core network and provide access services to Type 1 nodes and/or terminal equipment. The third node can exist in the following ways: 1) The third node can support mobility, for example, the third node is a mIAB-donor; 2) The third node may not support mobility, for example, it can be a non-mIAB-donor, an IAB-donor, or a stationary/fixed IAB-donor; 3) The third node can support NTN, for example, the third node is an NTN IAB-donor or an NTN mIAB-donor; 4) The third node can support TN, for example, the third node is a TN IAB-donor or a TN mIAB-donor.

如图13所示,图13为本申请实施例的一种频繁移动网络系统下的接入切换方法的流程示意图。其中,图13包括如下步骤:As shown in Figure 13, Figure 13 is a flowchart illustrating an access handover method in a frequent mobility network system according to an embodiment of this application. Figure 13 includes the following steps:

S1301.第二节点向第三节点发送切换请求信息。S1301. The second node sends a handover request to the third node.

对应的,第三节点接收切换请求信息。Correspondingly, the third node receives the handover request information.

其中,切换请求信息可以用于请求将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。The switching request information can be used to request the switching of the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node.

可见,由于第二节点为第一节点提供接入服务,因此第二节点可以判决是否需要对第一节点进行接入切换。例如,第二节点可以根据第一节点上报的测量报告等来进行切换决策。当第二节点决策需要将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点时,第二节点可以通过切换请求信息向第三节点请求将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,以便第三节点执行切换准入控制。As can be seen, since the second node provides access services to the first node, it can determine whether an access handover to the first node is necessary. For example, the second node can make a handover decision based on measurement reports reported by the first node. When the second node decides that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to be switched from the second node to the third node, the second node can request the third node to switch the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node through a handover request message, so that the third node can perform handover admission control.

可选的,切换请求信息包括第一标识信息和第二标识信息,第一标识信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元的标识,第二标识信息用于指示第一节点的第二功能单元的标识。Optionally, the switching request information includes first identification information and second identification information. The first identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the first node, and the second identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the second functional unit of the first node.

这样,通过第一标识信息和第二标识信息实现指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元,以便第三节点确认是对第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行切换请求。In this way, the first identification information and the second identification information are used to indicate the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node, so that the third node can confirm that the switching request is for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node.

可选的,切换请求信息还包括以下至少一项:第三标识信息、第一上下文信息、第四标识信息、或者第二上下文信息。Optionally, the switching request information may also include at least one of the following: third identification information, first context information, fourth identification information, or second context information.

其中,第三标识信息用于指示第一节点所服务的终端设备的标识,第一上下文信息用于指示第一节点所服务的终端设备的上下文,第四标识信息用于指示第一节点所服务的子节点的第一功能单元的标识和第一节点所服务的子节点的第二功能单元的标识,第二上下文信息用于指示第一节点所服务的子节点的上下文。The third identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the terminal device served by the first node, the first context information is used to indicate the context of the terminal device served by the first node, the fourth identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the sub-node served by the first node and the identifier of the second functional unit of the sub-node served by the first node, and the second context information is used to indicate the context of the sub-node served by the first node.

需要说明的是,若第一节点所服务的终端设备请求从第二节点切换到第三节点,则切换请求信息包括第三标识信息和/或第一上下文信息。这样,通过第三标识信息和/或第一上下文信息实现将该终端设备请求从第二节点切换到第三节点的信息告诉给第三节点,以便第三节点执行相关的切入准入控制。It should be noted that if a terminal device served by the first node requests to switch from the second node to the third node, the switch request information includes third identification information and/or first context information. In this way, the third identification information and/or first context information inform the third node of the terminal device's request to switch from the second node to the third node, so that the third node can perform the relevant access control.

若第一节点所服务的子节点请求从第二节点切换到第三节点,则切换请求信息包括第四标识信息和/或第二上下文信息。这样,通过第四标识信息和/或第二上下文信息实现将该子节点请求从第二节点切换到第三节点的信息告诉给第三节点,以便第三节点执行相关的切入准入控制。If a child node served by the first node requests to switch from the second node to the third node, the switch request information includes fourth identification information and/or second context information. In this way, the fourth identification information and/or second context information inform the third node of the child node's request to switch from the second node to the third node, so that the third node can perform the relevant admission control.

S1302.第三节点发送切换响应信息。S1302. The third node sends a handover response message.

对应的,第二节点接收切换响应信息。Correspondingly, the second node receives the handover response information.

其中,切换响应信息用于指示准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。The switching response information is used to indicate that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node are permitted to switch from the second node to the third node.

需要说明的是,在第三节点接收到切换请求信息之后,第三节点会执行切换准入控制,以决定准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,并通过切换响应信息告诉给第二节点准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。It should be noted that after the third node receives the handover request information, the third node will perform handover admission control to decide whether to allow the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node, and inform the second node through the handover response information to allow the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node.

可选的,切换响应信息包括以下至少一项:第一信息、第二信息、第三信息、第四信息、第五信息、或者第六信息。Optionally, the switching response information may include at least one of the following: first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information.

其中,第一信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元切换到第三节点所需的回传适配协议(backhaul adaptation protocol,BAP)地址;第二信息用于配置第二节点到第三节点的传输路径;第三信息用于配置在第二节点到第三节点的传输路径上的资源;第四信息用于配置回程无线电链路控制(Backhaul Radio Link Control,BH-RLC);第五信息用于配置F1应用协议(F1-Application Protocol,F1-AP);第六信息用于配置第一节点的第二功能单元。The first information is used to configure the backhaul adaptation protocol (BAP) address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the fourth information is used to configure the backhaul radio link control (BH-RLC); the fifth information is used to configure the F1 application protocol (F1-AP); and the sixth information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.

可见,在第三节点执行切换准入控制中,为了保证第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,第三节点需要预留第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行接入切换所需要的BAP地址、第二节点到第三节点的传输路径、传输路径上的资源、BH-RLC配置、F1-AP配置、或者第一节点的第二功能单元配置等信息中的至少一项,以便第一节点可以根据这些信息进行接入切换,保证接入切换成功。As can be seen, in order to ensure that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node switch from the second node to the third node, the third node needs to reserve at least one of the following information for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform access handover: BAP address, transmission path from the second node to the third node, resources on the transmission path, BH-RLC configuration, F1-AP configuration, or configuration of the second functional unit of the first node. This information is used by the first node to perform access handover and ensure successful access handover.

可选的,第六信息包括以下至少一项:物理小区标识(Physical Cell Identifier,PCI)列表、资源配置信息、跟踪区标识(Tracking Area Identity,TAI)配置信息、或者跟踪区代码(Tracking Area Code,TAC)配置信息。Optionally, the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: a list of Physical Cell Identifiers (PCIs), resource configuration information, Tracking Area Identifier (TAI) configuration information, or Tracking Area Code (TAC) configuration information.

可见,第三节点在执行切换准入控制中需要为第一节点的第二功能单元配置PCI列表、资源、TAI或者TAC等中的至少一项,从而保证第一节点执行接入切换成功。It is evident that the third node needs to configure at least one of the following for the second functional unit of the first node during the handover admission control process: PCI list, resources, TAI, or TAC, in order to ensure that the first node can successfully perform the access handover.

可选的,切换响应信息还包括第一节点所服务的终端设备和/或子节点切换所需的随机接入信息。例如,随机接入信息可以包括小区特定无线网络临时标识(Cell-specific Radio Network Temporary Identifier,C-RNTI)、前导码(Preamble)、随机接入信道时机(Random Access Channel Occasion,RO)、随机接入时频资源。Optionally, the handover response information may also include random access information required for the handover of the terminal equipment and/or sub-nodes served by the first node. For example, random access information may include a cell-specific radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI), a preamble, a random access channel occurrence (RO), and random access time-frequency resources.

可见,若第一节点所服务的终端设备和/或子节点请求从第二节点切换到第三节点,则第三节点在执行切换准入控制中需要配置该终端设备和/或子节点执行切换所需的随机接入信息,以便该终端设备和/或子节点根据随机接入信息进行随机接入以完成接入切换。As can be seen, if a terminal device and/or sub-node served by the first node requests to switch from the second node to the third node, the third node needs to configure the random access information required for the terminal device and/or sub-node to perform the handover during the handover admission control process, so that the terminal device and/or sub-node can perform random access based on the random access information to complete the access handover.

S1303.第二节点向第一节点发送切换信息。S1303. The second node sends a handover message to the first node.

对应的,第一节点接收切换信息。Correspondingly, the first node receives the switching information.

其中,切换信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。The switching information is used to instruct the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node.

需要说明的是,在第二节点获知第三节点准许第一节点执行接入切换之后,第二节点可以通过切换信息告知第一节点需要执行接入切换,并开始执行将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。It should be noted that after the second node learns that the third node has permitted the first node to perform an access handover, the second node can inform the first node through the handover information that an access handover needs to be performed, and begin to switch the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node.

可选的,切换信息包括以下至少一项:第一信息、第二信息、第三信息、第四信息、第五信息、或者第六信息。Optionally, the switching information may include at least one of the following: first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information.

其中,第一信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元切换到第三节点所需的BAP地址;第二信息用于配置第二节点到第三节点的传输路径;第三信息用于配置在第二节点到第三节点的传输路径上的资源;第四信息用于配置BH-RLC;第五信息用于配置F1-AP;第六信息用于配置第一节点的第二功能单元。The first information is used to configure the BAP address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the fourth information is used to configure BH-RLC; the fifth information is used to configure F1-AP; and the sixth information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.

可见,第二节点会将第三节点所预留的第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行接入切换所需要的BAP地址、第二节点到第三节点的传输路径、传输路径上的资源、BH-RLC配置、F1-AP配置、或者第一节点的第二功能单元配置等信息中的至少一项告知给第一节点,以便第一节点可以根据这些信息进行接入切换,保证接入切换成功。As can be seen, the second node will inform the first node of at least one of the following information: the BAP address reserved by the third node for the first functional unit of the first node and the second functional unit of the first node for access switching, the transmission path from the second node to the third node, the resources on the transmission path, the BH-RLC configuration, the F1-AP configuration, or the configuration of the second functional unit of the first node, so that the first node can perform access switching based on this information and ensure successful access switching.

可选的,第六信息包括以下至少一项:PCI列表、资源配置信息、TAI配置信息、或者TAC配置信息。Optionally, the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: PCI list, resource configuration information, TAI configuration information, or TAC configuration information.

可见,第二节点会将第三节点所配置的PCI列表、资源、TAI或者TAC等中的至少一项告知给第一节点,从而保证第一节点接入切换成功。As can be seen, the second node will inform the first node of at least one of the PCI list, resources, TAI or TAC configured by the third node, thereby ensuring that the first node's access handover is successful.

可选的,切换信息由RRC信令(如RRC重配置请求消息)携带。这样,第二节点通过RRC信令告诉第一接入执行接入切换。Optionally, the handover information is carried by RRC signaling (such as an RRC reconfiguration request message). In this way, the second node informs the first access node to perform an access handover via RRC signaling.

S1304.第一节点根据切换信息将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。S1304. The first node switches its first functional unit and second functional unit from the second node to the third node according to the switching information.

需要说明的是,在第一节点执行接入切换的过程中,第一节点需要完成与第三节点的上下行同步等。It should be noted that during the access handover process, the first node needs to complete uplink and downlink synchronization with the third node.

下面对本实施例在上述图13所示的切换流程的基础上对频繁移动网络系统下的接入切换的一种可能完整流程进行示例说明。The following example illustrates a possible complete process for access handover in a frequently mobile network system, based on the handover process shown in Figure 13 above.

如图14所示,图14为本实施例提供的又一种频繁移动网络系统下的接入切换方法的流程示意图。As shown in Figure 14, Figure 14 is a flowchart illustrating another access handover method in a frequently mobile network system provided in this embodiment.

其中,图14包括如下步骤:Figure 14 includes the following steps:

S1401.第二节点向第一节点发送测量配置信息。S1401. The second node sends measurement configuration information to the first node.

对应的,第一节点接收测量配置信息。Correspondingly, the first node receives the measurement configuration information.

需要说明的是,第二节点可以向第一节点发送多个第二类节点(包含第三节点)对应的测量配置信息。其中,测量配置信息可以用于配置层1(L1)和/或层3(L3)测量,可以包含测量频点、同步信号块测量定时配置(SSB Measurement Timing Configuration,SMTC)、测量上报触发条件(如周期性、非周期性、事件触发)、测量对象(如位置、信号质量)等。另外,测量配置信息可以由RRC信令携带。然后,第一节点可以根据测量配置信息对信号质量(如RSRP和/或RSRQ等)进行测量以得到信号质量结果。其中,测量信号可以为下行同步信号SSB(如小区定义SSB,(cell defining SSB,CD-SSB)或者信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS)等。It should be noted that the second node can send measurement configuration information corresponding to multiple second-type nodes (including the third node) to the first node. This measurement configuration information can be used to configure Layer 1 (L1) and/or Layer 3 (L3) measurements, and may include measurement frequency points, synchronization signal block measurement timing configuration (SMTC), measurement reporting trigger conditions (e.g., periodic, non-periodic, event-triggered), and measurement objects (e.g., location, signal quality). Furthermore, the measurement configuration information can be carried by RRC signaling. Then, the first node can measure signal quality (e.g., RSRP and/or RSRQ) according to the measurement configuration information to obtain signal quality results. The measurement signal can be a downlink synchronization signal SSB (e.g., cell defining SSB, CD-SSB) or a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), etc.

S1402.第一节点向第二节点发送测量报告。S1402. The first node sends a measurement report to the second node.

对应的,第二节点接收测量报告。Correspondingly, the second node receives the measurement report.

需要说明的是,第一节点可以将测量结果上报给第二节点。其中,测量报告可以包括第一节点的位置相关信息(如全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GNSS)位置或者波位标识(ID)、卫星星历等)和信号质量结果等。另外,上报方式可以为周期性上报或事件触发上报。在事件触发上报中,上报条件可以为第二节点的信号质量小于第一预设门限和/或第三节点的信号质量大于第二预设门限。It should be noted that the first node can report measurement results to the second node. The measurement report may include the first node's location-related information (such as its Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) position or position ID, satellite ephemeris, etc.) and signal quality results. Furthermore, the reporting method can be periodic reporting or event-triggered reporting. In event-triggered reporting, the reporting condition can be that the second node's signal quality is less than a first preset threshold and/or the third node's signal quality is greater than a second preset threshold.

S1403.第二节点根据测量报告确定第一节点对应的切换判决。S1403. The second node determines the switching decision corresponding to the first node based on the measurement report.

需要说明的是,第二节点根据测量报告确定第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点的切换判决。It should be noted that the second node determines the switching decision for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node based on the measurement report.

S1404.第二节点向第三节点发送切换请求信息。S1404. The second node sends a handover request to the third node.

对应的,第三节点接收切换请求信息。Correspondingly, the third node receives the handover request information.

其中,切换请求信息可以用于请求将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。The switching request information can be used to request the switching of the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node.

需要说明的是,在第二节点做出切换判决之后,第二节点可以向第三节点请求将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。It should be noted that after the second node makes a switching decision, the second node can request the third node to switch the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node.

可选的,切换请求信息包括第一标识信息和第二标识信息,第一标识信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元的标识,第二标识信息用于指示第一节点的第二功能单元的标识。Optionally, the switching request information includes first identification information and second identification information. The first identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the first node, and the second identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the second functional unit of the first node.

这样,通过第一标识信息和第二标识信息实现指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元,以便第三节点确认是对第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行切换请求。In this way, the first identification information and the second identification information are used to indicate the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node, so that the third node can confirm that the switching request is for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node.

可选的,切换请求信息还包括以下至少一项:第三标识信息、第一上下文信息、第四标识信息、或者第二上下文信息。其中,第三标识信息用于指示第一节点所服务的终端设备的标识,第一上下文信息用于指示第一节点所服务的终端设备的上下文,第四标识信息用于指示第一节点所服务的子节点的第一功能单元的标识和第一节点所服务的子节点的第二功能单元的标识,第二上下文信息用于指示第一节点所服务的子节点的上下文。Optionally, the handover request information may further include at least one of the following: third identification information, first context information, fourth identification information, or second context information. Wherein, the third identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the terminal device served by the first node, the first context information is used to indicate the context of the terminal device served by the first node, the fourth identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the child node served by the first node and the identifier of the second functional unit of the child node served by the first node, and the second context information is used to indicate the context of the child node served by the first node.

需要说明的是,若第一节点所服务的终端设备请求从第二节点切换到第三节点,则切换请求信息包括第三标识信息和/或第一上下文信息。这样,通过第三标识信息和/或第一上下文信息实现将该终端设备请求从第二节点切换到第三节点的信息告诉给第三节点。It should be noted that if a terminal device served by the first node requests to switch from the second node to the third node, the switch request information includes third identification information and/or first context information. In this way, the third identification information and/or first context information are used to inform the third node of the terminal device's request to switch from the second node to the third node.

若第一节点所服务的子节点请求从第二节点切换到第三节点,则切换请求信息包括第四标识信息和/或第二上下文信息。这样,通过第四标识信息和/或第二上下文信息实现将该子节点请求从第二节点切换到第三节点的信息告诉给第三节点。If a child node served by the first node requests to switch from the second node to the third node, the switch request information includes fourth identification information and/or second context information. In this way, the fourth identification information and/or second context information are used to inform the third node of the child node's request to switch from the second node to the third node.

S1405.第三节点发送切换响应信息。S1405. The third node sends a handover response message.

对应的,第二节点接收切换响应信息。Correspondingly, the second node receives the handover response information.

其中,切换响应信息用于指示准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。The switching response information is used to indicate that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node are permitted to switch from the second node to the third node.

需要说明的是,在第三节点接收到切换请求信息之后,第三节点会执行切换准入控制,以决定准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,并通过切换响应信息告诉给第二节点。It should be noted that after the third node receives the handover request information, the third node will perform handover admission control to determine whether the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node are allowed to switch from the second node to the third node, and inform the second node through the handover response information.

可选的,切换响应信息包括以下至少一项:第一信息、第二信息、第三信息、第四信息、第五信息、或者第六信息;第一信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元切换到第三节点所需的BAP;第二信息用于配置第二节点到第三节点的传输路径;第三信息用于配置在第二节点到第三节点的传输路径上的资源;第四信息用于配置BH-RLC;第五信息用于配置F1-AP;第六信息用于配置第一节点的第二功能单元。Optionally, the handover response information includes at least one of the following: first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information; the first information is used to configure the BAP required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the fourth information is used to configure BH-RLC; the fifth information is used to configure F1-AP; and the sixth information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.

可见,在第三节点执行切换准入控制中,为了保证第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,第三节点需要预留第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行接入切换所需要的BAP地址、第二节点到第三节点的传输路径、传输路径上的资源、BH-RLC配置、F1-AP配置、或者第一节点的第二功能单元配置等信息中的之一项,以便第一节点可以根据这些信息进行接入切换,保证接入切换成功。As can be seen, in order to ensure that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node switch from the second node to the third node during the handover admission control process at the third node, the third node needs to reserve one of the following information for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform the access handover: BAP address, transmission path from the second node to the third node, resources on the transmission path, BH-RLC configuration, F1-AP configuration, or configuration of the second functional unit of the first node. This information is used by the first node to perform the access handover and ensure that the access handover is successful.

可选的,第六信息包括以下至少一项:PCI列表、资源配置信息、TAI配置信息、或者TAC配置信息。Optionally, the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: PCI list, resource configuration information, TAI configuration information, or TAC configuration information.

可见,第三节点在执行切换准入控制中需要为第一节点的第二功能单元配置PCI列表、资源、TAI或者TAC等中的至少一项,从而保证第一节点接入切换成功。It is evident that the third node needs to configure at least one of the following for the second functional unit of the first node during the handover admission control process: PCI list, resources, TAI, or TAC, in order to ensure that the first node can successfully access the handover.

可选的,切换响应信息还包括第一节点所服务的终端设备和/或子节点切换所需的随机接入信息。例如,随机接入信息可以包括C-RNTI、前导码、RO、随机接入时频资源。Optionally, the handover response information may also include random access information required for the handover of the terminal devices and/or sub-nodes served by the first node. For example, random access information may include C-RNTI, preamble, RO, and random access time-frequency resources.

可见,若第一节点所服务的终端设备和/或子节点请求从第二节点切换到第三节点,则第三节点在执行切换准入控制中需要配置该终端设备和/或子节点执行切换所需的随机接入信息,以便该终端设备和/或子节点根据随机接入信息进行随机接入以完成接入切换。As can be seen, if a terminal device and/or sub-node served by the first node requests to switch from the second node to the third node, the third node needs to configure the random access information required for the terminal device and/or sub-node to perform the handover during the handover admission control process, so that the terminal device and/or sub-node can perform random access based on the random access information to complete the access handover.

S1406.第二节点向第一节点发送切换信息。S1406. The second node sends a handover message to the first node.

对应的,第一节点接收切换信息。Correspondingly, the first node receives the switching information.

其中,切换信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。The switching information is used to instruct the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node.

需要说明的是,在第二节点获知第三节点准许第一节点执行接入切换之后,第二节点可以通过切换信息告知第一节点需要执行接入切换,并开始执行将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。It should be noted that after the second node learns that the third node has permitted the first node to perform an access handover, the second node can inform the first node through the handover information that an access handover needs to be performed, and begin to switch the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node.

可选的,切换信息包括以下至少一项:第一信息、第二信息、第三信息、第四信息、第五信息、或者第六信息;第一信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元切换到第三节点所需的BAP地址;第二信息用于配置第二节点到第三节点的传输路径;第三信息用于配置在第二节点到第三节点的传输路径上的资源;第四信息用于配置BH-RLC;第五信息用于配置F1-AP;第六信息用于配置第一节点的第二功能单元。Optionally, the switching information includes at least one of the following: first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information; the first information is used to configure the BAP address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the fourth information is used to configure BH-RLC; the fifth information is used to configure F1-AP; and the sixth information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.

可见,第二节点会将第三节点所预留的第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行接入切换所需要的BAP地址、第二节点到第三节点的传输路径、传输路径上的资源、BH-RLC配置、F1-AP配置、或者第一节点的第二功能单元配置等信息中的之一项告知给第一节点,以便第一节点可以根据这些信息进行接入切换,保证接入切换成功。As can be seen, the second node will inform the first node of one of the following information: the BAP address reserved by the third node for the first functional unit of the first node and the second functional unit of the first node for access switching; the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the resources on the transmission path; the BH-RLC configuration; the F1-AP configuration; or the configuration of the second functional unit of the first node. This information will enable the first node to perform access switching and ensure successful access switching.

可选的,第六信息包括以下至少一项:PCI列表、资源配置信息、TAI配置信息、或者TAC配置信息。Optionally, the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: PCI list, resource configuration information, TAI configuration information, or TAC configuration information.

可见,第二节点会将第三节点所配置的PCI列表、资源、TAI或者TAC等中的至少一项告知给第一节点,从而保证第一节点接入切换成功。As can be seen, the second node will inform the first node of at least one of the PCI list, resources, TAI or TAC configured by the third node, thereby ensuring that the first node's access handover is successful.

可选的,切换信息由RRC信令(如RRC重配置请求消息)携带。这样,第二节点通过RRC信令告诉第一接入执行接入切换。Optionally, the handover information is carried by RRC signaling (such as an RRC reconfiguration request message). In this way, the second node informs the first access node to perform an access handover via RRC signaling.

S1407.第一节点根据切换信息将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。S1407. The first node switches its first functional unit and second functional unit from the second node to the third node according to the switching information.

需要说明的是,在第一节点执行接入切换的过程中,第一节点需要完成与第三节点的上下行同步。It should be noted that during the access handover process, the first node needs to complete uplink and downlink synchronization with the third node.

S1408.第二节点向第三节点发送上下文信息。S1408. The second node sends context information to the third node.

对应的,第三节点接收上下文信息。Correspondingly, the third node receives the context information.

其中,上下文信息包括第一节点的上下文信息。The context information includes the context information of the first node.

可选的,上下文信息还包括第一节点所服务的终端设备和/或子节点的上下文信息。Optionally, the context information may also include the context information of the terminal devices and/or child nodes served by the first node.

S1409.第三节点向第二节点发送用户数据。S1409. The third node sends user data to the second node.

对应的,第二节点接收用户数据。其中,用户数据可以是第一节点的用户数据。Correspondingly, the second node receives user data. This user data can be the same as the user data from the first node.

S1410.第一节点向第三节点发送切换完成信息。S1410. The first node sends a handover completion message to the third node.

对应的,第三节点接收切换完成信息。Correspondingly, the third node receives the handover completion information.

其中,切换完成信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元已完成从第二节点切换到第三节点。The switching completion information indicates that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node have completed the switching from the second node to the third node.

S1411.第三节点向第二节点发送切换成功响应信息。S1411. The third node sends a handover success response message to the second node.

对应的,第二节点接收切换成功响应信息。Correspondingly, the second node receives a successful handover response message.

其中,切换成功响应信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元已完成从第二节点切换到第三节点。The successful switchover response information indicates that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node have completed the switchover from the second node to the third node.

S1412.第二节点给核心网设备发送路径切换请求信息。S1412. The second node sends a path switching request to the core network equipment.

其中,路径切换请求信息用于请求切换路径。The path switching request information is used to request a path switching.

需要说明的是,核心网设备可以包括AMF和/或UPF。It should be noted that core network equipment may include AMF and/or UPF.

S1413.核心网设备根据路径切换请求信息执行路径切换决策。S1413. The core network equipment executes a path switching decision based on the path switching request information.

这样,用户数据由核心网设备从新的路径传输到第三节点。In this way, user data is transmitted from the core network equipment to the third node via a new path.

S1414.核心网设备向第三节点发送路径切换响应信息。S1414. The core network equipment sends path switching response information to the third node.

对应的,第三节点接收路径切换响应信息。Correspondingly, the third node receives the path switching response information.

其中,路径切换响应信息用于指示路径切换完成。The path switching response information is used to indicate that the path switching is complete.

S1415.第三节点向第二节点发送上下文释放信息。S1415. The third node sends a context release message to the second node.

对应的,第二节点接收上下文释放信息。Correspondingly, the second node receives the context release information.

其中,上下文释放信息用于指示第二节点释放第一节点的上下文信息。The context release information is used to instruct the second node to release the context information of the first node.

下面对第一节点所服务的终端设备或者子节点的接入切换进行示例说明。The following example illustrates the access switching of the terminal devices or sub-nodes served by the first node.

在一些可能的示例中,在上述图13或图14的基础上,当涉及到第一节点所服务的终端设备或者子节点的接入切换时,若第一节点所服务的终端设备或者子节点不随着第一节点的移动而移动、且第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,则第二节点可以触发第一节点所服务的终端设备或者子节点从第二节点切换到第四节点,第四节点不同于第三节点、且第四节点用于提供核心网连接功能或者第四节点用于提供回传接入功能。例如,第四节点为IAB-node或者IAB-donor。In some possible examples, based on Figure 13 or Figure 14 above, when it involves the access handover of terminal devices or sub-nodes served by the first node, if the terminal devices or sub-nodes served by the first node do not move with the first node, and the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node switch from the second node to the third node, then the second node can trigger the terminal devices or sub-nodes served by the first node to switch from the second node to the fourth node. The fourth node is different from the third node, and the fourth node is used to provide core network connectivity or to provide backhaul access. For example, the fourth node is an IAB-node or an IAB-donor.

另外,第一节点所服务的终端设备或者子节点的接入切换方式可以采用传统的L3切换、L1/L2触发移动(L1/L2 triggered mobility,LTM)切换、条件切换(conditional handover,CHO)或者以上方式的组合等,对此不再赘述。In addition, the access handover method for the terminal devices or sub-nodes served by the first node can be the traditional L3 handover, L1/L2 triggered mobility (LTM) handover, conditional handover (CHO) or a combination of the above methods, which will not be elaborated further.

例如,以终端设备为UE为例,如图15所示。在图15的(a)中,mIAB-node 1540包含mIAB-node-MT 1541和mIAB-node-DU 1542。mIAB-node-MT 1541通过IAB-donor-DU 1512连接IAB-donor-CU 1511,mIAB-node-DU 1542分别连接IAB-donor-CU 1511和UE 1560。IAB-node 1550包含IAB-node-MT 1551和IAB-node-DU 1552。IAB-node-MT 1551连接IAB-donor-DU 1532,IAB-node-DU 1552连接IAB-donor-CU 1531,IAB-donor-CU 1531连接IAB-donor-DU 1532。For example, taking the UE as the terminal device, as shown in Figure 15. In Figure 15(a), mIAB-node 1540 includes mIAB-node-MT 1541 and mIAB-node-DU 1542. mIAB-node-MT 1541 is connected to IAB-donor-CU 1511 through IAB-donor-DU 1512, and mIAB-node-DU 1542 is connected to IAB-donor-CU 1511 and UE 1560 respectively. IAB-node 1550 includes IAB-node-MT 1551 and IAB-node-DU 1552. IAB-node-MT 1551 is connected to IAB-donor-DU 1532, IAB-node-DU 1552 is connected to IAB-donor-CU 1531, and IAB-donor-CU 1531 is connected to IAB-donor-DU 1532.

在图15的(b)中,随着mIAB-node 1540的移动,由于UE 1560不会随着mIAB-node 1540的移动而移动,因此IAB-donor-CU 1511会触发UE 1560从IAB-donor-CU 1511切换到IAB-donor-CU 1531,或者IAB-donor-CU 1511会触发UE 1560从mIAB-node 1540切换到IAB-node 1550,且UE 1560连接IAB-node-DU 1552。另外,mIAB-node-MT 1541和mIAB-node-DU 1542从IAB-donor-CU 1511切换到IAB-donor-CU 1521。mIAB-node-MT 1541连接IAB-donor-DU 1522,mIAB-node-DU 1542连接IAB-donor-CU 1521。In Figure 15(b), as miAB-node 1540 moves, since UE 1560 does not move with miAB-node 1540, IAB-donor-CU 1511 will trigger UE 1560 to switch from IAB-donor-CU 1511 to IAB-donor-CU 1531, or IAB-donor-CU 1511 will trigger UE 1560 to switch from miAB-node 1540 to IAB-node 1550, and UE 1560 will connect to IAB-node-DU 1552. Additionally, miAB-node-MT 1541 and miAB-node-DU 1542 will switch from IAB-donor-CU 1511 to IAB-donor-CU 1521. The mIAB-node-MT 1541 connects to the IAB-donor-DU 1522, and the mIAB-node-DU 1542 connects to the IAB-donor-CU 1521.

下面对第一节点的节点能力的上报进行示例说明。The following example illustrates the reporting of node capabilities of the first node.

在一些可能的示例中,在第二节点判决是否需要对第一节点进行接入切换之前,第一节点可以向第二节点上报或广播自己的节点能力,该节点能力可以指示第一节点是否支持第一节点的第一功能单元和/或第二功能单元进行接入切换。其中,第一节点可以同时支持第一功能单元和第二功能单元进行接入切换,或者可以仅支持第一功能单元进行接入切换,或者可以仅支持第二功能单元进行接入切换,或者不支持第一功能单元和第二功能单元进行接入切换。这样,只有在第一节点支持第一功能单元和/或第二功能单元进行接入切换时,第二节点才会判决是否需要对第一节点进行接入切换。In some possible examples, before the second node determines whether an access handover to the first node is necessary, the first node may report or broadcast its node capabilities to the second node. These capabilities may indicate whether the first node supports access handover for its first functional unit and/or second functional unit. Specifically, the first node may support access handover for both the first and second functional units simultaneously, or it may support only the first functional unit, or only the second functional unit, or it may not support either. Thus, the second node will only determine whether an access handover to the first node is necessary if the first node supports access handover for both the first and/or second functional units.

例如,在图13中,在S1301之前,第一节点向第二节点发送能力指示信息;对应的,第二节点接收能力指示信息。其中,能力指示信息用于指示第一节点支持或者不支持第一节点的第一功能单元和/或第一节点的第二功能单元进行接入切换。For example, in Figure 13, before S1301, the first node sends capability indication information to the second node; correspondingly, the second node receives the capability indication information. The capability indication information is used to indicate whether the first node supports or does not support access switching for the first functional unit and/or the second functional unit of the first node.

可选的,若能力指示信息的取值为第一值,则能力指示信息用于指示第一节点支持第一功能单元和第二功能单元进行接入切换;若能力指示信息的取值为第二值,则能力指示信息用于指示第一节点支持第一功能单元进行接入切换;若能力指示信息的取值为第三值,则能力指示信息用于指示第一节点支持第二功能单元进行接入切换;若能力指示信息的取值为第四值,则能力指示信息用于指示第一节点不支持第一功能单元和第二功能单元进行接入切换。Optionally, if the capability indication information takes a first value, the capability indication information is used to indicate that the first node supports the access handover between the first functional unit and the second functional unit; if the capability indication information takes a second value, the capability indication information is used to indicate that the first node supports the access handover between the first functional unit; if the capability indication information takes a third value, the capability indication information is used to indicate that the first node supports the access handover between the second functional unit; if the capability indication information takes a fourth value, the capability indication information is used to indicate that the first node does not support the access handover between the first functional unit and the second functional unit.

以能力指示信息为2个比特为例,若该2个比特的取值为00,则指示第一节点支持第一功能单元和第二功能单元进行接入切换;若该2个比特的取值为01,则指示第一节点支持第一功能单元进行接入切换;若该2个比特的取值为10,则指示第一节点支持第二功能单元进行接入切换;若该2个比特的取值为11,则指示第一节点不支持第一功能单元和第二功能单元进行接入切换。Taking a capability indication information consisting of 2 bits as an example, if the value of the 2 bits is 00, it indicates that the first node supports the access switching between the first functional unit and the second functional unit; if the value of the 2 bits is 01, it indicates that the first node supports the access switching between the first functional unit; if the value of the 2 bits is 10, it indicates that the first node supports the access switching between the second functional unit; if the value of the 2 bits is 11, it indicates that the first node does not support the access switching between the first functional unit and the second functional unit.

在一些可能的示例中,能力指示信息可以与时间信息和/或位置信息关联。其中,能力指示信息关联的时间信息可以用于指示能力指示信息的生效时间;能力指示信息关联的位置信息可以用于指示能力指示信息的生效区域。也就是说,在能力指示信息的生效时间内,能力指示信息所指示的内容才能生效;在能力指示信息的生效区域内,能力指示信息所指示的内容才能生效。In some possible examples, capability indication information can be associated with time and/or location information. Specifically, the time information associated with the capability indication information can indicate the effective time of the capability indication information; the location information associated with the capability indication information can indicate the effective area of the capability indication information. That is, the content indicated by the capability indication information is only effective within the effective time period and within the effective area of the capability indication information.

例如,若能力指示信息的取值为第一值、且能力指示信息的生效时间为[t1,t2](其中t1代表开始时刻,t2代表结束时刻),则在时间[t1,t2]内,第一节点支持第一功能单元和第二功能单元进行接入切换。For example, if the capability indication information takes the first value and the effective time of the capability indication information is [t1, t2] (where t1 represents the start time and t2 represents the end time), then within the time [t1, t2], the first node supports the first functional unit and the second functional unit to switch access.

又例如,若能力指示信息的取值为第四值、且生效区域为第一区域(其中第一区域可以是指与参考位置距离小于距离门限的区域),则在第一区域内,第一节点不支持第一功能单元和第二功能单元进行接入切换。For example, if the capability indication information is the fourth value and the effective area is the first area (where the first area can refer to the area where the distance from the reference position is less than the distance threshold), then within the first area, the first node does not support the access switching between the first functional unit and the second functional unit.

如图16所示,图16为本申请实施例的一种基于条件切换的频繁移动网络系统下的接入切换方法的流程示意图。其中,图16包括如下步骤:As shown in Figure 16, Figure 16 is a flowchart illustrating an access handover method in a frequent mobile network system based on conditional handover, according to an embodiment of this application. Figure 16 includes the following steps:

S1601.第二节点向第三节点发送条件切换请求信息。S1601. The second node sends a condition switching request to the third node.

对应的,第三节点接收条件切换请求信息。Correspondingly, the third node receives the condition switching request information.

其中,条件切换请求信息可以用于请求将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。Among them, the condition switching request information can be used to request a conditional switch between the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node.

可见,由于第二节点为第一节点提供接入服务,因此第二节点可以判决是否需要对第一节点进行条件切换。例如,第二节点可以根据第一节点上报的测量报告等来进行条件切换决策。当第二节点决策需要对第一节点进行条件切换时,第二节点可以通过条件切换请求信息向第三节点请求将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换,以便第三节点执行条件切换准入控制。As can be seen, since the second node provides access services to the first node, it can determine whether a conditional handover of the first node is necessary. For example, the second node can make a conditional handover decision based on measurement reports reported by the first node. When the second node decides that a conditional handover of the first node is necessary, it can request the third node to perform a conditional handover between the first node's first functional unit and its second functional unit via a conditional handover request message, so that the third node can execute conditional handover access control.

可选的,条件切换请求信息包括第一标识信息和第二标识信息,第一标识信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元的标识,第二标识信息用于指示第一节点的第二功能单元的标识。Optionally, the condition switching request information includes first identification information and second identification information. The first identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the first node, and the second identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the second functional unit of the first node.

这样,通过第一标识信息和第二标识信息实现指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元,以便第三节点确认是对第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换请求。In this way, the first identification information and the second identification information are used to indicate the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node, so that the third node can confirm that the condition switching request is made for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node.

可选的,条件切换请求信息还包括以下至少一项:第三标识信息、第一上下文信息、第四标识信息、或者第二上下文信息。其中,第三标识信息用于指示第一节点所服务的终端设备的标识,第一上下文信息用于指示第一节点所服务的终端设备的上下文,第四标识信息用于指示第一节点所服务的子节点的第一功能单元的标识和第一节点所服务的子节点的第二功能单元的标识,第二上下文信息用于指示第一节点所服务的子节点的上下文。Optionally, the condition switching request information may further include at least one of the following: third identification information, first context information, fourth identification information, or second context information. Wherein, the third identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the terminal device served by the first node, the first context information is used to indicate the context of the terminal device served by the first node, the fourth identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the child node served by the first node and the identifier of the second functional unit of the child node served by the first node, and the second context information is used to indicate the context of the child node served by the first node.

需要说明的是,若第一节点所服务的终端设备需要配置条件切换,则条件切换请求信息包括第三标识信息和/或第一上下文信息。这样,通过第三标识信息和/或第一上下文信息实现将该终端设备配置条件切换告诉给第三节点。It should be noted that if the terminal device served by the first node needs to configure conditional switching, the conditional switching request information includes third identification information and/or first context information. In this way, the third identification information and/or first context information are used to inform the third node about configuring conditional switching for the terminal device.

若第一节点所服务的子节点需要配置条件切换,则条件切换请求信息包括第四标识信息和/或第二上下文信息。这样,通过第四标识信息和/或第二上下文信息实现将该子节点配置条件切换告诉给第三节点。If a child node served by the first node needs to be configured with condition switching, the condition switching request information includes fourth identification information and/or second context information. In this way, the fourth identification information and/or second context information are used to inform the third node about configuring condition switching for that child node.

S1602.第三节点发送条件切换响应信息。S1602. The third node sends a condition switching response message.

对应的,第二节点接收条件切换响应信息。Correspondingly, the second node receives the condition switching response information.

其中,条件切换响应信息用于指示准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。Among them, the condition switching response information is used to instruct the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.

需要说明的是,在第三节点接收到条件切换请求信息之后,第三节点会执行条件切换准入控制,以决定准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换,并通过条件切换响应信息告诉给第二节点准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。It should be noted that after the third node receives the conditional switching request information, the third node will perform conditional switching admission control to decide whether to allow the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform conditional switching, and inform the second node to allow the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform conditional switching through conditional switching response information.

可选的,条件切换响应信息包括以下至少一项:切换条件信息、第一信息、第二信息、第三信息、第四信息、第五信息、或者第六信息。Optionally, the condition switching response information includes at least one of the following: switching condition information, first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information.

其中,切换条件信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点所需满足的条件;第一信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元切换到第三节点所需的BAP地址;第二信息用于配置第二节点到第三节点的传输路径;第三信息用于配置在第二节点到第三节点的传输路径上的资源;第四信息用于配置BH-RLC;第五信息用于配置F1-AP;第六信息用于配置第一节点的第二功能单元。The switching condition information is used to indicate the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to meet to switch from the second node to the third node; the first information is used to configure the BAP address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the fourth information is used to configure BH-RLC; the fifth information is used to configure F1-AP; and the sixth information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.

可见,在第三节点执行条件切换准入控制中,为了保证第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元通过条件切换方式从第二节点切换到第三节点,第三节点需要配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点所需满足的条件、预留第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行接入切换所需要的BAP地址、第二节点到第三节点的传输路径、传输路径上的资源、BH-RLC配置、F1-AP配置、或者第一节点的第二功能单元配置等信息中的至少一项,以便第一节点可以根据这些信息进行条件切换,保证条件切换成功。As can be seen, in the conditional handover admission control performed by the third node, in order to ensure that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node switch from the second node to the third node through conditional handover, the third node needs to configure at least one of the following information: the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to meet when switching from the second node to the third node; the BAP address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform access handover; the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the resources on the transmission path; the BH-RLC configuration; the F1-AP configuration; or the configuration of the second functional unit of the first node. This information is used by the first node to perform conditional handover and ensure that the conditional handover is successful.

可选的,切换条件信息所指示的条件包括:与第二节点的参考位置之间的距离大于第一距离门限,和/或与第三节点的参考位置之间的距离小于第二距离门限;或者,到第二节点的传输路径上有至少一个中继节点的BH-RLC有效时间小于有效时间门限。Optionally, the conditions indicated by the switching condition information include: the distance between the reference position of the second node is greater than a first distance threshold, and/or the distance between the reference position of the third node is less than a second distance threshold; or, the BH-RLC validity time of at least one relay node on the transmission path to the second node is less than a validity time threshold.

需要说明的是,第二节点的参考位置可以表示第二节点所在的地理位置。第二节点可以有一个或多个参考位置。当第二节点位于地面/陆地(如TN IAB-donor)时,第二节点的参考位置可以根据频繁移动网络系统的位置部署确定,且第二节点的参考位置是固定的。同理,第三节点的参考位置可以表示第三节点所在的地理位置。第三节点可以有一个或多个参考位置。当第三节点位于地面/陆地(如TN IAB-donor)时,第三节点的参考位置可以根据频繁移动网络系统的位置部署确定,且第三节点的参考位置是固定的。It should be noted that the reference location of the second node can represent its geographical location. The second node can have one or more reference locations. When the second node is located on the ground/land (e.g., TN IAB-donor), its reference location is determined based on the location deployment of the frequent mobility network system, and this reference location is fixed. Similarly, the reference location of the third node can represent its geographical location. The third node can have one or more reference locations. When the third node is located on the ground/land (e.g., TN IAB-donor), its reference location is determined based on the location deployment of the frequent mobility network system, and this reference location is fixed.

另外,若切换条件信息所指示的条件包括与第二节点的参考位置之间的距离大于第一距离门限,则在第一节点获取切换条件信息之后,第一节点可以判断自身的位置与第二节点的参考位置之间的距离是否大于第一距离门限,以便确定是否满足切换条件信息所指示的条件。当满足条件时,第一节点可以执行将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。Furthermore, if the switching condition information indicates that the distance between the first node and the reference position of the second node is greater than a first distance threshold, then after the first node obtains the switching condition information, the first node can determine whether the distance between its own position and the reference position of the second node is greater than the first distance threshold, in order to determine whether the conditions indicated by the switching condition information are met. When the conditions are met, the first node can execute the switching of its first functional unit and its second functional unit from the second node to the third node.

若切换条件信息所指示的条件包括与第三节点的参考位置之间的距离小于第二距离门限,则在第一节点获取切换条件信息之后,第一节点可以判断自身的位置与第三节点的参考位置之间的距离是否小于第二距离门限,以便确定是否满足切换条件信息所指示的条件。当满足条件时,第一节点可以执行将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。If the switching condition information indicates that the distance between the first node and the reference position of the third node is less than a second distance threshold, then after the first node obtains the switching condition information, the first node can determine whether the distance between its own position and the reference position of the third node is less than the second distance threshold, in order to determine whether the conditions indicated by the switching condition information are met. When the conditions are met, the first node can switch its first functional unit and second functional unit from the second node to the third node.

若切换条件信息所指示的条件包括到第二节点的传输路径上有至少一个中继节点的BH-RLC有效时间小于有效时间门限,则在第一节点获取切换条件信息之后,第一节点可以判断第一节点到第二节点的传输路径上有是否有中继节点的BH-RLC有效时间小于有效时间门限,以便确定是否满足切换条件信息所指示的条件。当满足条件时,第一节点可以执行将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。If the handover condition information indicates that at least one relay node on the transmission path to the second node has a BH-RLC validity period less than a validity period threshold, then after the first node obtains the handover condition information, the first node can determine whether there is a relay node on the transmission path from the first node to the second node whose BH-RLC validity period is less than the validity period threshold, in order to determine whether the conditions indicated by the handover condition information are met. When the conditions are met, the first node can execute the handover of its first functional unit and second functional unit from the second node to the third node.

可选的,第六信息包括以下至少一项:PCI列表、资源配置信息、TAI配置信息、或者TAC配置信息。Optionally, the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: PCI list, resource configuration information, TAI configuration information, or TAC configuration information.

可见,第三节点在执行条件切换准入控制中需要为第一节点的第二功能单元配置PCI列表、资源、TAI或者TAC等中的至少一项,从而保证第一节点执行条件切换成功。It is evident that the third node needs to configure at least one of the following for the second functional unit of the first node in the condition switching admission control process: PCI list, resources, TAI or TAC, in order to ensure that the first node can successfully perform condition switching.

可选的,条件切换响应信息还包括第一节点所服务的终端设备和/或子节点切换所需的随机接入信息。例如,随机接入信息可以包括C-RNTI、前导码、RO、随机接入时频资源。Optionally, the conditional handover response information may also include random access information required for the handover of the terminal equipment and/or sub-nodes served by the first node. For example, random access information may include C-RNTI, preamble, RO, and random access time-frequency resources.

可见,若第一节点所服务的终端设备和/或子节点需要配置条件切换,则第三节点在执行条件切换准入控制中需要配置该终端设备和/或子节点执行条件切换所需的随机接入信息,以便该终端设备和/或子节点根据随机接入信息进行随机接入以完成条件切换。It is evident that if the terminal device and/or sub-node served by the first node need to be configured for conditional handover, the third node needs to configure the random access information required for the terminal device and/or sub-node to perform conditional handover in the conditional handover admission control process, so that the terminal device and/or sub-node can perform random access based on the random access information to complete the conditional handover.

S1603.第二节点向第一节点发送条件切换信息。S1603. The second node sends condition switching information to the first node.

对应的,第一节点接收条件切换信息。Correspondingly, the first node receives the condition switching information.

其中,条件切换信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。Among them, the condition switching information is used to configure the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch conditions.

需要说明的是,在第二节点获知第三节点准许第一节点执行条件切换之后,第二节点可以通过条件切换信息告知第一节点需要执行条件切换。另外,在第一节点接收条件切换信息之后,第一节点可能向第三节点发送RRC重配置完成信息。It should be noted that after the second node learns that the third node has permitted the first node to perform a conditional switch, the second node can inform the first node of the need to perform the conditional switch via conditional switch information. Additionally, after receiving the conditional switch information, the first node may send an RRC reconfiguration completion message to the third node.

可选的,条件切换信息包括以下至少一项:切换条件信息、第一信息、第二信息、第三信息、第四信息、第五信息、或者第六信息。Optionally, the condition switching information includes at least one of the following: switching condition information, first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information.

其中,切换条件信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点所需满足的条件;第一信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元切换到第三节点所需的BAP地址;第二信息用于配置第二节点到第三节点的传输路径;第三信息用于配置在第二节点到第三节点的传输路径上的资源;第四信息用于配置BH-RLC;第五信息用于配置F1-AP;第六信息用于配置第一节点的第二功能单元。The switching condition information is used to indicate the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to meet to switch from the second node to the third node; the first information is used to configure the BAP address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the fourth information is used to configure BH-RLC; the fifth information is used to configure F1-AP; and the sixth information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.

可见,第二节点会将第三节点所配置的切换条件、所预留的第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行接入切换所需要的BAP地址、第二节点到第三节点的传输路径、传输路径上的资源、BH-RLC配置、F1-AP配置、或者第一节点的第二功能单元配置等信息中的至少一项告知给第一节点,以便第一节点可以根据这些信息进行接入切换,保证接入切换成功。As can be seen, the second node will inform the first node of at least one of the following information: the switching conditions configured by the third node, the BAP address reserved for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform access switching, the transmission path from the second node to the third node, the resources on the transmission path, the BH-RLC configuration, the F1-AP configuration, or the second functional unit configuration of the first node, so that the first node can perform access switching based on this information and ensure successful access switching.

可选的,切换条件信息所指示的条件包括:与第二节点的参考位置之间的距离大于第一距离门限,和/或与第三节点的参考位置之间的距离小于第二距离门限;或者,到第二节点的传输路径上有至少一个中继节点的BH-RLC有效时间小于有效时间门限。Optionally, the conditions indicated by the switching condition information include: the distance between the reference position of the second node is greater than a first distance threshold, and/or the distance between the reference position of the third node is less than a second distance threshold; or, the BH-RLC validity time of at least one relay node on the transmission path to the second node is less than a validity time threshold.

可选的,第六信息包括以下至少一项:PCI列表、资源配置信息、TAI配置信息、或者TAC配置信息。Optionally, the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: PCI list, resource configuration information, TAI configuration information, or TAC configuration information.

可见,第二节点会将第三节点所配置的PCI列表、资源、TAI或者TAC等中的至少一项告知给第一节点,从而保证第一节点接入切换成功。As can be seen, the second node will inform the first node of at least one of the PCI list, resources, TAI or TAC configured by the third node, thereby ensuring that the first node's access handover is successful.

可选的,条件切换信息由RRC信令(如RRC重配置请求消息)携带。这样,第二节点通过RRC信令告诉第一接入执行条件切换。Optionally, the conditional handover information can be carried by RRC signaling (such as an RRC reconfiguration request message). In this way, the second node informs the first access node to perform a conditional handover via RRC signaling.

S1604.第一节点根据条件切换信息执行第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元的条件切换。S1604. The first node performs condition switching between the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node according to the condition switching information.

需要说明的是,第一节点会判断切换条件信息所指示的条件是否满足。若满足切换条件信息所指示的条件,则执行条件切换,将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。It should be noted that the first node will determine whether the conditions indicated by the switching condition information are met. If the conditions indicated by the switching condition information are met, the condition switching will be performed, switching the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node.

下面对本实施例在上述图17所示的切换流程的基础上对基于条件切换的频繁移动网络系统下的接入切换的一种可能完整流程进行示例说明。The following example illustrates a possible complete process for access handover in a frequent mobile network system based on conditional handover, based on the handover process shown in Figure 17 above.

如图17所示,图17为本实施例提供的又一种基于条件切换的频繁移动网络系统下的接入切换方法的流程示意图。其中,图17包括如下步骤:As shown in Figure 17, Figure 17 is a flowchart illustrating another access handover method for a frequent mobile network system based on conditional handover provided in this embodiment. Figure 17 includes the following steps:

S1701.第二节点向第一节点发送测量配置信息。S1701. The second node sends measurement configuration information to the first node.

对应的,第一节点接收测量配置信息。Correspondingly, the first node receives the measurement configuration information.

需要说明的是,第二节点可以向第一节点发送多个第二类节点(包含第三节点)对应的测量配置信息。其中,测量配置信息可以用于配置L1和/或L3测量,可以包含测量频点、同步信号块测量定时配置SMTC、测量上报触发条件(如周期性、非周期性、事件触发)、测量对象(如位置、信号质量)等。另外,测量配置信息可以由RRC信令携带。然后,第一节点可以根据测量配置信息对信号质量(如RSRP和/或RSRQ等)进行测量以得到信号质量结果。其中,测量信号可以为SSB(如CD-SSB或者CSI-RS)等。It should be noted that the second node can send measurement configuration information corresponding to multiple second-type nodes (including the third node) to the first node. This measurement configuration information can be used to configure L1 and/or L3 measurements, and may include measurement frequency points, synchronization signal block measurement timing configuration (SMTC), measurement reporting trigger conditions (e.g., periodic, non-periodic, event-triggered), and measurement objects (e.g., location, signal quality). Furthermore, the measurement configuration information can be carried by RRC signaling. The first node can then measure signal quality (e.g., RSRP and/or RSRQ) according to the measurement configuration information to obtain signal quality results. The measured signal can be an SSB (e.g., CD-SSB or CSI-RS).

S1702.第一节点向第二节点发送测量报告。S1702. The first node sends a measurement report to the second node.

对应的,第二节点接收测量报告。Correspondingly, the second node receives the measurement report.

需要说明的是,第一节点可以将测量结果上报给第二节点。其中,测量报告可以包括第一节点的位置相关信息(如GNSS位置或者波位ID、卫星星历等)和信号质量结果等。另外,上报方式可以为周期性上报或事件触发上报。在事件触发上报中,上报条件可以为第二节点的信号质量小于第一预设门限和/或第三节点的信号质量大于第二预设门限。It should be noted that the first node can report measurement results to the second node. The measurement report may include location-related information of the first node (such as GNSS position or wavelet ID, satellite ephemeris, etc.) and signal quality results. Furthermore, the reporting method can be periodic reporting or event-triggered reporting. In event-triggered reporting, the reporting condition can be that the signal quality of the second node is less than a first preset threshold and/or the signal quality of the third node is greater than a second preset threshold.

S1703.第二节点根据测量报告确定第一节点对应的条件切换判决。S1703. The second node determines the condition switching decision corresponding to the first node based on the measurement report.

需要说明的是,第二节点根据测量报告判决第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。It should be noted that the second node determines the conditional switching between the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node based on the measurement report.

S1704.第二节点向第三节点发送条件切换请求信息。S1704. The second node sends a condition switching request to the third node.

对应的,第三节点接收条件切换请求信息。Correspondingly, the third node receives the condition switching request information.

其中,条件切换请求信息可以用于请求将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。Among them, the condition switching request information can be used to request a conditional switch between the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node.

可见,由于第二节点为第一节点提供接入服务,因此第二节点可以判决是否需要对第一节点进行条件切换。例如,第二节点可以根据第一节点上报的测量报告等来进行条件切换决策。当第二节点决策需要对第一节点进行条件切换时,第二节点可以通过条件切换请求信息向第三节点请求将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换,以便第三节点执行条件切换准入控制。As can be seen, since the second node provides access services to the first node, it can determine whether a conditional handover of the first node is necessary. For example, the second node can make a conditional handover decision based on measurement reports reported by the first node. When the second node decides that a conditional handover of the first node is necessary, it can request the third node to perform a conditional handover between the first node's first functional unit and its second functional unit via a conditional handover request message, so that the third node can execute conditional handover access control.

可选的,条件切换请求信息包括第一标识信息和第二标识信息,第一标识信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元的标识,第二标识信息用于指示第一节点的第二功能单元的标识。Optionally, the condition switching request information includes first identification information and second identification information. The first identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the first node, and the second identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the second functional unit of the first node.

这样,通过第一标识信息和第二标识信息实现指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元,以便第三节点确认是对第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换请求。In this way, the first identification information and the second identification information are used to indicate the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node, so that the third node can confirm that the condition switching request is made for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node.

可选的,条件切换请求信息还包括以下至少一项:第三标识信息、第一上下文信息、第四标识信息、或者第二上下文信息。其中,第三标识信息用于指示第一节点所服务的终端设备的标识,第一上下文信息用于指示第一节点所服务的终端设备的上下文,第四标识信息用于指示第一节点所服务的子节点的第一功能单元的标识和第一节点所服务的子节点的第二功能单元的标识,第二上下文信息用于指示第一节点所服务的子节点的上下文。Optionally, the condition switching request information may further include at least one of the following: third identification information, first context information, fourth identification information, or second context information. Wherein, the third identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the terminal device served by the first node, the first context information is used to indicate the context of the terminal device served by the first node, the fourth identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the child node served by the first node and the identifier of the second functional unit of the child node served by the first node, and the second context information is used to indicate the context of the child node served by the first node.

需要说明的是,若第一节点所服务的终端设备需要配置条件切换,则条件切换请求信息包括第三标识信息和/或第一上下文信息。这样,通过第三标识信息和/或第一上下文信息实现将该终端设备配置条件切换的信息告诉给第三节点。若第一节点所服务的子节点需要配置条件切换,则条件切换请求信息包括第四标识信息和/或第二上下文信息。这样,通过第四标识信息和/或第二上下文信息实现将该子节点配置条件切换的信息给第三节点。It should be noted that if the terminal device served by the first node needs to configure conditional switching, the conditional switching request information includes third identification information and/or first context information. In this way, the third identification information and/or first context information are used to inform the third node of the terminal device's conditional switching configuration information. If a child node served by the first node needs to configure conditional switching, the conditional switching request information includes fourth identification information and/or second context information. In this way, the fourth identification information and/or second context information are used to inform the third node of the child node's conditional switching configuration information.

S1705.第三节点发送条件切换响应信息。S1705. The third node sends a condition switching response message.

对应的,第二节点接收条件切换响应信息。Correspondingly, the second node receives the condition switching response information.

其中,条件切换响应信息用于指示准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。Among them, the condition switching response information is used to instruct the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.

需要说明的是,在第三节点接收到条件切换请求信息之后,第三节点会执行条件切换准入控制,以决定准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换,并通过条件切换响应信息告诉给第二节点准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。It should be noted that after the third node receives the conditional switching request information, the third node will perform conditional switching admission control to decide whether to allow the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform conditional switching, and inform the second node to allow the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform conditional switching through conditional switching response information.

可选的,条件切换响应信息包括以下至少一项:切换条件信息、第一信息、第二信息、第三信息、第四信息、第五信息、或者第六信息。Optionally, the condition switching response information includes at least one of the following: switching condition information, first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information.

其中,切换条件信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点所需满足的条件;第一信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元切换到第三节点所需的BAP地址;第二信息用于配置第二节点到第三节点的传输路径;第三信息用于配置在第二节点到第三节点的传输路径上的资源;第四信息用于配置BH-RLC;第五信息用于配置F1-AP;第六信息用于配置第一节点的第二功能单元。The switching condition information is used to indicate the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to meet to switch from the second node to the third node; the first information is used to configure the BAP address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the fourth information is used to configure BH-RLC; the fifth information is used to configure F1-AP; and the sixth information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.

可见,在第三节点执行条件切换准入控制中,为了保证第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元通过条件切换方式从第二节点切换到第三节点,第三节点需要配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点所需满足的条件、预留第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行接入切换所需要的BAP地址、第二节点到第三节点的传输路径、传输路径上的资源、BH-RLC配置、F1-AP配置、或者第一节点的第二功能单元配置等信息中的至少一项,以便第一节点可以根据这些信息进行条件切换,保证条件切换成功。As can be seen, in the conditional handover admission control performed by the third node, in order to ensure that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node switch from the second node to the third node through conditional handover, the third node needs to configure at least one of the following information: the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to meet when switching from the second node to the third node; the BAP address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform access handover; the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the resources on the transmission path; the BH-RLC configuration; the F1-AP configuration; or the configuration of the second functional unit of the first node. This information is used by the first node to perform conditional handover and ensure that the conditional handover is successful.

可选的,切换条件信息所指示的条件包括:与第二节点的参考位置之间的距离大于第一距离门限,和/或与第三节点的参考位置之间的距离小于第二距离门限;或者,到第二节点的传输路径上有至少一个中继节点的BH-RLC有效时间小于有效时间门限。Optionally, the conditions indicated by the switching condition information include: the distance between the reference position of the second node is greater than a first distance threshold, and/or the distance between the reference position of the third node is less than a second distance threshold; or, the BH-RLC validity time of at least one relay node on the transmission path to the second node is less than a validity time threshold.

可选的,第六信息包括以下至少一项:PCI列表、资源配置信息、TAI配置信息、或者TAC配置信息。Optionally, the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: PCI list, resource configuration information, TAI configuration information, or TAC configuration information.

可见,第三节点在执行条件切换准入控制中需要为第一节点的第二功能单元配置PCI列表、资源、TAI或者TAC等中的至少一项,从而保证第一节点执行条件切换成功。It is evident that the third node needs to configure at least one of the following for the second functional unit of the first node in the condition switching admission control process: PCI list, resources, TAI or TAC, in order to ensure that the first node can successfully perform condition switching.

可选的,切换响应信息还包括第一节点所服务的终端设备和/或子节点切换所需的随机接入信息。例如,随机接入信息可以包括C-RNTI、前导码、RO、随机接入时频资源。Optionally, the handover response information may also include random access information required for the handover of the terminal devices and/or sub-nodes served by the first node. For example, random access information may include C-RNTI, preamble, RO, and random access time-frequency resources.

可见,若第一节点所服务的终端设备和/或子节点需要配置条件切换,则第三节点在执行条件切换准入控制中需要配置该终端设备和/或子节点执行条件切换所需的随机接入信息,以便该终端设备和/或子节点根据随机接入信息进行随机接入以完成条件切换。It is evident that if the terminal device and/or sub-node served by the first node need to be configured for conditional handover, the third node needs to configure the random access information required for the terminal device and/or sub-node to perform conditional handover in the conditional handover admission control process, so that the terminal device and/or sub-node can perform random access based on the random access information to complete the conditional handover.

S1706.第二节点向第一节点发送条件切换信息。S1706. The second node sends condition switching information to the first node.

对应的,第一节点接收条件切换信息。Correspondingly, the first node receives the condition switching information.

其中,条件切换信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。Among them, the condition switching information is used to configure the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch conditions.

需要说明的是,在第二节点获知第三节点准许第一节点执行条件切换之后,第二节点可以通过条件切换信息告知第一节点需要执行条件切换。另外,在第一节点接收条件切换信息之后,第一节点可能向第三节点发送RRC重配置完成信息。It should be noted that after the second node learns that the third node has permitted the first node to perform a conditional switch, the second node can inform the first node of the need to perform the conditional switch via conditional switch information. Additionally, after receiving the conditional switch information, the first node may send an RRC reconfiguration completion message to the third node.

可选的,条件切换信息包括以下至少一项:切换条件信息、第一信息、第二信息、第三信息、第四信息、第五信息、或者第六信息。Optionally, the condition switching information includes at least one of the following: switching condition information, first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information.

其中,切换条件信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点所需满足的条件;第一信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元切换到第三节点所需的BAP地址;第二信息用于配置第二节点到第三节点的传输路径;第三信息用于配置在第二节点到第三节点的传输路径上的资源;第四信息用于配置BH-RLC;第五信息用于配置F1-AP;第六信息用于配置第一节点的第二功能单元。The switching condition information is used to indicate the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to meet to switch from the second node to the third node; the first information is used to configure the BAP address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; the second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the third information is used to configure the resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; the fourth information is used to configure BH-RLC; the fifth information is used to configure F1-AP; and the sixth information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.

可见,第二节点会将第三节点所配置的切换条件、所预留的第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行接入切换所需要的BAP地址、第二节点到第三节点的传输路径、传输路径上的资源、BH-RLC配置、F1-AP配置、或者第一节点的第二功能单元配置等信息中的至少一项告知给第一节点,以便第一节点可以根据这些信息进行接入切换,保证接入切换成功。As can be seen, the second node will inform the first node of at least one of the following information: the switching conditions configured by the third node, the BAP address reserved for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform access switching, the transmission path from the second node to the third node, the resources on the transmission path, the BH-RLC configuration, the F1-AP configuration, or the second functional unit configuration of the first node, so that the first node can perform access switching based on this information and ensure successful access switching.

可选的,切换条件信息所指示的条件包括:与第二节点的参考位置之间的距离大于第一距离门限,和/或与第三节点的参考位置之间的距离小于第二距离门限;或者,到第二节点的传输路径上有至少一个中继节点的BH-RLC有效时间小于有效时间门限。Optionally, the conditions indicated by the switching condition information include: the distance between the reference position of the second node is greater than a first distance threshold, and/or the distance between the reference position of the third node is less than a second distance threshold; or, the BH-RLC validity time of at least one relay node on the transmission path to the second node is less than a validity time threshold.

可选的,第六信息包括以下至少一项:PCI列表、资源配置信息、TAI配置信息、或者TAC配置信息。Optionally, the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: PCI list, resource configuration information, TAI configuration information, or TAC configuration information.

可见,第二节点会将第三节点所配置的PCI列表、资源、TAI或者TAC等中的至少一项告知给第一节点,从而保证第一节点接入切换成功。As can be seen, the second node will inform the first node of at least one of the PCI list, resources, TAI or TAC configured by the third node, thereby ensuring that the first node's access handover is successful.

可选的,条件切换信息由RRC信令(如RRC重配置请求消息)携带。这样,第二节点通过RRC信令告诉第一接入执行条件切换。Optionally, the conditional handover information can be carried by RRC signaling (such as an RRC reconfiguration request message). In this way, the second node informs the first access node to perform a conditional handover via RRC signaling.

S1707.第一节点根据条件切换信息执行第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元的条件切换。S1707. The first node performs condition switching between the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node according to the condition switching information.

需要说明的是,第一节点会判断切换条件信息所指示的条件是否满足。若满足切换条件信息所指示的条件,则执行条件切换,将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。It should be noted that the first node will determine whether the conditions indicated by the switching condition information are met. If the conditions indicated by the switching condition information are met, the condition switching will be performed, switching the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node.

S1708.第二节点向第三节点发送上下文信息和用户数据。S1708. The second node sends context information and user data to the third node.

对应的,第三节点接收上下文信息和用户数据。Correspondingly, the third node receives context information and user data.

其中,上下文信息包括第一节点的上下文信息,用户数据可以是第一节点的用户数据。The context information includes the context information of the first node, and the user data can be the user data of the first node.

可选的,上下文信息还包括第一节点所服务的终端设备和/或子节点的上下文信息。Optionally, the context information may also include the context information of the terminal devices and/or child nodes served by the first node.

需要说明的是,S1707和S1708这两个步骤的执行顺序可以动态对调。It should be noted that the execution order of steps S1707 and S1708 can be dynamically interchanged.

S1709.第一节点确定与第三节点进行上下行同步。S1709. The first node determines and performs uplink and downlink synchronization with the third node.

S1710.第一节点向第三节点发送切换完成信息。S1710. The first node sends a handover completion message to the third node.

对应的,第三节点接收切换完成信息。Correspondingly, the third node receives the handover completion information.

其中,切换完成信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元已完成从第二节点切换到第三节点。The switching completion information indicates that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node have completed the switching from the second node to the third node.

S1711.第三节点向第二节点发送切换成功响应信息。S1711. The third node sends a handover success response message to the second node.

对应的,第二节点接收切换成功响应信息。Correspondingly, the second node receives a handover success response message.

其中,切换成功响应信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元已完成从第二节点切换到第三节点。The successful switchover response information indicates that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node have completed the switchover from the second node to the third node.

S1712.第二节点给核心网设备发送路径切换请求信息。S1712. The second node sends a path switching request to the core network equipment.

其中,路径切换请求信息用于请求切换路径。The path switching request information is used to request a path switching.

需要说明的是,核心网设备可以包括AMF和/或UPF。It should be noted that core network equipment may include AMF and/or UPF.

S1713.核心网设备根据路径切换请求信息执行路径切换决策。S1713. The core network equipment executes path switching decisions based on the path switching request information.

这样,用户数据由核心网设备从新的路径传输到第三节点。In this way, user data is transmitted from the core network equipment to the third node via a new path.

S1714.核心网设备向第三节点发送路径切换响应信息。S1714. The core network equipment sends path switching response information to the third node.

对应的,第三节点接收路径切换响应信息。Correspondingly, the third node receives the path switching response information.

其中,路径切换响应信息用于指示路径切换完成。The path switching response information is used to indicate that the path switching is complete.

S1715.第三节点向第二节点发送上下文释放信息。S1715. The third node sends a context release message to the second node.

对应的,第二节点接收上下文释放信息。Correspondingly, the second node receives the context release information.

其中,上下文释放信息用于指示第二节点释放第一节点的上下文信息。The context release information is used to instruct the second node to release the context information of the first node.

下面对第一节点所服务的终端设备或者子节点的接入切换、第一节点的节点能力的上报进行示例说明。The following provides examples illustrating the access switching of terminal devices or sub-nodes served by the first node, as well as the reporting of the first node's node capabilities.

在一些可能的示例中,在上述图16或图17的基础上,当涉及到第一节点所服务的终端设备或者子节点的接入切换时,若第一节点所服务的终端设备或者子节点不随着第一节点的移动而移动、且第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,则第二节点可以触发第一节点所服务的终端设备或者子节点从第二节点切换到第四节点,第四节点不同于第三节点、且第四节点用于提供核心网连接功能或者第四节点用于提供回传接入功能。例如,第四节点为IAB-node或者IAB-donor。另外,第一节点所服务的终端设备或者子节点的接入切换方式可以采用传统的L3切换、LTM切换、条件切换CHO或者以上方式的组合等,对此不再赘述。In some possible examples, based on Figure 16 or Figure 17 above, when it involves the access handover of terminal devices or sub-nodes served by the first node, if the terminal devices or sub-nodes served by the first node do not move with the first node, and the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node switch from the second node to the third node, then the second node can trigger the terminal devices or sub-nodes served by the first node to switch from the second node to the fourth node. The fourth node is different from the third node, and the fourth node is used to provide core network connectivity or to provide backhaul access. For example, the fourth node is an IAB-node or an IAB-donor. Furthermore, the access handover method for terminal devices or sub-nodes served by the first node can adopt traditional L3 handover, LTM handover, conditional handover (CHO), or a combination of the above methods, which will not be elaborated further.

在一些可能的示例中,在第二节点判决是否需要对第一节点进行条件切换之前,第一节点可以向第二节点上报或广播自己的节点能力,该节点能力可以指示第一节点是否支持第一节点的第一功能单元和/或第二功能单元进行条件切换。其中,第一节点可以同时支持第一功能单元和第二功能单元进行条件切换,或者可以仅支持第一功能单元进行条件切换,或者可以仅支持第二功能单元进行条件切换,或者不支持第一功能单元和第二功能单元进行条件切换。这样,只有在第一节点支持第一功能单元和/或第二功能单元进行条件切换时,第二节点才会判决是否需要对第一节点进行条件切换。In some possible examples, before the second node determines whether a conditional switch is needed for the first node, the first node may report or broadcast its node capabilities to the second node. These capabilities may indicate whether the first node supports conditional switching of its first functional unit and/or second functional unit. Specifically, the first node may support conditional switching of both the first and second functional units simultaneously, or it may support only the first functional unit, or only the second functional unit, or it may not support either. Thus, the second node will only determine whether a conditional switch is needed for the first node if the first node supports conditional switching of both the first and/or second functional units.

例如,在图16中,在S1601之前,第一节点向第二节点发送能力指示信息;对应的,第二节点接收能力指示信息。其中,能力指示信息用于指示第一节点支持或者不支持第一节点的第一功能单元和/或第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。For example, in Figure 16, before S1601, the first node sends capability indication information to the second node; correspondingly, the second node receives the capability indication information. The capability indication information is used to instruct the first node to support or not support conditional switching of its first functional unit and/or its second functional unit.

可选的,若能力指示信息的取值为第一值,则能力指示信息用于指示第一节点支持第一功能单元和第二功能单元进行条件切换;若能力指示信息的取值为第二值,则能力指示信息用于指示第一节点支持第一功能单元进行条件切换;若能力指示信息的取值为第三值,则能力指示信息用于指示第一节点支持第二功能单元进行条件切换;若能力指示信息的取值为第四值,则能力指示信息用于指示第一节点不支持第一功能单元和第二功能单元进行条件切换。Optionally, if the capability indication information takes a first value, the capability indication information is used to indicate that the first node supports conditional switching between the first functional unit and the second functional unit; if the capability indication information takes a second value, the capability indication information is used to indicate that the first node supports conditional switching between the first functional unit; if the capability indication information takes a third value, the capability indication information is used to indicate that the first node supports conditional switching between the second functional unit; if the capability indication information takes a fourth value, the capability indication information is used to indicate that the first node does not support conditional switching between the first functional unit and the second functional unit.

以能力指示信息为2个比特为例,若该2个比特的取值为00,则指示第一节点支持第一功能单元和第二功能单元进行条件切换;若该2个比特的取值为01,则指示第一节点支持第一功能单元进行条件切换;若该2个比特的取值为10,则指示第一节点支持第二功能单元进行条件切换;若该2个比特的取值为11,则指示第一节点不支持第一功能单元和第二功能单元进行条件切换。Taking a capability indication information of 2 bits as an example, if the value of the 2 bits is 00, it indicates that the first node supports conditional switching between the first functional unit and the second functional unit; if the value of the 2 bits is 01, it indicates that the first node supports conditional switching between the first functional unit; if the value of the 2 bits is 10, it indicates that the first node supports conditional switching between the second functional unit; if the value of the 2 bits is 11, it indicates that the first node does not support conditional switching between the first functional unit and the second functional unit.

在一些可能的示例中,能力指示信息可以与时间信息和/或位置信息关联。其中,能力指示信息关联的时间信息可以用于指示能力指示信息的生效时间;能力指示信息关联的位置信息可以用于指示能力指示信息的生效区域。也就是说,在能力指示信息的生效时间内,能力指示信息所指示的内容才能生效;在能力指示信息的生效区域内,能力指示信息所指示的内容才能生效。In some possible examples, capability indication information can be associated with time and/or location information. Specifically, the time information associated with the capability indication information can indicate the effective time of the capability indication information; the location information associated with the capability indication information can indicate the effective area of the capability indication information. That is, the content indicated by the capability indication information is only effective within the effective time period and within the effective area of the capability indication information.

例如,若能力指示信息的取值为第一值、且能力指示信息的生效时间为[t1,t2](其中t1代表开始时刻,t2代表结束时刻),则在时间[t1,t2]内,第一节点支持第一功能单元和第二功能单元进行条件切换。For example, if the capability indication information takes the first value and the effective time of the capability indication information is [t1, t2] (where t1 represents the start time and t2 represents the end time), then within the time [t1, t2], the first node supports conditional switching between the first functional unit and the second functional unit.

又例如,若能力指示信息的取值为第四值、且生效区域为第一区域(其中第一区域可以是指与参考位置距离小于距离门限的区域),则在第一区域内,第一节点不支持第一功能单元和第二功能单元进行条件切换。For example, if the capability indication information is the fourth value and the effective area is the first area (where the first area can refer to the area where the distance from the reference position is less than the distance threshold), then within the first area, the first node does not support conditional switching between the first functional unit and the second functional unit.

结合上述描述,下面本实施例对频繁移动网络系统中空闲态/非激活态下的第一类节点所驻留的第二类节点的重选进行说明。Based on the above description, this embodiment will now explain the reselection of the second type of node where the first type of node resides in the idle/inactive state in a frequently moving network system.

为了便于描述,下面本实施例以第一类节点包括第一节点、第二类节点包括第二节点和第三节点为例,对第一节点所驻留的第二节点的重选进行具体说明。其中,本实施例可以将“第一节点所驻留的第二节点的重选”简称为“第一节点的节点驻留重选”。For ease of description, this embodiment will use the example of a first type of node including a first node and a second type of node including a second node and a third node to specifically explain the reselection of the second node where the first node resides. In this embodiment, "reselection of the second node where the first node resides" can be simply referred to as "reselection of the node resides of the first node".

值得注意的是,第一节点可以用于提供回传接入功能;第二节点可以用于提供核心网连接功能,可以为第一节点提供接入服务;第三节点可以用于提供核心网连接功能。例如,第一节点为IAB-node,第二节点为第一IAB-donor,第三节点为第二IAB-donor。It is worth noting that the first node can be used to provide backhaul access functionality; the second node can be used to provide core network connectivity functionality and can provide access services to the first node; the third node can be used to provide core network connectivity functionality. For example, the first node is an IAB-node, the second node is the first IAB-donor, and the third node is the second IAB-donor.

另外,第一节点可以支持移动、且第二节点和第三节点可以支持移动或不移动。例如,第一节点为mIAB-node,第二节点为第一mIAB-donor,第三节点为第二mIAB-donor。第一节点可以支持NTN,例如第一节点为NTN IAB-node。第二节点和第三节点可以支持NTN或者TN,例如第二节点为第一NTN IAB-donor或者第一TN IAB-donor,第三节点为第二NTN IAB-donor或者第二TN IAB-donor。Furthermore, the first node can support movement, and the second and third nodes can support movement or no movement. For example, the first node is a mIAB-node, the second node is the first mIAB-donor, and the third node is the second mIAB-donor. The first node can support NTN, for example, the first node is an NTN IAB-node. The second and third nodes can support either NTN or TN, for example, the second node is the first NTN IAB-donor or the first TN IAB-donor, and the third node is the second NTN IAB-donor or the second TN IAB-donor.

如图18所示,图18为本申请实施例的一种频繁移动网络系统下的节点驻留重选方法的流程示意图。As shown in Figure 18, Figure 18 is a flowchart illustrating a node relocation method in a frequently moving network system according to an embodiment of this application.

其中,图18包括如下步骤:Figure 18 includes the following steps:

S1801.第二节点向第一节点发送节点驻留重选信息。S1801. The second node sends node reselection information to the first node.

对应的,第二节点接收节点驻留重选信息,以及根据节点驻留重选信息对第二节点进行节点驻留重选。Correspondingly, the second node receives node relocation information and performs node relocation relocation for the second node based on the node relocation information.

其中,节点驻留重选信息用于指示以下至少一项:类型信息、覆盖信息、路径信息、或者有效信息。The node residency reselection information is used to indicate at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or valid information.

可见,第二节点通过节点驻留重选信息辅助第一节点对第二节点进行重选,实现频繁移动网络系统下的节点驻留重选,实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, the second node assists the first node in reselecting the second node by using node reselection information, thereby realizing node reselection in a frequent mobility network system and achieving efficient mobility management.

下面对类型信息、覆盖信息、路径信息和有效信息进行具体说明。The following provides a detailed explanation of type information, coverage information, path information, and valid information.

类型信息,可以用于指示第二节点的类型。其中,第二节点的类型可以包括以下之一项:第二节点支持TN、第二节点支持NTN、第二节点支持移动、或者第二节点不支持移动。Type information can be used to indicate the type of the second node. The type of the second node can include one of the following: the second node supports TN, the second node supports NTN, the second node supports mobile, or the second node does not support mobile.

可见,第二节点可以通过类型信息将第二节点的类型告诉给第一节点,以便第一节点可以根据类型信息对第二节点进行重选。As can be seen, the second node can tell the first node its type through type information, so that the first node can reselect the second node based on the type information.

需要说明的是,第二节点支持TN,可以理解为,第二节点位于地面/陆地或者第二节点属于TN系统等,例如第二节点为TN IAB-donor或者TN mIAB-donor。第二节点支持NTN,可以理解为,第二节点位于非地面(空中)或者第二节点属于NTN系统等,例如第二节点为NTN IAB-donor或者NTN mIAB-donor。第二节点支持移动,可以理解为,第二节点的位置可以移动,例如第二节点为mIAB-donor。第二节点不支持移动,可以理解为,第二节点的位置是固定的,例如第二节点为非mIAB-donor或者IAB-donor或者静止/固定IAB-donor(fixed IAB-donor)。这样,第一节点可以根据第二节点的类型进行节点驻留重选。例如,若第二节点为NTN mIAB-donor、而NTN mIAB-donor因移动而存在覆盖范围变化,则第一节点可以从原驻留的NTN mIAB-donor重选TN IAB-donor进行驻留。It should be noted that the second node supports TN, which means the second node is located on the ground/land or belongs to the TN system, such as a TN IAB-donor or a TN miIAB-donor. The second node supports NTN, which means the second node is located off-ground (in the air) or belongs to the NTN system, such as an NTN IAB-donor or an NTN miIAB-donor. The second node supports movement, meaning its location can be moved, such as a miIAB-donor. The second node does not support movement, meaning its location is fixed, such as a non-mIAB-donor, an IAB-donor, or a stationary/fixed IAB-donor. In this way, the first node can reselect its node based on the type of the second node. For example, if the second node is an NTN mIAB-donor, and the coverage of the NTN mIAB-donor changes due to relocation, the first node can reselect a TN IAB-donor from the original NTN mIAB-donor to reside in.

覆盖信息,可以用于指示第二节点的服务覆盖。Coverage information can be used to indicate the service coverage of the second node.

可见,第二节点可以通过覆盖信息将第二节点的服务覆盖告诉给第一节点,以便第一节点可以根据覆盖信息对第二节点进行重选。As can be seen, the second node can inform the first node of its service coverage through coverage information, so that the first node can reselect the second node based on the coverage information.

在一些可能的示例中,覆盖信息包括第二节点的参考位置和距离门限、和/或第二节点的服务有效时间信息和服务有效时间门限。其中,第二节点的覆盖范围为与第二节点的参考位置之间的距离小于距离门限所在的范围。In some possible examples, coverage information includes the reference location and distance threshold of the second node, and/or the service validity time information and service validity time threshold of the second node. The coverage area of the second node is the range where the distance between the second node and its reference location is less than the distance threshold.

需要说明的是,第二节点的参考位置可以表示第二节点所在的地理位置。第二节点可以有一个或多个参考位置。当第二节点位于地面/陆地(如TN IAB-donor)时,第二节点的参考位置可以根据频繁移动网络系统的位置部署确定,且第二节点的参考位置是固定的。这样,第一节点可以根据自身位置与第二节点的参考位置之间的距离是否小于距离门限,来确定第一节点是否在第二节点的覆盖范围内。其中,若第一节点的位置与第二节点的参考位置之间的距离小于距离门限,则第一节点在第二节点的覆盖范围内。若第一节点的位置与第二节点的参考位置之间的距离大于或等于距离门限,则第一节点可能不在第二节点的覆盖范围内,此时第一节点需要进行节点驻留重选。It should be noted that the reference location of the second node can represent its geographical location. The second node can have one or more reference locations. When the second node is located on the ground/land (e.g., TN IAB-donor), its reference location can be determined based on the location deployment of the frequent mobility network system, and this reference location is fixed. Thus, the first node can determine whether it is within the coverage area of the second node based on whether the distance between its own location and the second node's reference location is less than a distance threshold. Specifically, if the distance between the first node's location and the second node's reference location is less than the distance threshold, then the first node is within the second node's coverage area. If the distance between the first node's location and the second node's reference location is greater than or equal to the distance threshold, then the first node may not be within the second node's coverage area, and in this case, the first node needs to perform a node reselection.

第二节点的服务有效时间信息可以表示第二节点能够为第一节点提供服务的有效时间。这样,第一节点可以根据第二节点的服务有效时间信息所指示的服务有效时间是否小于服务有效时间门限,或者根据第二节点的服务有效时间信息所指示的服务有效时间是否结束,来确定第二节点是否能继续为第一节点提供接入服务。其中,若第二节点的服务有效时间信息所指示的服务有效时间大于或等于服务有效时间门限、或者第二节点的服务有效时间信息所指示的服务有效时间未结束,则确定第二节点能继续为第一节点提供接入服务。若第二节点的服务有效时间信息所指示的服务有效时间小于服务有效时间门限、或者第二节点的服务有效时间信息所指示的服务有效时间已经结束,则确定第二节点不能继续为第一节点提供接入服务,此时第一节点需要进行节点驻留重选。The service validity period information of the second node indicates the valid time during which the second node can provide services to the first node. Thus, the first node can determine whether the second node can continue to provide access services based on whether the service validity period indicated by the second node's service validity period information is less than a service validity period threshold, or whether the service validity period indicated by the second node's service validity period information has ended. Specifically, if the service validity period indicated by the second node's service validity period information is greater than or equal to the service validity period threshold, or if the service validity period indicated by the second node's service validity period information has not ended, then it is determined that the second node can continue to provide access services to the first node. If the service validity period indicated by the second node's service validity period information is less than the service validity period threshold, or if the service validity period indicated by the second node's service validity period information has ended, then it is determined that the second node cannot continue to provide access services to the first node, and the first node needs to perform node reselection.

在一些可能的示例中,覆盖信息包括以下至少一项:第二节点的卫星星历信息、第二节点的服务有效时间信息和服务有效时间门限、第二节点的覆盖区域信息、或者第二节点所关联的核心网锚点的参考位置信息。In some possible examples, the coverage information includes at least one of the following: satellite ephemeris information of the second node, service validity time information and service validity time threshold of the second node, coverage area information of the second node, or reference location information of the core network anchor point associated with the second node.

需要说明的是,当第二节点位于非地面(如NTN IAB-donor)时,覆盖信息可以包括第二节点的卫星星历信息(如卫星的位置、速度、轨道等)、第二节点的服务有效时间信息和服务有效时间门限、第二节点的覆盖区域信息(如波位等)、第二节点所关联的核心网锚点的参考位置信息等中的至少一项。其中,核心网锚点的参考位置信息可以包括NTN网关的参考位置。It should be noted that when the second node is located outside the ground (such as an NTN IAB-donor), the coverage information may include at least one of the following: the second node's satellite ephemeris information (such as satellite position, velocity, orbit, etc.), the second node's service validity time information and service validity time threshold, the second node's coverage area information (such as spectral position, etc.), and the reference location information of the core network anchor point associated with the second node. The reference location information of the core network anchor point may include the reference location of the NTN gateway.

路径信息,可以用于指示第二节点的传输路径。Path information can be used to indicate the transmission path of the second node.

可见,第二节点可以通过路径信息将第二节点的传输路径告诉给第一节点,以便第一节点可以根据路径信息对第二节点进行重选。As can be seen, the second node can tell the first node its transmission path through the path information, so that the first node can reselect the second node based on the path information.

在一些可能的示例中,路径信息包括以下至少一项:第一跳数(the number of hops)信息、第二跳数信息、第一时延信息、第二时延信息、第一距离信息、或者第二距离信息。In some possible examples, the path information includes at least one of the following: the number of hops, the number of hops, the first delay, the second delay, the first distance, or the second distance.

第一跳数信息可以用于指示在第二节点所服务的节点到第二节点的传输路径上的跳数。需要说明的是,在第二节点所服务的节点到第二节点的传输路径上的跳数,可以理解为,数据从第二节点所服务的节点到第二节点所经过的中转节点的数量,即中转次数。其中,第二节点所服务的节点包括第一节点。这样,第二节点可以通过第一跳数信息向第一节点告知在第一节点到第二节点的传输路径上的跳数,以便第一节点可以根据该跳数确定是否进行节点驻留重选。例如,当该跳数大于第一跳数门限时,第一节点进行节点驻留重选。The first hop count information can be used to indicate the number of hops on the transmission path from the node served by the second node to the second node itself. It should be noted that the number of hops on the transmission path from the node served by the second node to the second node can be understood as the number of intermediate nodes through which data passes from the node served by the second node to the second node, i.e., the number of hops. The nodes served by the second node include the first node. Thus, the second node can use the first hop count information to inform the first node of the number of hops on the transmission path from the first node to the second node, so that the first node can determine whether to perform node reselection based on this number. For example, when the number of hops exceeds the first hop count threshold, the first node performs node reselection.

第二跳数信息可以用于指示在第二节点所服务的终端设备到第二节点的传输路径上的跳数。需要说明的是,在第二节点所服务的终端设备到第二节点的传输路径上的跳数,可以理解为,数据从第二节点所服务的终端设备到第二节点所经过的中转节点的数量,即中转次数。这样,第二节点可以通过第二跳数信息向终端设备告知在该终端设备到第二节点的传输路径上的跳数,以便终端设备可以根据该跳数确定是否进行节点驻留重选。例如,当该跳数大于第二跳数门限时,终端设备进行节点驻留重选。The second hop count information can be used to indicate the number of hops on the transmission path from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node. It should be noted that the number of hops on the transmission path from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node can be understood as the number of intermediate nodes through which data passes from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node, i.e., the number of hops. In this way, the second node can use the second hop count information to inform the terminal device of the number of hops on the transmission path from the terminal device to the second node, so that the terminal device can determine whether to perform node reselection based on this hop count. For example, when the hop count is greater than the second hop count threshold, the terminal device performs node reselection.

第一时延信息可以用于指示从第二节点所服务的节点到第二节点的传输时延。其中,第二节点所服务的节点包括第一节点。这样,第二节点可以通过第一时延信息向第一节点告知从第一节点到第二节点的传输时延,以便第一节点可以根据该传输时延确定是否进行节点驻留重选。例如,当该传输时延大于第一传输时域门限时,第一节点进行节点驻留重选。The first delay information can be used to indicate the transmission delay from the node served by the second node to the second node itself. The nodes served by the second node include the first node. Thus, the second node can use the first delay information to inform the first node of the transmission delay from the first node to the second node, so that the first node can determine whether to perform node reselection based on this transmission delay. For example, when the transmission delay is greater than a first transmission time domain threshold, the first node performs node reselection.

第二时延信息可以用于指示从第二节点所服务的终端设备到第二节点的传输时延。这样,第二节点可以通过第二时延信息向终端设备告知从该终端设备到第二节点的传输时延,以便终端设备可以根据该传输时延确定是否进行节点驻留重选。例如,当该传输时延大于第二传输时域门限时,终端设备进行节点驻留重选。The second delay information can be used to indicate the transmission delay from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node. In this way, the second node can inform the terminal device of the transmission delay from the terminal device to the second node through the second delay information, so that the terminal device can determine whether to perform node reselection based on the transmission delay. For example, when the transmission delay is greater than a second transmission time domain threshold, the terminal device performs node reselection.

第一距离信息可以用于指示从第二节点所服务的节点到第二节点的距离。其中,第二节点所服务的节点包括第一节点。这样,第二节点可以通过第一距离信息向第一节点告知从第一节点到第二节点的距离,以便第一节点可以根据该距离确定是否进行节点驻留重选。例如,当该距离大于第一距离门限时,第一节点进行节点驻留重选。The first distance information can be used to indicate the distance from the nodes served by the second node to the second node itself. The nodes served by the second node include the first node. Thus, the second node can use the first distance information to inform the first node of the distance from the first node to the second node, so that the first node can determine whether to perform node reselection based on this distance. For example, when the distance is greater than a first distance threshold, the first node performs node reselection.

第二距离信息可以用于指示从第二节点所服务的终端设备到第二节点的距离。这样,第二节点可以通过第二距离信息向终端设备告知从该终端设备到第二节点的距离,以便终端设备可以根据该距离确定是否进行节点驻留重选。例如,当该距离大于第二距离门限时,终端设备进行节点驻留重选。The second distance information can be used to indicate the distance from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node. In this way, the second node can use the second distance information to inform the terminal device of the distance from the terminal device to the second node, so that the terminal device can determine whether to perform node reselection based on this distance. For example, when the distance is greater than the second distance threshold, the terminal device performs node reselection.

有效信息,可以用于指示第二节点的F1接口有效时间。Valid information can be used to indicate the validity period of the F1 interface of the second node.

可见,第二节点可以通过有效信息将第二节点的F1接口有效时间告诉给第一节点,以便第一节点可以根据有效信息对第二节点进行重选。As can be seen, the second node can inform the first node of the validity period of its F1 interface through valid information, so that the first node can reselect the second node based on the valid information.

需要说明的是,第二节点可以通过F1接口连接第一节点。这样,第一节点可以根据第二节点的F1接口有效时间是否小于F1接口有效时间门限,或者根据第二节点的F1接口有效时间是否结束,来确定第二节点是否能继续为第一节点提供接入服务。其中,若第二节点的F1接口有效时间大于或等于F1接口有效时间门限、或者第二节点的F1接口有效时间未结束,则确定第二节点能继续为第一节点提供接入服务。若第二节点的F1接口有效时间小于F1接口有效时间门限、或者第二节点的F1接口有效时间已经结束,则确定第二节点不能继续为第一节点提供接入服务,此时第二节点需要进行节点驻留重选。It should be noted that the second node can connect to the first node via the F1 interface. In this way, the first node can determine whether the second node can continue to provide access services based on whether the validity period of the second node's F1 interface is less than the F1 interface validity period threshold, or whether the validity period of the second node's F1 interface has expired. Specifically, if the validity period of the second node's F1 interface is greater than or equal to the F1 interface validity period threshold, or if the validity period of the second node's F1 interface has not expired, then the second node can continue to provide access services to the first node. If the validity period of the second node's F1 interface is less than the F1 interface validity period threshold, or if the validity period of the second node's F1 interface has expired, then the second node cannot continue to provide access services to the first node, and in this case, the second node needs to perform node reselection.

在一些可能的示例中,有效信息包括有效时间段或者计时器;有效时间段为第二节点与第二节点所服务的节点之间的F1接口的有效时间段;计时器的运行时长为第二节点与第二节点所服务的节点之间的F1接口的有效时长。In some possible examples, valid information includes a valid time period or a timer; the valid time period is the valid time period of the F1 interface between the second node and the nodes served by the second node; the runtime of the timer is the valid duration of the F1 interface between the second node and the nodes served by the second node.

这样,通过有效时间段或者计时器确定第二节点的F1接口有效时间。In this way, the effective time of the F1 interface of the second node is determined by the effective time period or timer.

在一些可能的示例中,在S1801之后,该流程还包括如下步骤:In some possible examples, after S1801, the process also includes the following steps:

第一节点向第一节点所服务的子节点或者终端设备发送节点驻留重选信息。这样,第一节点所服务的子节点或者终端设备可以根据节点驻留重选信息确定是否进行节点驻留重选。The first node sends node residency reselection information to the child nodes or terminal devices it serves. In this way, the child nodes or terminal devices served by the first node can determine whether to perform node residency reselection based on the node residency reselection information.

例如,以第一节点为IAB-node、且IAB-node包含IAB-node DU和IAB-node MT为例,IAB-node DU可以向其所服务的子IAB-node或者终端设备发送节点驻留重选信息。For example, taking the first node as IAB-node, and IAB-node as containing IAB-node DU and IAB-node MT, IAB-node DU can send node reselection information to the child IAB-node or terminal device it serves.

在一些可能的示例中,在S1801之后,该流程还包括如下步骤:In some possible examples, after S1801, the process also includes the following steps:

第一节点根据节点驻留重选信息确定第三节点。The first node determines the third node based on the node reselection information.

这样,当第一节点驻留到第二节点时,第一节点根据节点驻留重选信息确定第三节点,从而选择向第三节点进行驻留,实现节点驻留重选。In this way, when the first node resides on the second node, the first node determines the third node based on the node residency reselection information, and thus chooses to reside on the third node, thereby realizing node residency reselection.

例如,以第一节点为IAB-node、且IAB-node包含IAB-node DU和IAB-node MT为例,IAB-node MT可以根据节点驻留重选信息确定第三节点。For example, taking the first node as IAB-node, and IAB-node containing IAB-node DU and IAB-node MT, IAB-node MT can determine the third node based on the node relocation information.

可选的,第一节点根据类型信息重选合适驻留的第三节点。例如,以第二节点为NTN mIAB-donor为例,第一节点从该NTN mIAB-donor重选TN IAB-donor进行驻留。Optionally, the first node may reselect a suitable third node to reside on based on the type information. For example, if the second node is an NTN mIAB-donor, the first node may reselect a TN IAB-donor from the NTN mIAB-donor to reside on.

可选的,第一节点根据覆盖信息重选合适驻留的第三节点。例如,若第一节点的位置与第二节点的参考位置之间的距离大于或等于距离门限,则第一节点可能不在第二节点的覆盖范围内,此时第一节点重选合适驻留的第三节点。又例如,若第二节点的服务有效时间信息所指示的服务有效时间小于服务有效时间门限、或者第二节点的服务有效时间信息所指示的服务有效时间已经结束,则确定第二节点不能继续为该第一节点提供接入服务,此时第一节点重选合适驻留的IAB-donor。Optionally, the first node may reselect a suitable third node to reside on based on coverage information. For example, if the distance between the location of the first node and the reference location of the second node is greater than or equal to a distance threshold, the first node may not be within the coverage area of the second node, and in this case, the first node may reselect a suitable third node to reside on. As another example, if the service validity period indicated by the service validity period information of the second node is less than the service validity period threshold, or if the service validity period indicated by the service validity period information of the second node has expired, it is determined that the second node cannot continue to provide access service to the first node, and in this case, the first node may reselect a suitable IAB-donor to reside on.

可选的,第一节点根据该路径信息重选合适驻留的第三节点。例如,若第一节点到第二节点的传输路径上的跳数大于第一跳数门限,则第一节点重选合适驻留的第三节点。又例如,若第一节点到第二节点的传输时延大于第一传输时域门限,则第一节点重选合适驻留的第三节点。又例如,若第一节点到第二节点的距离单大于第一距离门限,则第一节点重选合适驻留的第三节点。Optionally, the first node may reselect a suitable third node to reside on based on the path information. For example, if the number of hops on the transmission path from the first node to the second node is greater than a first hop count threshold, the first node may reselect a suitable third node to reside on. Similarly, if the transmission delay from the first node to the second node is greater than a first transmission time threshold, the first node may reselect a suitable third node to reside on. Furthermore, if the distance from the first node to the second node is greater than a first distance threshold, the first node may reselect a suitable third node to reside on.

下面以第一节点为IAB-node、第二节点为第一IAB-donor为例,对图18进行示例说明。The following example illustrates Figure 18, with the first node being the IAB-node and the second node being the first IAB-donor.

第一IAB-donor给其服务范围内的一个或者多个IAB-node发送节点驻留重选信息,发送方式可以是单播、多播、广播,如通过RRC消息、F1-AP消息、Xn-AP消息等携带节点驻留重选信息。其中,节点驻留重选信息包括以下至少一项:类型信息、覆盖信息、路径信息、或者有效信息。The first IAB-donor sends node relocation information to one or more IAB-nodes within its service range. The sending method can be unicast, multicast, or broadcast, such as carrying node relocation information via RRC messages, F1-AP messages, or Xn-AP messages. The node relocation information includes at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or validity information.

对于类型信息,类型信息可以用于指示第一IAB-donor为TN IAB-donor、NTN donor、静止IAB-donor或者mIAB-donor中的之一项。Regarding type information, type information can be used to indicate that the first IAB-donor is one of TN IAB-donor, NTN donor, stationary IAB-donor, or mIAB-donor.

对于覆盖信息,若第一IAB-donor为TN IAB-donor,则覆盖信息可以包括一个或者多个TN IAB-donor的参考位置和距离门限。其中,与TN IAB-donor的参考位置之间的距离小于或者等于距离门限的范围都属于该TN IAB-donor的覆盖范围。若第一IAB-donor为NTN IAB-donor,则覆盖信息可以包括NTN IAB-donor的卫星星历信息(即卫星的位置、速度、轨道等)、服务有效时间信息、覆盖区域信息、该NTN IAB-donor关联的核心网锚点的参考位置信息等。For coverage information, if the first IAB-donor is a TN IAB-donor, the coverage information may include the reference positions and distance thresholds of one or more TN IAB-donors. Specifically, the range where the distance to the reference position of a TN IAB-donor is less than or equal to the distance threshold belongs to the coverage area of that TN IAB-donor. If the first IAB-donor is an NTN IAB-donor, the coverage information may include the satellite ephemeris information (i.e., satellite position, velocity, orbit, etc.), service validity period information, coverage area information, and the reference position information of the core network anchor point associated with that NTN IAB-donor.

对于路径信息,路径信息可以包括跳数、时延、距离等信息,用于指示第一IAB-donor所服务的IAB-node节点或UE到第一IAB-donor的传输路径所包含的跳数、时延和距离等信息。The path information may include hop count, latency, distance, etc., which are used to indicate the hop count, latency, and distance of the transmission path from the IAB-node served by the first IAB-donor or the UE to the first IAB-donor.

对于有效信息,有效信息可以包括第一IAB-donor与第一IAB-donor所服务的IAB-node之间的F1接口的有效时间段或者计时器。For valid information, it may include the valid time period or timer of the F1 interface between the first IAB-donor and the IAB-node served by the first IAB-donor.

第一IAB-donor所服务的IAB-node DU可以接收节点驻留重选信息,并向其服务的子IAB-node和/或UE发送节点驻留重选信息,发送方式可以是单播、多播、广播,如通过RRC消息、Uu消息等携带节点驻留重选信息。这样,通过节点驻留重选信息辅助其服务的子IAB-node节点和/或UE进行节点驻留重选。The IAB-node DU served by the first IAB-donor can receive node reselection information and send it to its served child IAB-nodes and/or UEs. The sending method can be unicast, multicast, or broadcast, such as carrying node reselection information through RRC messages or Uu messages. In this way, the node reselection information assists the served child IAB-nodes and/or UEs in performing node reselection.

第一IAB-donor所服务的IAB-node MT可以接收节点驻留重选信息,并根据重选信息重选合适驻留的IAB-donor。The IAB-node MT served by the first IAB-donor can receive node relocation reselection information and reselect a suitable IAB-donor to reside in based on the reselection information.

可选的,该IAB-node MT根据类型信息重选合适驻留的IAB-donor。例如,以第一IAB-donor为NTN mIAB-donor为例,该IAB-node MT从该NTN mIAB-donor重选TN IAB-donor进行接入。Optionally, the IAB-node MT may reselect a suitable IAB-donor based on the type information. For example, if the first IAB-donor is an NTN mIAB-donor, the IAB-node MT may reselect a TN IAB-donor from the NTN mIAB-donor for access.

可选的,该IAB-node MT根据覆盖信息重选合适驻留的IAB-donor。例如,若该IAB-node MT的位置与第一IAB-donor的参考位置之间的距离大于或等于距离门限,则该IAB-node MT可能不在第一IAB-donor的覆盖范围内,此时该IAB-node MT重选合适驻留的IAB-donor。又例如,若第一IAB-donor的服务有效时间信息所指示的服务有效时间小于服务有效时间门限、或者第一IAB-donor的服务有效时间信息所指示的服务有效时间已经结束,则确定第一IAB-donor不能继续为该IAB-node MT提供接入服务,此时该IAB-node MT重选合适驻留的IAB-donor。Optionally, the IAB-node MT may reselect a suitable IAB-donor based on coverage information. For example, if the distance between the location of the IAB-node MT and the reference location of the first IAB-donor is greater than or equal to a distance threshold, the IAB-node MT may not be within the coverage area of the first IAB-donor, and in this case, the IAB-node MT may reselect a suitable IAB-donor. As another example, if the service validity period indicated by the service validity period information of the first IAB-donor is less than the service validity period threshold, or if the service validity period indicated by the service validity period information of the first IAB-donor has ended, it is determined that the first IAB-donor cannot continue to provide access service to the IAB-node MT, and in this case, the IAB-node MT may reselect a suitable IAB-donor.

可选的,该IAB-node MT根据该路径信息重选合适驻留的IAB-donor。例如,若该IAB-node MT到第一IAB-donor的传输路径上的跳数大于第一跳数门限,则该IAB-node MT重选合适驻留的IAB-donor。又例如,若该IAB-node MT到第一IAB-donor的传输时延大于第一传输时域门限,则该IAB-node MT重选合适驻留的IAB-donor。又例如,若该IAB-node MT到第一IAB-donor的距离单大于第一距离门限,则该IAB-node MT重选合适驻留的IAB-donor。Optionally, the IAB-node MT can reselect a suitable IAB-donor based on the path information. For example, if the number of hops on the transmission path from the IAB-node MT to the first IAB-donor is greater than a first hop count threshold, the IAB-node MT will reselect a suitable IAB-donor. Similarly, if the transmission delay from the IAB-node MT to the first IAB-donor is greater than a first transmission time threshold, the IAB-node MT will reselect a suitable IAB-donor. Furthermore, if the distance from the IAB-node MT to the first IAB-donor is greater than a first distance threshold, the IAB-node MT will reselect a suitable IAB-donor.

需要说明的是,对于IAB-node DU所服务的子IAB-node MT侧,子IAB-node MT可以接收来自IAB-node DU的节点驻留重选信息,并根据重选信息重选合适驻留的IAB-donor或者IAB-node,对此不再赘述。It should be noted that, for the sub-IAB-node MT side served by the IAB-node DU, the sub-IAB-node MT can receive node relocation reselection information from the IAB-node DU, and reselect a suitable IAB-donor or IAB-node to reside in based on the reselection information. This will not be elaborated further.

如图19所示,图19为本实施例的又一种频繁移动网络系统下的节点驻留重选方法的流程示意图。As shown in Figure 19, Figure 19 is a flowchart illustrating another node relocation method in a frequently moving network system according to this embodiment.

其中,图19包括如下步骤:Figure 19 includes the following steps:

S1901.第二节点向终端设备发送节点驻留重选信息。S1901. The second node sends node reselection information to the terminal device.

对应的,终端设备接收节点驻留重选信息,以及根据节点驻留重选信息对第二节点进行节点驻留重选。Correspondingly, the terminal device receives node relocation information and performs node relocation relocation for the second node based on the node relocation information.

其中,节点驻留重选信息用于指示以下至少一项:类型信息、覆盖信息、或者路径信息。The node residency reselection information is used to indicate at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, or path information.

需要说明的是,类型信息、覆盖信息和路径信息的解释可以详见上述图18中的描述,对此不再赘述。It should be noted that the explanations of type information, coverage information, and path information can be found in the description in Figure 18 above, and will not be repeated here.

可见,第二节点通过节点驻留重选信息来辅助终端设备对第二节点进行节点驻留重选。It is evident that the second node assists the terminal device in reselecting the node's relocation information.

在一些可能的示例中,在S1901之后,该流程还包括如下步骤:In some possible examples, after S1901, the process also includes the following steps:

终端设备根据节点驻留重选信息确定第三节点。The terminal device determines the third node based on the node reselection information.

这样,当第二节点为终端设备提供接入服务时,终端设备根据节点驻留重选信息确定第三节点,从而选择向第三节点进行驻留,实现节点驻留重选。In this way, when the second node provides access services to the terminal device, the terminal device determines the third node based on the node relocation information, and then chooses to relocate to the third node, thus realizing node relocation.

可选的,终端设备根据类型信息重选合适驻留的第三节点。例如,以第二节点为NTN mIAB-donor为例,终端设备从该NTN mIAB-donor重选TN IAB-donor进行驻留。Optionally, the terminal device may reselect a suitable third node to reside on based on the type information. For example, if the second node is an NTN mIAB-donor, the terminal device may reselect a TN IAB-donor from the NTN mIAB-donor to reside on.

可选的,终端设备根据覆盖信息重选合适驻留的第三节点。例如,若终端设备的位置与第二节点的参考位置之间的距离大于或等于距离门限,则终端设备可能不在第二节点的覆盖范围内,此时终端设备重选合适驻留的第三节点。又例如,若第二节点的服务有效时间信息所指示的服务有效时间小于服务有效时间门限、或者第二节点的服务有效时间信息所指示的服务有效时间已经结束,则确定第二节点不能继续为该终端设备提供接入服务,此时终端设备重选合适驻留的IAB-donor。Optionally, the terminal device may reselect a suitable third node to reside on based on coverage information. For example, if the distance between the terminal device's location and the reference location of the second node is greater than or equal to a distance threshold, the terminal device may not be within the coverage area of the second node, and in this case, the terminal device may reselect a suitable third node to reside on. As another example, if the service validity period indicated by the service validity period information of the second node is less than the service validity period threshold, or if the service validity period indicated by the service validity period information of the second node has expired, it is determined that the second node cannot continue to provide access service to the terminal device, and in this case, the terminal device may reselect a suitable IAB-donor to reside on.

可选的,终端设备根据该路径信息重选合适驻留的第三节点。例如,若终端设备到第二节点的传输路径上的跳数大于第一跳数门限,则终端设备重选合适驻留的第三节点。又例如,若终端设备到第二节点的传输时延大于第一传输时域门限,则终端设备重选合适驻留的第三节点。又例如,若终端设备到第二节点的距离单大于第一距离门限,则终端设备重选合适驻留的第三节点。Optionally, the terminal device may reselect a suitable third node to reside on based on the path information. For example, if the number of hops on the transmission path from the terminal device to the second node is greater than a first hop count threshold, the terminal device may reselect a suitable third node to reside on. Similarly, if the transmission delay from the terminal device to the second node is greater than a first transmission time threshold, the terminal device may reselect a suitable third node to reside on. Furthermore, if the distance from the terminal device to the second node is greater than a first distance threshold, the terminal device may reselect a suitable third node to reside on.

在一些可能的示例中,在S1901之后,该流程还包括如下步骤:In some possible examples, after S1901, the process also includes the following steps:

终端设备根据节点驻留重选信息更新第二节点的PDCP层系统配置信息。The terminal device updates the PDCP layer system configuration information of the second node based on the node relocation information.

需要说明的是,若第二节点能继续为终端设备提供接入服务,则终端设备仅需要根据节点驻留重选信息更新第二节点的PDCP层配置信息,无需更新相关的PHY/MAC/RLC层配置信息。It should be noted that if the second node can continue to provide access services to the terminal device, the terminal device only needs to update the PDCP layer configuration information of the second node according to the node relocation information, and does not need to update the relevant PHY/MAC/RLC layer configuration information.

例如,若终端设备的位置与第二节点的参考位置之间的距离小于或等于距离门限,则终端设备可能在第二节点的覆盖范围内,确定第二节点能继续为终端设备提供接入服务,此时终端设备仅需要更新第二节点的PDCP层配置信息。For example, if the distance between the location of the terminal device and the reference location of the second node is less than or equal to the distance threshold, the terminal device may be within the coverage area of the second node. If the second node can continue to provide access services to the terminal device, the terminal device only needs to update the PDCP layer configuration information of the second node.

又例如,若第二节点的服务有效时间信息所指示的服务有效时间大于服务有效时间门限、或者第二节点的服务有效时间信息所指示的服务有效时间为结束,则确定第二节点能继续为终端设备提供接入服务,此时终端设备仅需要更新第二节点的PDCP层配置信息。For example, if the service validity period indicated by the service validity period information of the second node is greater than the service validity period threshold, or if the service validity period indicated by the service validity period information of the second node has ended, then it is determined that the second node can continue to provide access services to the terminal device. In this case, the terminal device only needs to update the PDCP layer configuration information of the second node.

如图20所示,图20为本实施例的又一种频繁移动网络系统下的节点驻留重选方法的流程示意图。As shown in Figure 20, Figure 20 is a flowchart illustrating another node relocation method in a frequently moving network system according to this embodiment.

其中,图20包括如下步骤:Figure 20 includes the following steps:

S2001.第一节点向终端设备发送节点驻留重选信息。S2001. The first node sends node reselection information to the terminal device.

对应的,终端设备接收节点驻留重选信息,以及根据节点驻留重选信息对第二节点进行节点驻留重选。Correspondingly, the terminal device receives node relocation information and performs node relocation relocation for the second node based on the node relocation information.

其中,节点驻留重选信息用于指示以下至少一项:类型信息、覆盖信息、或者路径信息。The node residency reselection information is used to indicate at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, or path information.

需要说明的是,类型信息、覆盖信息和路径信息的解释可以详见上述图18中的描述,对此不再赘述。It should be noted that the explanations of type information, coverage information, and path information can be found in the description in Figure 18 above, and will not be repeated here.

可见,第一节点通过节点驻留重选信息来辅助终端设备对第二节点进行节点驻留重选。It is evident that the first node assists the terminal device in reselecting the second node's node residency through node residency reselection information.

在一些可能的示例中,在S2001之后,该还包括如下步骤:In some possible examples, following S2001, the following steps are also included:

终端设备根据节点驻留重选信息确定第三节点。The terminal device determines the third node based on the node reselection information.

这样,当第一节点为终端设备提供接入服务时,终端设备根据节点驻留重选信息确定第三节点,从而选择向第三节点进行驻留,实现节点驻留重选。In this way, when the first node provides access services to the terminal device, the terminal device determines the third node based on the node relocation information, and then chooses to relocate to the third node, thus realizing node relocation.

在一些可能的示例中,在S2001之后,该流程还包括如下步骤:In some possible examples, after S2001, the process also includes the following steps:

终端设备根据节点驻留重选信息更新第一节点的PDCP层系统配置信息。The terminal device updates the PDCP layer system configuration information of the first node based on the node relocation information.

需要说明的是,若第一节点能继续为终端设备提供接入服务,则终端设备仅需要根据节点驻留重选信息更新第一节点的PDCP层配置信息,无需更新相关的PHY/MAC/RLC层配置信息。It should be noted that if the first node can continue to provide access services to the terminal device, the terminal device only needs to update the PDCP layer configuration information of the first node according to the node relocation information, and does not need to update the relevant PHY/MAC/RLC layer configuration information.

下面对本实施例的一种通信装置进行示例说明。The following is an example description of a communication device according to this embodiment.

上述主要从方法侧的角度对第一节点的方案进行了介绍,下面对本实施例的一种通信装置的功能单元进行示例说明。可以理解的是,第一节点为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本实施例能够以硬件或硬件与计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件或计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。本领域技术人员可以对每个特定的应用使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本实施例的范围。The above mainly describes the scheme of the first node from the methodological perspective. The following is an example illustration of the functional units of a communication device in this embodiment. It is understood that, in order to achieve the above functions, the first node includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to the execution of each function. Those skilled in the art should readily recognize that, in conjunction with the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in the embodiments disclosed herein, this embodiment can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed in hardware or by computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Those skilled in the art can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this embodiment.

本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对第一节点进行功能单元的划分。例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能单元,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件程序模块的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对单元的划分是示意性的,只是一种逻辑功能划分,而实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。This application embodiment can divide the first node into functional units according to the above method example. For example, each function can be divided into different functional units, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing unit. The integrated unit can be implemented in hardware or as a software program module. It should be noted that the unit division in this application embodiment is illustrative and only represents a logical functional division, while other division methods may be used in actual implementation.

在采用集成的单元的情况下,图21是本申请实施例的一种通信装置的功能单元组成框图。其中,通信装置2100包括接收单元2101。In the case of using integrated units, FIG21 is a functional unit composition block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 2100 includes a receiving unit 2101.

可选的,接收单元2101可以是一种用于对信号、信息等进行接收处理的模块单元,对此不作具体限制。Optionally, the receiving unit 2101 can be a module unit for receiving and processing signals, information, etc., and there are no specific limitations on this.

可选的,通信装置2100还可以发送单元。其中,发送单元可以是一种用于对信号、信息等进行发送处理的模块单元,对此不作具体限制。Optionally, the communication device 2100 may also include a transmitting unit. The transmitting unit can be a module unit used for transmitting signals, information, etc., and there are no specific limitations on this.

可选的,通信装置2100还可以包括存储单元,用于存储通信装置2100所执行的计算机程序代码或者指令。其中,存储单元可以是存储器。Optionally, the communication device 2100 may further include a storage unit for storing computer program code or instructions executed by the communication device 2100. The storage unit may be a memory.

可选的,通信装置2100可以是芯片或者芯片模组。Optionally, the communication device 2100 may be a chip or a chip module.

可选的,接收单元2101可以集成在同一个单元中,可以集成在不同单元中。Optionally, the receiving unit 2101 can be integrated into the same unit or into different units.

例如,接收单元2101可以集成在通信单元中。其中,通信单元可以是通信接口、收发器、收发电路等。For example, the receiving unit 2101 can be integrated into the communication unit. The communication unit can be a communication interface, transceiver, transceiver circuit, etc.

可选的,通信装置2100还可以包括处理单元。Optionally, the communication device 2100 may also include a processing unit.

需要说明的是,处理单元可以是处理器或控制器,例如可以是基带处理器、基带芯片、中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)、通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。其可以实现或执行结合本实施例公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框、模块和电路。处理单元也可以是实现计算功能的组合,例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合、DSP和微处理器的组合等。It should be noted that the processing unit can be a processor or controller, such as a baseband processor, baseband chip, central processing unit (CPU), general-purpose processor, digital signal processor (DSP), application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), field-programmable gate array (FPGA), or other programmable logic device, transistor logic device, hardware component, or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute the various exemplary logic blocks, modules, and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of this embodiment. The processing unit can also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as including one or more microprocessor combinations, a combination of DSP and microprocessor, etc.

可选的,通信装置2100用于执行如上述方法实施例中由第一节点/芯片/芯片模组等执行的任一步骤等。Optionally, the communication device 2100 is used to perform any of the steps performed by the first node/chip/chip module, etc., as described in the above method embodiments.

具体实现时,接收单元2101用于执行如上述方法实施例中的任一步骤,且在执行诸如发送等动作时,可选择的调用其他单元来完成相应操作。下面进行详细说明。In specific implementation, the receiving unit 2101 is used to perform any of the steps in the above method embodiments, and when performing actions such as sending, it can selectively call other units to complete the corresponding operations. A detailed description follows.

在一些可能的示例中,接收单元2101用于:In some possible examples, the receiving unit 2101 is used for:

接收来自第二节点的切换信息,切换信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。Receive switching information from the second node, the switching information is used to instruct the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第一节点、第二节点和第三节点,本实施例的第二节点通过切换信息告知第一节点将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。这样,通过第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,实现第一节点的第一功能单元的接入切换和第二功能单元的接入切换一起执行同一套切换流程,从而有利于减少信令开销、降低资源开销、缩短移动中断时间以及提高切换效率,实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the first, second, and third nodes in a frequently moving network system, the second node in this embodiment informs the first node via handover information to switch the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node. In this way, by switching the first and second functional units of the first node from the second node to the third node, the access handover of the first functional unit and the access handover of the second functional unit of the first node are performed using the same handover process. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, reduce resource consumption, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thereby achieving efficient mobility management.

可选的,切换信息包括以下至少一项:第一信息、第二信息、第三信息、第四信息、第五信息或者第六信息;Optionally, the switching information includes at least one of the following: first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information;

第一信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元切换到第三节点所需的回传适配协议地址;The first information is used to configure the backhaul adaptation protocol address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node.

第二信息用于配置第二节点到第三节点的传输路径;The second piece of information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node;

第三信息用于配置在第二节点到第三节点的传输路径上的资源;The third information is used to configure resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node;

第四信息用于配置回程无线电链路控制;The fourth piece of information is used to configure backhaul radio link control;

第五信息用于配置F1应用协议;The fifth piece of information is used to configure the F1 application protocol;

第六信息用于配置第一节点的第二功能单元。The sixth piece of information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.

可选的,第六信息包括以下至少一项:物理小区标识列表、资源配置信息、跟踪区标识配置信息、或者跟踪区代码配置信息。Optionally, the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: a list of physical cell identifiers, resource configuration information, tracking area identifier configuration information, or tracking area code configuration information.

可选的,若第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,则第一节点所服务的终端设备或者子节点从第二节点切换到第四节点,第四节点用于提供核心网连接功能或者第四节点用于提供回传接入功能。Optionally, if the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node switch from the second node to the third node, then the terminal equipment or sub-node served by the first node switches from the second node to the fourth node, whereby the fourth node is used to provide core network connection functions or to provide backhaul access functions.

可选的,通信装置2100还包括发送单元;Optionally, the communication device 2100 also includes a transmitting unit;

发送单元,用于向第二节点发送能力指示信息,能力指示信息用于指示第一节点支持或者不支持第一节点的第一功能单元和/或第一节点的第二功能单元进行接入切换。The sending unit is used to send capability indication information to the second node. The capability indication information is used to indicate whether the first node supports or does not support the access switching of the first functional unit and/or the second functional unit of the first node.

在一些可能的示例中,接收单元2101用于:In some possible examples, the receiving unit 2101 is used for:

接收来自第二节点的条件切换信息,条件切换信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。Receive condition switching information from the second node. The condition switching information is used to configure the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch conditions.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第一节点、第二节点和第三节点,本实施例通过条件切换信息告知第一节点对第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。这样,通过第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换,实现第一节点的第一功能单元的条件切换和第二功能单元的条件切换一起执行同一套切换流程,从而有利于减少信令开销、降低资源开销、缩短移动中断时间以及提高切换效率,实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the first, second, and third nodes in a frequently moving network system, this embodiment informs the first node to perform conditional handover of its first and second functional units through conditional handover information. In this way, by performing conditional handover of the first and second functional units of the first node, the conditional handover of the first and second functional units of the first node is executed together using the same handover process. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, lower resource consumption, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thereby achieving efficient mobility management.

可选的,条件切换信息包括以下至少一项:切换条件信息、第一信息、第二信息、第三信息、第四信息、第五信息或者第六信息;Optionally, the condition switching information includes at least one of the following: switching condition information, first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information;

切换条件信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点所需满足的条件,第三节点用于提供核心网连接功能;The switching condition information is used to indicate the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to meet to switch from the second node to the third node, and the third node is used to provide core network connectivity functions.

第一信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元切换到第三节点所需的BAP地址;The first information is used to configure the BAP address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node;

第二信息用于配置第二节点到第三节点的传输路径;The second piece of information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node;

第三信息用于配置在第二节点到第三节点的传输路径上的资源;The third information is used to configure resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node;

第四信息用于配置BH-RLC;The fourth piece of information is used to configure BH-RLC;

第五信息用于配置F1-AP;The fifth piece of information is used to configure F1-AP;

第六信息用于配置第一节点的第二功能单元。The sixth piece of information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.

可选的,切换条件信息所指示的条件包括:Optionally, the conditions indicated by the switching condition information include:

与第二节点的参考位置之间的距离大于第一距离门限,和/或与第三节点的参考位置之间的距离小于第二距离门限;和/或,The distance to the reference position of the second node is greater than the first distance threshold, and/or the distance to the reference position of the third node is less than the second distance threshold; and/or,

到第二节点的传输路径上有至少一个中继节点的BH-RLC有效时间小于有效时间门限。There is at least one relay node on the transmission path to the second node whose BH-RLC validity time is less than the validity time threshold.

可选的,在接收来自第二节点的条件切换命令之后,方法还包括:Optionally, after receiving the condition switching command from the second node, the method further includes:

若满足切换条件信息所指示的条件,则将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。If the conditions indicated by the switching condition information are met, the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node will be switched from the second node to the third node.

可选的,通信装置2100还包括发送单元;Optionally, the communication device 2100 also includes a transmitting unit;

发送单元,用于向第二节点发送能力指示信息,能力指示信息用于指示第一节点支持或者不支持第一节点的第一功能单元和/或第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。The sending unit is used to send capability indication information to the second node. The capability indication information is used to instruct the first node to support or not support the first functional unit and/or the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.

在一些可能的示例中,接收单元2101用于:In some possible examples, the receiving unit 2101 is used for:

接收节点驻留重选信息,节点驻留重选信息用于指示以下至少一项:类型信息、覆盖信息、路径信息、或者有效信息;Receive node residency reselection information, which indicates at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or valid information;

类型信息用于指示第二节点的类型,第二节点用于提供核心网连接功能;Type information is used to indicate the type of the second node, which is used to provide core network connectivity functions;

覆盖信息用于指示第二节点的服务覆盖;Coverage information is used to indicate the service coverage of the second node;

路径信息用于指示第二节点的传输路径;Path information is used to indicate the transmission path of the second node;

有效信息用于指示第二节点的F1接口有效时间。The valid information is used to indicate the validity period of the F1 interface of the second node.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第一节点和第二节点,当第一节点驻留到第二节点时,本实施例通过节点驻留重选信息辅助第一节点对第二节点进行重选,实现频繁移动网络系统下的节点驻留重选,以及实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the first node and the second node in a frequent mobility network system, when the first node camps on the second node, this embodiment assists the first node in reselecting the second node through node camp reselection information, thereby realizing node camp reselection in a frequent mobility network system and achieving efficient mobility management.

可选的,通信装置2100还包括发送单元;Optionally, the communication device 2100 also includes a transmitting unit;

发送单元,用于向第一节点所服务的子节点或者终端设备发送节点驻留重选信息。The sending unit is used to send node reselection information to the child nodes or terminal devices served by the first node.

可选的,通信装置2100还包括重选单元;Optionally, the communication device 2100 also includes a reselection unit;

重选单元,用于根据节点驻留重选信息确定第三节点,第三节点用于提供核心网连接功能。The reselection unit is used to determine the third node based on the node reselection information. The third node is used to provide core network connectivity.

可选的,覆盖信息包括第二节点的参考位置和距离门限、和/或第二节点的服务有效时间信息和服务有效时间门限;第二节点的覆盖范围为与第二节点的参考位置之间的距离小于距离门限所在的范围;或者,Optionally, the coverage information includes the reference location and distance threshold of the second node, and/or the service validity time information and service validity time threshold of the second node; the coverage area of the second node is the area where the distance between the second node and its reference location is less than the distance threshold; or,

覆盖信息包括以下至少一项:第二节点的卫星星历信息、第二节点的服务有效时间信息和服务有效时间门限、第二节点的覆盖区域信息、或者第二节点所关联的核心网锚点的参考位置信息。The coverage information includes at least one of the following: satellite ephemeris information of the second node, service validity time information and service validity time threshold of the second node, coverage area information of the second node, or reference location information of the core network anchor point associated with the second node.

可选的,路径信息包括以下至少一项:第一跳数信息、第二跳数信息、第一时延信息、第二时延信息、第一距离信息、或者第二距离信息;Optionally, the path information includes at least one of the following: first hop count information, second hop count information, first latency information, second latency information, first distance information, or second distance information;

第一跳数信息用于指示在第二节点所服务的节点到第二节点的传输路径上的跳数;The first hop count information is used to indicate the number of hops on the transmission path from the node served by the second node to the second node;

第二跳数信息用于指示在第二节点所服务的终端设备到第二节点的传输路径上的跳数;The second hop count information is used to indicate the number of hops on the transmission path from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node;

第一时延信息用于指示从第二节点所服务的节点到第二节点的传输时延;The first delay information is used to indicate the transmission delay from the node served by the second node to the second node;

第二时延信息用于指示从第二节点所服务的终端设备到第二节点的传输时延;The second delay information is used to indicate the transmission delay from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node;

第一距离信息用于指示从第二节点所服务的节点到第二节点的距离;The first distance information is used to indicate the distance from the node served by the second node to the second node;

第二距离信息用于指示从第二节点所服务的终端设备到第二节点的距离。The second distance information is used to indicate the distance from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node.

可选的,有效信息包括有效时间段或者计时器;Optional, valid information may include a valid time period or a timer;

有效时间段为第二节点与第二节点所服务的节点之间的F1接口的有效时间段;The valid time period is the valid time period of the F1 interface between the second node and the node served by the second node;

计时器的运行时长为第二节点与第二节点所服务的节点之间的F1接口的有效时长。The timer's runtime is the effective duration of the F1 interface between the second node and the nodes it serves.

需要说明的是,图21所述实施例中各个操作的具体实现可以详见上述所示的方法实施例中的描述,在此不再具体赘述。It should be noted that the specific implementation of each operation in the embodiment shown in Figure 21 can be found in the description of the method embodiment shown above, and will not be repeated here.

下面对本实施例的又一种通信装置进行示例说明。The following is an example description of another communication device in this embodiment.

上述主要从方法侧的角度对第二节点所涉及的方案进行了介绍,下面对本实施例的又一种通信装置的功能单元进行示例说明。可以理解的是,第二节点为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。The above mainly describes the solution involved in the second node from the methodological perspective. The following is an example illustrating the functional unit of another communication device in this embodiment. It is understood that, in order to achieve the above functions, the second node includes the corresponding hardware structure and/or software modules for executing each function.

在采用集成的单元的情况下,图22是本申请实施例的又一种通信装置的功能单元组成框图。其中,通信装置2200包括发送单元2201。In the case of using integrated units, FIG22 is a functional unit block diagram of another communication device according to an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 2200 includes a transmitting unit 2201.

可选的,发送单元2201可以是一种用于对信号、信息等进行发送处理的模块单元,对此不作具体限制。Optionally, the transmitting unit 2201 can be a module unit used for transmitting signals, information, etc., and there are no specific limitations on this.

可选的,通信装置2200还可以包括接收单元。其中,接收单元可以是一种用于对信号、信息等进行接收处理的模块单元,对此不作具体限制。Optionally, the communication device 2200 may also include a receiving unit. The receiving unit can be a module unit for receiving and processing signals, information, etc., and there are no specific limitations on this.

可选的,通信装置2200还可以包括存储单元,用于存储通信装置2200所执行的计算机程序代码或者指令。其中,存储单元可以是存储器。Optionally, the communication device 2200 may further include a storage unit for storing computer program code or instructions executed by the communication device 2200. The storage unit may be a memory.

可选的,通信装置2200可以是芯片或者芯片模组。Optionally, the communication device 2200 may be a chip or a chip module.

可选的,发送单元2201可以集成在通信单元中。其中,通信单元可以是通信接口、收发器、收发电路等。Optionally, the transmitting unit 2201 can be integrated into the communication unit. The communication unit can be a communication interface, transceiver, transceiver circuit, etc.

可选的,通信装置2200还可以包括处理单元。Optionally, the communication device 2200 may also include a processing unit.

需要说明的是,处理单元可以是处理器或控制器,例如可以是基带处理器、基带芯片、CPU、通用处理器、DSP、ASIC、FPGA或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。其可以实现或执行结合本实施例公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框、模块和电路。处理单元也可以是实现计算功能的组合,例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合、DSP和微处理器的组合等。It should be noted that the processing unit can be a processor or controller, such as a baseband processor, baseband chip, CPU, general-purpose processor, DSP, ASIC, FPGA, or other programmable logic device, transistor logic device, hardware component, or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute the various exemplary logic blocks, modules, and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of this embodiment. The processing unit can also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as including one or more microprocessor combinations, a combination of DSP and microprocessor, etc.

可选的,通信装置2200用于执行如上述方法实施例中由芯片/芯片模组/SMF等执行的任一步骤等。Optionally, the communication device 2200 is used to perform any of the steps performed by the chip/chip module/SMF, etc., as described in the above method embodiments.

具体实现时,发送单元2201用于执行如上述方法实施例中的任一步骤,且在执行诸如发送等动作时,可选择的调用其他单元来完成相应操作。下面进行详细说明。In specific implementation, the sending unit 2201 is used to perform any of the steps in the above method embodiments, and when performing actions such as sending, it can selectively call other units to complete the corresponding operations. A detailed description follows.

在一些可能的示例中,发送单元2201用于:In some possible examples, the sending unit 2201 is used for:

向第一节点发送切换信息,切换信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。A switching message is sent to the first node, which instructs the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第一节点、第二节点和第三节点,本实施例通过切换信息告知第一节点将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。这样,通过第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,实现第一节点的第一功能单元的接入切换和第二功能单元的接入切换一起执行同一套切换流程,从而有利于减少信令开销、降低资源开销、缩短移动中断时间以及提高切换效率,实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the first, second, and third nodes in a frequently moving network system, this embodiment informs the first node via handover information to switch its first functional unit and second functional unit from the second node to the third node. In this way, by switching the first and second functional units of the first node from the second node to the third node, the access handover of the first functional unit and the access handover of the second functional unit of the first node are performed using the same handover procedure. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, lower resource consumption, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thus achieving efficient mobility management.

可选的,通信装置2200包括接收单元;Optionally, the communication device 2200 includes a receiving unit;

发送单元2201,还用于向第三节点发送切换请求信息,切换请求信息用于请求将第一IAB节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点;The sending unit 2201 is also used to send a switching request information to the third node. The switching request information is used to request the first functional unit of the first IAB node and the second functional unit of the first node to be switched from the second node to the third node.

接收单元,用于接收来自第三节点的切换响应信息,切换响应信息用于指示准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。The receiving unit is used to receive handover response information from the third node. The handover response information is used to indicate that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node are permitted to switch from the second node to the third node.

可选的,通信装置2200包括接收单元:Optionally, the communication device 2200 includes a receiving unit:

接收单元,用于接收来自第一节点的能力指示信息,能力指示信息用于指示第一节点支持或者不支持第一节点的第一功能单元和/或第一节点的第二功能单元进行接入切换。The receiving unit is used to receive capability indication information from the first node. The capability indication information is used to indicate whether the first node supports or does not support the first functional unit and/or the second functional unit of the first node to perform access switching.

可选的,切换请求信息包括第一标识信息和第二标识信息;Optionally, the switching request information includes first identification information and second identification information;

第一标识信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元的标识,第二标识信息用于指示第一节点的第二功能单元的标识。The first identification information is used to indicate the identification of the first functional unit of the first node, and the second identification information is used to indicate the identification of the second functional unit of the first node.

可选的,切换请求信息还包括以下至少一项:第三标识信息、第一上下文信息、第四标识信息、或者第二上下文信息;Optionally, the handover request information may also include at least one of the following: third identification information, first context information, fourth identification information, or second context information;

第三标识信息用于指示第一节点所服务的终端设备的标识;The third identification information is used to indicate the identification of the terminal device served by the first node;

第一上下文信息用于指示第一节点所服务的终端设备的上下文;第四标识信息用于指示所第一节点所服务的子节点的第一功能单元的标识和第一节点所服务的子节点的第二功能单元的标识;The first context information is used to indicate the context of the terminal device served by the first node; the fourth identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the sub-node served by the first node and the identifier of the second functional unit of the sub-node served by the first node.

第二上下文信息用于指示第一节点所服务的子节点的上下文。The second context information is used to indicate the context of the child nodes served by the first node.

可选的,切换响应信息包括以下至少一项:第一信息、第二信息、第三信息、第四信息、第五信息、或者第六信息;Optionally, the switching response information includes at least one of the following: first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information;

第一信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元切换到第三节点所需的回传适配协议地址;The first information is used to configure the backhaul adaptation protocol address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node.

第二信息用于配置第二节点到第三节点的传输路径;The second piece of information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node;

第三信息用于配置在第二节点到第三节点的传输路径上的资源;The third information is used to configure resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node;

第四信息用于配置回程无线电链路控制;The fourth piece of information is used to configure backhaul radio link control;

第五信息用于配置F1应用协议;The fifth piece of information is used to configure the F1 application protocol;

第六信息用于配置第一节点的第二功能单元。The sixth piece of information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.

可选的,第六信息包括以下至少一项:物理小区标识列表、资源配置信息、跟踪区标识配置信息、或者跟踪区代码配置信息。Optionally, the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: a list of physical cell identifiers, resource configuration information, tracking area identifier configuration information, or tracking area code configuration information.

在一些可能的示例中,发送单元2201用于:In some possible examples, the sending unit 2201 is used for:

向第一节点发送条件切换信息,条件切换信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。Send condition switching information to the first node. The condition switching information is used to configure the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch conditions.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第一节点、第二节点和第三节点,本实施例通过条件切换信息告知第一节点对第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。这样,通过第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换,实现第一节点的第一功能单元的条件切换和第二功能单元的条件切换一起执行同一套切换流程,从而有利于减少信令开销、降低资源开销、缩短移动中断时间以及提高切换效率,实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the first, second, and third nodes in a frequently moving network system, this embodiment informs the first node to perform conditional handover of its first and second functional units through conditional handover information. In this way, by performing conditional handover of the first and second functional units of the first node, the conditional handover of the first and second functional units of the first node is executed together using the same handover process. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, lower resource consumption, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thereby achieving efficient mobility management.

可选的,发送单元2201还用于:Optionally, the transmitting unit 2201 is also used for:

向第三节点发送条件切换请求信息,条件切换请求信息用于请求第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换,第三节点用于提供核心网连接功能;Send a conditional switching request message to the third node. The conditional switching request message is used to request the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform conditional switching. The third node is used to provide core network connection functions.

接收来自第三节点的条件切换响应信息,条件切换响应信息用于指示准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。Receive condition switching response information from the third node. The condition switching response information is used to instruct the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.

可选的,通信装置2200还包括接收单元;Optionally, the communication device 2200 may also include a receiving unit;

接收单元,用于接收来自第一节点的能力指示信息,能力指示信息用于指示第一节点支持或者不支持第一节点的第一功能单元和/或第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。The receiving unit is used to receive capability indication information from the first node. The capability indication information is used to instruct the first node to support or not support the first functional unit and/or the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.

可选的,条件切换请求信息包括第一标识信息和第二标识信息;Optionally, the condition switching request information includes first identification information and second identification information;

第一标识信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元的标识,第二标识信息用于指示第一节点的第二功能单元的标识。The first identification information is used to indicate the identification of the first functional unit of the first node, and the second identification information is used to indicate the identification of the second functional unit of the first node.

可选的,条件切换请求信息还包括以下至少一项:第三标识信息、第一上下文信息、第四标识信息、或者第二上下文信息;Optionally, the condition switching request information may also include at least one of the following: third identification information, first context information, fourth identification information, or second context information;

第三标识信息用于指示第一节点所服务的终端设备的标识;The third identification information is used to indicate the identification of the terminal device served by the first node;

第一上下文信息用于指示第一节点所服务的终端设备的上下文;The first context information is used to indicate the context of the terminal device served by the first node;

第四标识信息用于指示第一节点所服务的子节点的第一功能单元的标识和第一节点所服务的子节点的第二功能单元的标识;The fourth identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the child node served by the first node and the identifier of the second functional unit of the child node served by the first node;

第二上下文信息用于指示第一节点所服务的子节点的上下文。The second context information is used to indicate the context of the child nodes served by the first node.

可选的,条件切换响应信息包括以下至少一项:切换条件信息、第一信息、第二信息、第三信息、第四信息、第五信息、或者第六信息;Optionally, the condition switching response information includes at least one of the following: switching condition information, first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information;

切换条件信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点所需满足的条件;The switching condition information is used to indicate the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node must meet to switch from the second node to the third node;

第一信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元切换到第三节点所需的BAP地址;The first information is used to configure the BAP address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node;

第二信息用于配置第二节点到第三节点的传输路径;The second piece of information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node;

第三信息用于配置在第二节点到第三节点的传输路径上的资源;The third information is used to configure resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node;

第四信息用于配置BH-RLC;The fourth piece of information is used to configure BH-RLC;

第五信息用于配置F1-AP;或者,The fifth piece of information is used to configure F1-AP; or,

第六信息用于配置第一节点的第二功能单元。The sixth piece of information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.

可选的,切换条件信息所指示的条件包括:Optionally, the conditions indicated by the switching condition information include:

与第二节点的参考位置之间的距离大于第一距离门限,和/或与第三节点的参考位置之间的距离小于第二距离门限;或者,The distance to the reference position of the second node is greater than the first distance threshold, and/or the distance to the reference position of the third node is less than the second distance threshold; or,

到第二节点的传输路径上有至少一个中继节点的BH-RLC有效时间小于有效时间门限。There is at least one relay node on the transmission path to the second node whose BH-RLC validity time is less than the validity time threshold.

在一些可能的示例中,发送单元2201用于:In some possible examples, the sending unit 2201 is used for:

发送节点驻留重选信息,节点驻留重选信息包括以下至少一项:类型信息、覆盖信息、路径信息、或者有效信息;Send node relocation information, which includes at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or valid information;

类型信息用于指示第二节点的类型;Type information is used to indicate the type of the second node;

覆盖信息用于指示第二节点的服务覆盖;Coverage information is used to indicate the service coverage of the second node;

路径信息用于指示第二节点的传输路径;Path information is used to indicate the transmission path of the second node;

有效信息用于指示第二节点的F1接口有效时间。The valid information is used to indicate the validity period of the F1 interface of the second node.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第一节点和第二节点,当第一节点驻留到第二节点时,本实施例通过节点驻留重选信息辅助第一节点对第二节点进行重选,实现频繁移动网络系统下的节点驻留重选,以及实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the first node and the second node in a frequent mobility network system, when the first node camps on the second node, this embodiment assists the first node in reselecting the second node through node camp reselection information, thereby realizing node camp reselection in a frequent mobility network system and achieving efficient mobility management.

可选的,覆盖信息包括第二节点的参考位置和距离门限、和/或第二节点的服务有效时间信息和服务有效时间门限;第二节点的覆盖范围为与第二节点的参考位置之间的距离小于距离门限所在的范围;或者,Optionally, the coverage information includes the reference location and distance threshold of the second node, and/or the service validity time information and service validity time threshold of the second node; the coverage area of the second node is the area where the distance between the second node and its reference location is less than the distance threshold; or,

覆盖信息包括以下至少一项:第二节点的卫星星历信息、第二节点的服务有效时间信息和服务有效时间门限、第二节点的覆盖区域信息、或者第二节点所关联的核心网锚点的参考位置信息。The coverage information includes at least one of the following: satellite ephemeris information of the second node, service validity time information and service validity time threshold of the second node, coverage area information of the second node, or reference location information of the core network anchor point associated with the second node.

可选的,路径信息包括以下至少一项:第一跳数信息、第二跳数信息、第一时延信息、第二时延信息、第一距离信息、或者第二距离信息;Optionally, the path information includes at least one of the following: first hop count information, second hop count information, first latency information, second latency information, first distance information, or second distance information;

第一跳数信息用于指示在第二节点所服务的节点到第二节点的传输路径上的跳数;The first hop count information is used to indicate the number of hops on the transmission path from the node served by the second node to the second node;

第二跳数信息用于指示在第二节点所服务的终端设备到第二节点的传输路径上的跳数;The second hop count information is used to indicate the number of hops on the transmission path from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node;

第一时延信息用于指示从第二节点所服务的节点到第二节点的传输时延;The first delay information is used to indicate the transmission delay from the node served by the second node to the second node;

第二时延信息用于指示从第二节点所服务的终端设备到第二节点的传输时延;The second delay information is used to indicate the transmission delay from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node;

第一距离信息用于指示从第二节点所服务的节点到第二节点的距离;The first distance information is used to indicate the distance from the node served by the second node to the second node;

第二距离信息用于指示从第二节点所服务的终端设备到第二节点的距离。The second distance information is used to indicate the distance from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node.

可选的,有效信息包括有效时间段或者计时器;Optional, valid information may include a valid time period or a timer;

有效时间段为第二节点与第二节点所服务的节点之间的F1接口的有效时间段;The valid time period is the valid time period of the F1 interface between the second node and the node served by the second node;

计时器的运行时长为第二节点与第二节点所服务的节点之间的F1接口的有效时长。The timer's runtime is the effective duration of the F1 interface between the second node and the nodes it serves.

需要说明的是,图22所述实施例中各个操作的具体实现可以详见上述所示的方法实施例中的描述,在此不再具体赘述。It should be noted that the specific implementation of each operation in the embodiment shown in Figure 22 can be found in the description of the method embodiment shown above, and will not be repeated here.

下面对本实施例的又一种通信装置进行示例说明。The following is an example description of another communication device in this embodiment.

上述主要从方法侧的角度对第三节点所涉及的方案进行了介绍,下面对本实施例的又一种通信装置的功能单元进行示例说明。可以理解的是,第三节点为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。The above mainly describes the solutions involved in the third node from the methodological perspective. The following section provides an example of another functional unit of the communication device in this embodiment. It is understood that, in order to achieve the above functions, the third node includes the corresponding hardware structure and/or software modules for executing each function.

在采用集成的单元的情况下,图23是本申请实施例的又一种通信装置的功能单元组成框图。其中,通信装置2300包括接收单元2301和发送单元2302。In the case of using integrated units, FIG23 is a functional unit block diagram of another communication device according to an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 2300 includes a receiving unit 2301 and a transmitting unit 2302.

可选的,接收单元2301可以是一种用于对信号、信息等进行接收处理的模块单元,对此不作具体限制Optionally, the receiving unit 2301 can be a module unit for receiving and processing signals, information, etc., and there are no specific limitations on this.

可选的,发送单元2302可以是一种用于对信号、信息等进行发送处理的模块单元,对此不作具体限制。Optionally, the transmitting unit 2302 can be a module unit used for transmitting signals, information, etc., and there are no specific limitations on this.

可选的,通信装置2300还可以包括存储单元,用于存储通信装置2300所执行的计算机程序代码或者指令。其中,存储单元可以是存储器。Optionally, the communication device 2300 may further include a storage unit for storing computer program code or instructions executed by the communication device 2300. The storage unit may be a memory.

可选的,通信装置2300可以是芯片或者芯片模组。Optionally, the communication device 2300 may be a chip or a chip module.

可选的,接收单元2301和发送单元2302可以集成在通信单元中。其中,通信单元可以是通信接口、收发器、收发电路等。Optionally, the receiving unit 2301 and the transmitting unit 2302 can be integrated into the communication unit. The communication unit can be a communication interface, transceiver, transceiver circuit, etc.

可选的,通信装置2300还可以包括处理单元。Optionally, the communication device 2300 may also include a processing unit.

需要说明的是,处理单元可以是处理器或控制器,例如可以是基带处理器、基带芯片、CPU、通用处理器、DSP、ASIC、FPGA或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。其可以实现或执行结合本实施例公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框、模块和电路。处理单元也可以是实现计算功能的组合,例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合、DSP和微处理器的组合等。It should be noted that the processing unit can be a processor or controller, such as a baseband processor, baseband chip, CPU, general-purpose processor, DSP, ASIC, FPGA, or other programmable logic device, transistor logic device, hardware component, or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute the various exemplary logic blocks, modules, and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of this embodiment. The processing unit can also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as including one or more microprocessor combinations, a combination of DSP and microprocessor, etc.

可选的,通信装置2300用于执行如上述方法实施例中由芯片/芯片模组/SMF等执行的任一步骤等。Optionally, the communication device 2300 is used to perform any of the steps performed by the chip/chip module/SMF, etc., as described in the above method embodiments.

具体实现时,接收单元2301和发送单元2302用于执行如上述方法实施例中的任一步骤,且在执行诸如发送等动作时,可选择的调用其他单元来完成相应操作。下面进行详细说明。In specific implementation, the receiving unit 2301 and the sending unit 2302 are used to perform any of the steps in the above method embodiments, and when performing actions such as sending, other units can be selectively invoked to complete the corresponding operation. A detailed description follows.

在一些可能的示例中,接收单元2301,用于接收来自第二节点的切换请求信息,切换请求信息用于请求将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点;In some possible examples, receiving unit 2301 is used to receive switching request information from the second node, the switching request information being used to request the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to be switched from the second node to the third node.

发送单元2302,用于向第二节点发送切换响应信息,切换响应信息用于指示准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。The sending unit 2302 is used to send a handover response information to the second node. The handover response information is used to indicate that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node are allowed to switch from the second node to the third node.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第一节点、第二节点和第三节点,本实施例的第二节点可以判决是否需要对第一节点进行接入切换。当第二节点决策需要将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点时,第二节点通过切换请求信息向第三节点请求将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,以便第三节点执行切换准入控制。这样,通过第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,实现第一节点的第一功能单元的接入切换和第二功能单元的接入切换一起执行同一套切换流程,从而有利于减少信令开销、降低资源开销、缩短移动中断时间以及提高切换效率,实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the first, second, and third nodes in a frequently moving network system, the second node in this embodiment can determine whether an access handover to the first node is necessary. When the second node decides that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to be switched from the second node to the third node, the second node requests the third node to switch the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node through a handover request message, so that the third node can perform handover admission control. In this way, by switching the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node, the access handover of the first functional unit and the access handover of the second functional unit of the first node are performed together using the same handover process, which helps to reduce signaling overhead, reduce resource overhead, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thereby achieving efficient mobility management.

可选的,切换请求信息包括第一标识信息和第二标识信息;Optionally, the switching request information includes first identification information and second identification information;

第一标识信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元的标识,第二标识信息用于指示第一节点的第二功能单元的标识。The first identification information is used to indicate the identification of the first functional unit of the first node, and the second identification information is used to indicate the identification of the second functional unit of the first node.

可选的,切换请求信息还包括以下至少一项:第三标识信息、第一上下文信息、第四标识信息、或者第二上下文信息;Optionally, the handover request information may also include at least one of the following: third identification information, first context information, fourth identification information, or second context information;

第三标识信息用于指示第一节点所服务的终端设备的标识;The third identification information is used to indicate the identification of the terminal device served by the first node;

第一上下文信息用于指示第一节点所服务的终端设备的上下文;第四标识信息用于指示所第一节点所服务的子节点的第一功能单元的标识和第一节点所服务的子节点的第二功能单元的标识;The first context information is used to indicate the context of the terminal device served by the first node; the fourth identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the sub-node served by the first node and the identifier of the second functional unit of the sub-node served by the first node.

第二上下文信息用于指示第一节点所服务的子节点的上下文。The second context information is used to indicate the context of the child nodes served by the first node.

可选的,切换响应信息包括以下至少一项:第一信息、第二信息、第三信息、第四信息、第五信息、或者第六信息;Optionally, the switching response information includes at least one of the following: first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information;

第一信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元切换到第三节点所需的回传适配协议地址;The first information is used to configure the backhaul adaptation protocol address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node.

第二信息用于配置第二节点到第三节点的传输路径;The second piece of information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node;

第三信息用于配置在第二节点到第三节点的传输路径上的资源;The third information is used to configure resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node;

第四信息用于配置回程无线电链路控制;The fourth piece of information is used to configure backhaul radio link control;

第五信息用于配置F1应用协议;The fifth piece of information is used to configure the F1 application protocol;

第六信息用于配置第一节点的第二功能单元。The sixth piece of information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.

可选的,第六信息包括以下至少一项:物理小区标识列表、资源配置信息、跟踪区标识配置信息、或者跟踪区代码配置信息。Optionally, the sixth piece of information includes at least one of the following: a list of physical cell identifiers, resource configuration information, tracking area identifier configuration information, or tracking area code configuration information.

在一些可能的示例中,接收单元2301,用于接收来自第二节点的条件切换请求信息,条件切换请求信息用于请求第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换;In some possible examples, receiving unit 2301 is used to receive condition switching request information from the second node, the condition switching request information being used to request the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.

发送单元2302,用于向第二节点发送条件切换响应信息,条件切换响应信息用于指示准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。The sending unit 2302 is used to send condition switching response information to the second node. The condition switching response information is used to instruct the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第一节点、第二节点和第三节点,本实施例的第二节点可以判决是否需要对第一节点进行条件切换。当第二节点决策需要将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换时,第二节点通过条件切换请求信息向第三节点请求第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换,以便第三节点执行条件切换准入控制。这样,通过第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换,实现第一节点的第一功能单元的条件切换和第二功能单元的条件切换一起执行同一套切换流程,从而有利于减少信令开销、降低资源开销、缩短移动中断时间以及提高切换效率,实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the first, second, and third nodes in a frequently moving network system, the second node in this embodiment can determine whether a conditional handover of the first node is necessary. When the second node decides that a conditional handover of the first node's first and second functional units is required, the second node requests the third node to perform the conditional handover of the first node's first and second functional units through a conditional handover request message, so that the third node can execute conditional handover admission control. In this way, by performing a conditional handover of the first node's first and second functional units, the conditional handover of the first node's first and second functional units can be executed together using the same handover process, thereby reducing signaling overhead, reducing resource overhead, shortening mobility interruption time, and improving handover efficiency, achieving efficient mobility management.

可选的,条件切换请求信息包括第一标识信息和第二标识信息;Optionally, the condition switching request information includes first identification information and second identification information;

第一标识信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元的标识,第二标识信息用于指示第一节点的第二功能单元的标识。The first identification information is used to indicate the identification of the first functional unit of the first node, and the second identification information is used to indicate the identification of the second functional unit of the first node.

可选的,条件切换请求信息还包括以下至少一项:第三标识信息、第一上下文信息、第四标识信息、或者第二上下文信息;Optionally, the condition switching request information may also include at least one of the following: third identification information, first context information, fourth identification information, or second context information;

第三标识信息用于指示第一节点所服务的终端设备的标识;The third identification information is used to indicate the identification of the terminal device served by the first node;

第一上下文信息用于指示第一节点所服务的终端设备的上下文;The first context information is used to indicate the context of the terminal device served by the first node;

第四标识信息用于指示第一节点所服务的子节点的第一功能单元的标识和第一节点所服务的子节点的第二功能单元的标识;The fourth identification information is used to indicate the identifier of the first functional unit of the child node served by the first node and the identifier of the second functional unit of the child node served by the first node;

第二上下文信息用于指示第一节点所服务的子节点的上下文。The second context information is used to indicate the context of the child nodes served by the first node.

可选的,条件切换响应信息包括以下至少一项:切换条件信息、第一信息、第二信息、第三信息、第四信息、第五信息、或者第六信息;Optionally, the condition switching response information includes at least one of the following: switching condition information, first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information;

切换条件信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点所需满足的条件;The switching condition information is used to indicate the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node must meet to switch from the second node to the third node;

第一信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元切换到第三节点所需的BAP地址;The first information is used to configure the BAP address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node;

第二信息用于配置第二节点到第三节点的传输路径;The second piece of information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node;

第三信息用于配置在第二节点到第三节点的传输路径上的资源;The third information is used to configure resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node;

第四信息用于配置BH-RLC;The fourth piece of information is used to configure BH-RLC;

第五信息用于配置F1-AP;或者,The fifth piece of information is used to configure F1-AP; or,

第六信息用于配置第一节点的第二功能单元。The sixth piece of information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node.

可选的,切换条件信息所指示的条件包括:Optionally, the conditions indicated by the switching condition information include:

与第二节点的参考位置之间的距离大于第一距离门限,和/或与第三节点的参考位置之间的距离小于第二距离门限;或者,The distance to the reference position of the second node is greater than the first distance threshold, and/or the distance to the reference position of the third node is less than the second distance threshold; or,

到第二节点的传输路径上有至少一个中继节点的BH-RLC有效时间小于有效时间门限。There is at least one relay node on the transmission path to the second node whose BH-RLC validity time is less than the validity time threshold.

需要说明的是,图23所述实施例中各个操作的具体实现可以详见上述所示的方法实施例中的描述,在此不再具体赘述。It should be noted that the specific implementation of each operation in the embodiment shown in Figure 23 can be found in the description of the method embodiment shown above, and will not be repeated here.

下面对本实施例的又一种通信装置进行示例说明。The following is an example description of another communication device in this embodiment.

上述主要从方法侧的角度对终端设备所涉及的方案进行了介绍,下面对本实施例的又一种通信装置的功能单元进行示例说明。可以理解的是,终端设备为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。The above mainly describes the solutions involved in the terminal device from the methodological perspective. The following section provides an example of the functional units of another communication device in this embodiment. It is understood that, in order to achieve the above functions, the terminal device includes the corresponding hardware structure and/or software modules for executing each function.

在采用集成的单元的情况下,图24是本申请实施例的又一种通信装置的功能单元组成框图。其中,通信装置2400包括接收单元2401。In the case of using integrated units, FIG24 is a functional unit block diagram of another communication device according to an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 2400 includes a receiving unit 2401.

可选的,接收单元2401可以是一种用于对信号、信息等进行接收处理的模块单元,对此不作具体限制。Optionally, the receiving unit 2401 can be a module unit for receiving and processing signals, information, etc., and there are no specific limitations on this.

可选的,通信装置2400还可以发送单元。其中,发送单元可以是一种用于对信号、信息等进行发送处理的模块单元,对此不作具体限制。Optionally, the communication device 2400 may also include a transmitting unit. This transmitting unit can be a module unit used for transmitting signals, information, etc., and there are no specific limitations on its use.

可选的,通信装置2400还可以包括存储单元,用于存储通信装置2400所执行的计算机程序代码或者指令。其中,存储单元可以是存储器。Optionally, the communication device 2400 may further include a storage unit for storing computer program code or instructions executed by the communication device 2400. The storage unit may be a memory.

可选的,通信装置2400可以是芯片或者芯片模组。Optionally, the communication device 2400 may be a chip or a chip module.

可选的,接收单元2401可以集成在通信单元中。其中,通信单元可以是通信接口、收发器、收发电路等。Optionally, the receiving unit 2401 can be integrated into the communication unit. The communication unit can be a communication interface, transceiver, transceiver circuit, etc.

可选的,通信装置2400还可以包括处理单元。Optionally, the communication device 2400 may also include a processing unit.

需要说明的是,处理单元可以是处理器或控制器,例如可以是基带处理器、基带芯片、CPU、通用处理器、DSP、ASIC、FPGA或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。其可以实现或执行结合本实施例公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框、模块和电路。处理单元也可以是实现计算功能的组合,例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合、DSP和微处理器的组合等。It should be noted that the processing unit can be a processor or controller, such as a baseband processor, baseband chip, CPU, general-purpose processor, DSP, ASIC, FPGA, or other programmable logic device, transistor logic device, hardware component, or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute the various exemplary logic blocks, modules, and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of this embodiment. The processing unit can also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as including one or more microprocessor combinations, a combination of DSP and microprocessor, etc.

可选的,通信装置2400用于执行如上述方法实施例中由芯片/芯片模组/SMF等执行的任一步骤等。Optionally, the communication device 2400 is used to perform any of the steps performed by the chip/chip module/SMF, etc., as described in the above method embodiments.

具体实现时,接收单元2401用于执行如上述方法实施例中的任一步骤,且在执行诸如发送等动作时,可选择的调用其他单元来完成相应操作。下面进行详细说明。In specific implementation, the receiving unit 2401 is used to perform any of the steps in the above method embodiments, and when performing actions such as sending, it can selectively call other units to complete the corresponding operations. A detailed description follows.

接收单元2401,用于接收节点驻留重选信息,节点驻留重选信息用于指示以下至少一项:类型信息、覆盖信息、路径信息、或者有效信息;The receiving unit 2401 is used to receive node relocation information, which indicates at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or valid information;

类型信息用于指示第二节点的类型,第二节点用于提供核心网连接功能;Type information is used to indicate the type of the second node, which is used to provide core network connectivity functions;

覆盖信息用于指示第二节点的服务覆盖;Coverage information is used to indicate the service coverage of the second node;

路径信息用于指示第二节点的传输路径;Path information is used to indicate the transmission path of the second node;

有效信息用于指示第二节点的F1接口有效时间。The valid information is used to indicate the validity period of the F1 interface of the second node.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第二节点和终端设备,当终端设备驻留到第二节点时,本实施例通过节点驻留重选信息辅助终端设备对第二节点进行重选,实现频繁移动网络系统下的节点驻留重选,以及实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the second node and terminal device in a frequent mobility network system, when the terminal device camps on the second node, this embodiment assists the terminal device in reselecting the second node through node camping reselection information, thereby realizing node camping reselection in a frequent mobility network system and achieving efficient mobility management.

可选的,通信装置2400还包括重选单元;Optionally, the communication device 2400 also includes a reselection unit;

重选单元,用于根据节点驻留重选信息确定第三节点。The reselection unit is used to determine the third node based on the node reselection information.

可选的,通信装置2400还包括更新单元;Optionally, the communication device 2400 also includes an update unit;

更新单元,用于根据节点驻留重选信息更新第一节点或所述第二节点的PDCP层配置信息。The update unit is used to update the PDCP layer configuration information of the first node or the second node based on the node residency reselection information.

可选的,覆盖信息包括第二节点的参考位置和距离门限、和/或第二节点的服务有效时间信息和服务有效时间门限;第二节点的覆盖范围为与第二节点的参考位置之间的距离小于距离门限所在的范围;或者,Optionally, the coverage information includes the reference location and distance threshold of the second node, and/or the service validity time information and service validity time threshold of the second node; the coverage area of the second node is the area where the distance between the second node and its reference location is less than the distance threshold; or,

覆盖信息包括以下至少一项:第二节点的卫星星历信息、第二节点的服务有效时间信息和服务有效时间门限、第二节点的覆盖区域信息、或者第二节点所关联的核心网锚点的参考位置信息。The coverage information includes at least one of the following: satellite ephemeris information of the second node, service validity time information and service validity time threshold of the second node, coverage area information of the second node, or reference location information of the core network anchor point associated with the second node.

可选的,路径信息包括以下至少一项:第一跳数信息、第二跳数信息、第一时延信息、第二时延信息、第一距离信息、或者第二距离信息;Optionally, the path information includes at least one of the following: first hop count information, second hop count information, first latency information, second latency information, first distance information, or second distance information;

第一跳数信息用于指示在第二节点所服务的节点到第二节点的传输路径上的跳数;The first hop count information is used to indicate the number of hops on the transmission path from the node served by the second node to the second node;

第二跳数信息用于指示在第二节点所服务的终端设备到第二节点的传输路径上的跳数;The second hop count information is used to indicate the number of hops on the transmission path from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node;

第一时延信息用于指示从第二节点所服务的节点到第二节点的传输时延;The first delay information is used to indicate the transmission delay from the node served by the second node to the second node;

第二时延信息用于指示从第二节点所服务的终端设备到第二节点的传输时延;The second delay information is used to indicate the transmission delay from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node;

第一距离信息用于指示从第二节点所服务的节点到第二节点的距离;The first distance information is used to indicate the distance from the node served by the second node to the second node;

第二距离信息用于指示从第二节点所服务的终端设备到第二节点的距离。The second distance information is used to indicate the distance from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node.

可选的,有效信息包括有效时间段或者计时器;Optional, valid information may include a valid time period or a timer;

有效时间段为第二节点与第二节点所服务的节点之间的F1接口的有效时间段;The valid time period is the valid time period of the F1 interface between the second node and the node served by the second node;

计时器的运行时长为第二节点与第二节点所服务的节点之间的F1接口的有效时长。The timer's runtime is the effective duration of the F1 interface between the second node and the nodes it serves.

下面对本实施例的一种节点的结构进行示例说明。The following is an example illustration of the structure of a node in this embodiment.

请参阅图25,图25是本申请实施例的一种节点的结构示意图。其中,节点2500可以包括处理器2510、存储器2520以及用于连接处理器2510和存储器2520的通信总线。Please refer to Figure 25, which is a schematic diagram of the structure of a node according to an embodiment of this application. The node 2500 may include a processor 2510, a memory 2520, and a communication bus for connecting the processor 2510 and the memory 2520.

可选的,存储器2520包括但不限于是随机存储记忆体(random access memory,RAM)、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory,EPROM)或便携式只读存储器(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM),存储器2520用于存储UPF2500所执行的程序代码和所传输的数据。Optionally, the memory 2520 may include, but is not limited to, random access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), or compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM). The memory 2520 is used to store the program code executed by the UPF2500 and the data transmitted.

可选的,节点2500还包括通信接口,其用于接收和发送数据。Optionally, Node 2500 also includes a communication interface for receiving and sending data.

可选的,节点2500可以为上述的第一UPF。Optionally, node 2500 can be the first UPF mentioned above.

可选的,处理器2510可以是一个或多个CPU,在处理器2510是一个CPU的情况下,该CPU可以是单核CPU,也可以是多核CPU。Optionally, the processor 2510 can be one or more CPUs. If the processor 2510 is a CPU, the CPU can be a single-core CPU or a multi-core CPU.

可选的,处理器2510可以为基带芯片、芯片、CPU、通用处理器、DSP、ASIC、FPGA或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。Optionally, the processor 2510 can be a baseband chip, chip, CPU, general-purpose processor, DSP, ASIC, FPGA or other programmable logic device, transistor logic device, hardware component or any combination thereof.

在一些可能的示例中,节点2500中的处理器2510用于执行存储器2520中存储的计算机程序或指令2521,执行以下操作:In some possible examples, the processor 2510 in node 2500 is used to execute a computer program or instruction 2521 stored in memory 2520, and to perform the following operations:

接收来自第二节点的切换信息,切换信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。Receive switching information from the second node, the switching information is used to instruct the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第一节点、第二节点和第三节点,本实施例的第二节点通过切换信息告知第一节点将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。这样,通过第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,实现第一节点的第一功能单元的接入切换和第二功能单元的接入切换一起执行同一套切换流程,从而有利于减少信令开销、降低资源开销、缩短移动中断时间以及提高切换效率,实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the first, second, and third nodes in a frequently moving network system, the second node in this embodiment informs the first node via handover information to switch the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node. In this way, by switching the first and second functional units of the first node from the second node to the third node, the access handover of the first functional unit and the access handover of the second functional unit of the first node are performed using the same handover process. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, reduce resource consumption, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thereby achieving efficient mobility management.

在一些可能的示例中,节点2500中的处理器2510用于执行存储器2520中存储的计算机程序或指令2521,执行以下操作:In some possible examples, the processor 2510 in node 2500 is used to execute a computer program or instruction 2521 stored in memory 2520, and to perform the following operations:

接收来自第二节点的条件切换信息,条件切换信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。Receive condition switching information from the second node. The condition switching information is used to configure the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch conditions.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第一节点、第二节点和第三节点,本实施例通过条件切换信息告知第一节点对第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。这样,通过第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换,实现第一节点的第一功能单元的条件切换和第二功能单元的条件切换一起执行同一套切换流程,从而有利于减少信令开销、降低资源开销、缩短移动中断时间以及提高切换效率,实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the first, second, and third nodes in a frequently moving network system, this embodiment informs the first node to perform conditional handover of its first and second functional units through conditional handover information. In this way, by performing conditional handover of the first and second functional units of the first node, the conditional handover of the first and second functional units of the first node is executed together using the same handover process. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, lower resource consumption, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thereby achieving efficient mobility management.

在一些可能的示例中,节点2500中的处理器2510用于执行存储器2520中存储的计算机程序或指令2521,执行以下操作:In some possible examples, the processor 2510 in node 2500 is used to execute a computer program or instruction 2521 stored in memory 2520, and to perform the following operations:

接收节点驻留重选信息,节点驻留重选信息用于指示以下至少一项:类型信息、覆盖信息、路径信息、或者有效信息;Receive node residency reselection information, which indicates at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or valid information;

类型信息用于指示第二节点的类型,第二节点用于提供核心网连接功能;Type information is used to indicate the type of the second node, which is used to provide core network connectivity functions;

覆盖信息用于指示第二节点的服务覆盖;Coverage information is used to indicate the service coverage of the second node;

路径信息用于指示第二节点的传输路径;Path information is used to indicate the transmission path of the second node;

有效信息用于指示第二节点的F1接口有效时间。The valid information is used to indicate the validity period of the F1 interface of the second node.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第一节点和第二节点,当第一节点驻留到第二节点时,本实施例通过节点驻留重选信息辅助第一节点对第二节点进行重选,实现频繁移动网络系统下的节点驻留重选,以及实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the first node and the second node in a frequent mobility network system, when the first node camps on the second node, this embodiment assists the first node in reselecting the second node through node camp reselection information, thereby realizing node camp reselection in a frequent mobility network system and achieving efficient mobility management.

在一些可能的示例中,节点2500中的处理器2510用于执行存储器2520中存储的计算机程序或指令2521,执行以下操作:In some possible examples, the processor 2510 in node 2500 is used to execute a computer program or instruction 2521 stored in memory 2520, and to perform the following operations:

向第一节点发送切换信息,切换信息用于指示第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。A switching message is sent to the first node, which instructs the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第一节点、第二节点和第三节点,本实施例通过切换信息告知第一节点将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。这样,通过第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,实现第一节点的第一功能单元的接入切换和第二功能单元的接入切换一起执行同一套切换流程,从而有利于减少信令开销、降低资源开销、缩短移动中断时间以及提高切换效率,实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the first, second, and third nodes in a frequently moving network system, this embodiment informs the first node via handover information to switch its first functional unit and second functional unit from the second node to the third node. In this way, by switching the first and second functional units of the first node from the second node to the third node, the access handover of the first functional unit and the access handover of the second functional unit of the first node are performed using the same handover procedure. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, lower resource consumption, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thus achieving efficient mobility management.

在一些可能的示例中,节点2500中的处理器2510用于执行存储器2520中存储的计算机程序或指令2521,执行以下操作:In some possible examples, the processor 2510 in node 2500 is used to execute a computer program or instruction 2521 stored in memory 2520, and to perform the following operations:

向第一节点发送条件切换信息,条件切换信息用于配置第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。Send condition switching information to the first node. The condition switching information is used to configure the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch conditions.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第一节点、第二节点和第三节点,本实施例通过条件切换信息告知第一节点对第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。这样,通过第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换,实现第一节点的第一功能单元的条件切换和第二功能单元的条件切换一起执行同一套切换流程,从而有利于减少信令开销、降低资源开销、缩短移动中断时间以及提高切换效率,实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the first, second, and third nodes in a frequently moving network system, this embodiment informs the first node to perform conditional handover of its first and second functional units through conditional handover information. In this way, by performing conditional handover of the first and second functional units of the first node, the conditional handover of the first and second functional units of the first node is executed together using the same handover process. This helps to reduce signaling overhead, lower resource consumption, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thereby achieving efficient mobility management.

在一些可能的示例中,节点2500中的处理器2510用于执行存储器2520中存储的计算机程序或指令2521,执行以下操作:In some possible examples, the processor 2510 in node 2500 is used to execute a computer program or instruction 2521 stored in memory 2520, and to perform the following operations:

发送节点驻留重选信息,节点驻留重选信息包括以下至少一项:类型信息、覆盖信息、路径信息、或者有效信息;Send node relocation information, which includes at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or valid information;

类型信息用于指示第二节点的类型;Type information is used to indicate the type of the second node;

覆盖信息用于指示第二节点的服务覆盖;Coverage information is used to indicate the service coverage of the second node;

路径信息用于指示第二节点的传输路径;Path information is used to indicate the transmission path of the second node;

有效信息用于指示第二节点的F1接口有效时间。The valid information is used to indicate the validity period of the F1 interface of the second node.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第一节点和第二节点,当第一节点驻留到第二节点时,本实施例通过节点驻留重选信息辅助第一节点对第二节点进行重选,实现频繁移动网络系统下的节点驻留重选,以及实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the first node and the second node in a frequent mobility network system, when the first node camps on the second node, this embodiment assists the first node in reselecting the second node through node camp reselection information, thereby realizing node camp reselection in a frequent mobility network system and achieving efficient mobility management.

在一些可能的示例中,节点2500中的处理器2510用于执行存储器2520中存储的计算机程序或指令2521,执行以下操作:In some possible examples, the processor 2510 in node 2500 is used to execute a computer program or instruction 2521 stored in memory 2520, and to perform the following operations:

接收来自第二节点的切换请求信息,切换请求信息用于请求将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点;Receive a switching request message from the second node. The switching request message is used to request that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node be switched from the second node to the third node.

向第二节点发送切换响应信息,切换响应信息用于指示准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点。A handover response message is sent to the second node. The handover response message is used to indicate that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node are permitted to switch from the second node to the third node.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第一节点、第二节点和第三节点,本实施例的第二节点可以判决是否需要对第一节点进行接入切换。当第二节点决策需要将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点时,第二节点通过切换请求信息向第三节点请求将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,以便第三节点执行切换准入控制。这样,通过第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元从第二节点切换到第三节点,实现第一节点的第一功能单元的接入切换和第二功能单元的接入切换一起执行同一套切换流程,从而有利于减少信令开销、降低资源开销、缩短移动中断时间以及提高切换效率,实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the first, second, and third nodes in a frequently moving network system, the second node in this embodiment can determine whether an access handover to the first node is necessary. When the second node decides that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to be switched from the second node to the third node, the second node requests the third node to switch the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node through a handover request message, so that the third node can perform handover admission control. In this way, by switching the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node from the second node to the third node, the access handover of the first functional unit and the access handover of the second functional unit of the first node are performed together using the same handover process, which helps to reduce signaling overhead, reduce resource overhead, shorten mobility interruption time, and improve handover efficiency, thereby achieving efficient mobility management.

在一些可能的示例中,节点2500中的处理器2510用于执行存储器2520中存储的计算机程序或指令2521,执行以下操作:In some possible examples, the processor 2510 in node 2500 is used to execute a computer program or instruction 2521 stored in memory 2520, and to perform the following operations:

接收来自第二节点的条件切换请求信息,条件切换请求信息用于请求第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换;Receive condition switching request information from the second node. The condition switching request information is used to request the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.

向第二节点发送条件切换响应信息,条件切换响应信息用于指示准许第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。Send a condition switching response message to the second node. The condition switching response message is used to instruct the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第一节点、第二节点和第三节点,本实施例的第二节点可以判决是否需要对第一节点进行条件切换。当第二节点决策需要将第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换时,第二节点通过条件切换请求信息向第三节点请求第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换,以便第三节点执行条件切换准入控制。这样,通过第一节点的第一功能单元和第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换,实现第一节点的第一功能单元的条件切换和第二功能单元的条件切换一起执行同一套切换流程,从而有利于减少信令开销、降低资源开销、缩短移动中断时间以及提高切换效率,实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the first, second, and third nodes in a frequently moving network system, the second node in this embodiment can determine whether a conditional handover of the first node is necessary. When the second node decides that a conditional handover of the first node's first and second functional units is required, the second node requests the third node to perform the conditional handover of the first node's first and second functional units through a conditional handover request message, so that the third node can execute conditional handover admission control. In this way, by performing a conditional handover of the first node's first and second functional units, the conditional handover of the first node's first and second functional units can be executed together using the same handover process, thereby reducing signaling overhead, reducing resource overhead, shortening mobility interruption time, and improving handover efficiency, achieving efficient mobility management.

需要说明的是,各个操作的具体实现可以采用上述所示的方法实施例的相应描述,节点2500可以用于执行本实施例上述方法实施例,对此不再赘述。It should be noted that the specific implementation of each operation can adopt the corresponding description of the method embodiment shown above. Node 2500 can be used to execute the method embodiment described above in this embodiment, and will not be described again here.

下面对本实施例的一种终端设备的结构进行示例说明。The structure of a terminal device in this embodiment is illustrated below.

请参阅图26,图26是本申请实施例的一种终端设备的结构示意图。其中,终端设备2600可以包括处理器2610、存储器2620以及用于连接处理器2610和存储器2620的通信总线。Please refer to Figure 26, which is a schematic diagram of the structure of a terminal device according to an embodiment of this application. The terminal device 2600 may include a processor 2610, a memory 2620, and a communication bus for connecting the processor 2610 and the memory 2620.

可选的,存储器2620包括但不限于是随机存储记忆体(random access memory,RAM)、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory,EPROM)或便携式只读存储器(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM),存储器2620用于存储SMF2600所执行的程序代码和所传输的数据。Optionally, the memory 2620 may include, but is not limited to, random access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), or compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM). The memory 2620 is used to store the program code executed by the SMF2600 and the data transmitted.

可选的,终端设备2600还包括通信接口,其用于接收和发送数据。Optionally, the terminal device 2600 also includes a communication interface for receiving and sending data.

可选的,终端设备2600可以为上述的第一SMF。Optionally, the terminal device 2600 can be the first SMF mentioned above.

可选的,处理器2610可以是一个或多个CPU,在处理器2610是一个CPU的情况下,该CPU可以是单核CPU,也可以是多核CPU。Optionally, the processor 2610 can be one or more CPUs. If the processor 2610 is a CPU, the CPU can be a single-core CPU or a multi-core CPU.

可选的,处理器2610可以为基带芯片、芯片、CPU、通用处理器、DSP、ASIC、FPGA或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。Optionally, the processor 2610 can be a baseband chip, chip, CPU, general-purpose processor, DSP, ASIC, FPGA or other programmable logic device, transistor logic device, hardware component or any combination thereof.

具体实现时,终端设备2600中的处理器2610用于执行存储器2620中存储的计算机程序或指令2621,执行以下操作:In specific implementation, the processor 2610 in the terminal device 2600 executes the computer program or instruction 2621 stored in the memory 2620 to perform the following operations:

接收节点驻留重选信息,节点驻留重选信息用于指示以下至少一项:类型信息、覆盖信息、路径信息、或者有效信息;类型信息用于指示第二节点的类型,第二节点用于提供核心网连接功能;覆盖信息用于指示第二节点的服务覆盖;路径信息用于指示第二节点的传输路径;有效信息用于指示第二节点的F1接口有效时间。Receive node reselection information, which indicates at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or validity information; type information indicates the type of the second node, which is used to provide core network connectivity functions; coverage information indicates the service coverage of the second node; path information indicates the transmission path of the second node; validity information indicates the validity period of the F1 interface of the second node.

可见,对于频繁移动网络系统中的第二节点和终端设备,当终端设备驻留到第二节点时,本实施例通过节点驻留重选信息辅助终端设备对第二节点进行重选,实现频繁移动网络系统下的节点驻留重选,以及实现高效移动性管理。As can be seen, for the second node and terminal device in a frequent mobility network system, when the terminal device camps on the second node, this embodiment assists the terminal device in reselecting the second node through node camping reselection information, thereby realizing node camping reselection in a frequent mobility network system and achieving efficient mobility management.

需要说明的是,各个操作的具体实现可以采用上述所示的方法实施例的相应描述,终端设备2600可以用于执行本实施例上述方法实施例,对此不再赘述。It should be noted that the specific implementation of each operation can adopt the corresponding description of the method embodiment shown above. The terminal device 2600 can be used to execute the method embodiment described above in this embodiment, and will not be described again.

下面对本实施例的其他相关内容进行示例说明。The following provides examples illustrating other relevant aspects of this embodiment.

本申请实施例还提供了一种芯片,包括处理器、存储器及存储在该存储器上的计算机程序或指令,其中,该处理器执行该计算机程序或指令以实现上述方法实施例所描述的步骤。This application also provides a chip, including a processor, a memory, and a computer program or instructions stored in the memory, wherein the processor executes the computer program or instructions to implement the steps described in the above method embodiments.

本申请实施例还提供了一种芯片模组,包括收发组件和芯片,该芯片包括处理器、存储器及存储在该存储器上的计算机程序或指令,其中,该处理器执行该计算机程序或指令以实现上述方法实施例所描述的步骤。This application also provides a chip module, including a transceiver component and a chip. The chip includes a processor, a memory, and a computer program or instructions stored in the memory, wherein the processor executes the computer program or instructions to implement the steps described in the above method embodiments.

本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,其存储有计算机程序或指令,该计算机程序或指令被执行时实现上述方法实施例所描述的步骤。This application also provides a computer-readable storage medium storing a computer program or instructions that, when executed, implement the steps described in the above method embodiments.

本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品,包括计算机程序或指令,该计算机程序或指令被执行时实现上述方法实施例所描述的步骤。This application also provides a computer program product, including a computer program or instructions that, when executed, implement the steps described in the above method embodiments.

需要说明的是,对于上述的各个实施例,为了简单描述,将其都表述为一系列的动作组合。本领域技术人员应该知悉,本申请不受所描述的动作顺序的限制,因为本申请实施例中的某些步骤可以采用其他顺序或者同时进行。另外,本领域技术人员也应该知悉,说明书中所描述的实施例均属于优选实施例,所涉及的动作、步骤、模块或单元等并不一定是本申请实施例所必须的。It should be noted that, for the sake of simplicity, the above embodiments are all described as a series of actions. Those skilled in the art should understand that this application is not limited to the described order of actions, as some steps in the embodiments of this application can be performed in other orders or simultaneously. Furthermore, those skilled in the art should also understand that the embodiments described in the specification are preferred embodiments, and the actions, steps, modules, or units involved are not necessarily essential to the embodiments of this application.

在上述实施例中,本申请实施例对各个实施例的描述都各有侧重,某个实施例中没有详述的部分,可以参见其他实施例的相关描述。In the above embodiments, the descriptions of each embodiment in this application have different focuses. For parts not described in detail in a certain embodiment, please refer to the relevant descriptions in other embodiments.

本申请实施例所描述的方法或者算法的步骤可以以硬件的方式来实现,也可以是由处理器执行软件指令的方式来实现。软件指令可以由相应的软件模块组成,软件模块可以被存放于RAM、闪存、ROM、EPROM、电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)、寄存器、硬盘、移动硬盘、只读光盘(CD-ROM)或者本领域熟知的任何其它形式的存储介质中。一种示例性的存储介质耦合至处理器,从而使处理器能够从该存储介质读取信息,且可向该存储介质写入信息。当然,存储介质也可以是处理器的组成部分。处理器和存储介质可以位于ASIC中。另外,该ASIC可以位于终端设备或管理设备中。当然,处理器和存储介质也可以作为分立组件存在于终端设备或管理设备中。The steps of the methods or algorithms described in the embodiments of this application can be implemented in hardware or by a processor executing software instructions. The software instructions can consist of corresponding software modules, which can be stored in RAM, flash memory, ROM, EPROM, electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), registers, hard disk, portable hard disk, read-only optical disk (CD-ROM), or any other form of storage medium well known in the art. An exemplary storage medium is coupled to a processor, enabling the processor to read information from and write information to the storage medium. Of course, the storage medium can also be a component of the processor. The processor and storage medium can reside in an ASIC. Additionally, the ASIC can reside in a terminal device or management device. Alternatively, the processor and storage medium can exist as discrete components in the terminal device or management device.

本领域技术人员应该可以意识到,在上述一个或多个示例中,本申请实施例所描述的功能可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。该计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行该计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。该计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。该计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输。例如,该计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。该计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。该可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,数字视频光盘(digital video disc,DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如,固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。Those skilled in the art will recognize that, in one or more of the examples above, the functions described in the embodiments of this application can be implemented, in whole or in part, by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented in software, it can be implemented, in whole or in part, as a computer program product. This computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When these computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of this application are generated. The computer can be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another. For example, the computer instructions can be transmitted from one website, computer, server, or data center to another via wired (e.g., coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (e.g., infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means. The computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium accessible to a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center that integrates one or more available media. The available media can be magnetic media (e.g., floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (e.g., digital video discs (DVDs)), or semiconductor media (e.g., solid-state drives (SSDs)).

上述实施例中描述的各个装置、产品包含的各个模块/单元,其可以是软件模块/单元,也可以是硬件模块/单元,或者也可以部分是软件模块/单元,部分是硬件模块/单元。例如,对于应用于或集成于芯片的各个装置、产品,其包含的各个模块/单元可以都采用电路等硬件的方式实现,或者,至少部分模块/单元可以采用软件程序的方式实现,该软件程序运行于芯片内部集成的处理器,剩余的(如果有)部分模块/单元可以采用电路等硬件方式实现;对于应用于或集成于芯片模组的各个装置、产品,其包含的各个模块/单元可以都采用电路等硬件的方式实现,不同的模块/单元可以位于芯片模组的同一组件(例如芯片、电路模块等)或者不同组件中,或者,至少部分模块/单元可以采用软件程序的方式实现,该软件程序运行于芯片模组内部集成的处理器,剩余的(如果有)部分模块/单元可以采用电路等硬件方式实现;对于应用于或集成于终端设备的各个装置、产品,其包含的各个模块/单元可以都采用电路等硬件的方式实现,不同的模块/单元可以位于终端设备内同一组件(例如,芯片、电路模块等)或者不同组件中,或者,至少部分模块/单元可以采用软件程序的方式实现,该软件程序运行于终端设备内部集成的处理器,剩余的(如果有)部分模块/单元可以采用电路等硬件方式实现。The modules/units included in the various devices and products described in the above embodiments can be software modules/units, hardware modules/units, or a combination of both. For example, for devices and products applied to or integrated into a chip, all modules/units can be implemented using hardware methods such as circuits, or at least some modules/units can be implemented using software programs that run on a processor integrated within the chip, while the remaining (if any) modules/units can be implemented using hardware methods such as circuits. For devices and products applied to or integrated into a chip module, all modules/units can be implemented using hardware methods such as circuits. Different modules/units can be located in the same component (e.g., chip, circuit module, etc.) or different components of the chip module, or at least some modules/units can be implemented using hardware methods such as circuits. The implementation is achieved through a software program that runs on a processor integrated within the chip module. The remaining modules/units (if any) can be implemented using hardware methods such as circuits. For various devices and products applied to or integrated into terminal equipment, each of their modules/units can be implemented using hardware methods such as circuits. Different modules/units can be located in the same component (e.g., chip, circuit module, etc.) or different components within the terminal equipment. Alternatively, at least some modules/units can be implemented using a software program that runs on a processor integrated within the terminal equipment, while the remaining modules/units (if any) can be implemented using hardware methods such as circuits.

以上所述的具体实施方式,对本申请实施例的目的、技术方案和有益效果进行了进一步详细说明,所应理解的是,以上所述仅为本申请实施例的具体实施方式而已,并不用于限定本申请实施例的保护范围,凡在本申请实施例的技术方案的基础之上,所做的任何修改、等同替换、改进等,均应包括在本申请实施例的保护范围之内。The specific embodiments described above further illustrate the purpose, technical solution, and beneficial effects of the embodiments of this application. It should be understood that the above descriptions are merely specific embodiments of the embodiments of this application and are not intended to limit the protection scope of the embodiments of this application. Any modifications, equivalent substitutions, improvements, etc., made on the basis of the technical solutions of the embodiments of this application should be included within the protection scope of the embodiments of this application.

Claims (30)

一种通信方法,其特征在于,应用于第一节点,所述第一节点用于提供回传接入功能;所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that it is applied to a first node, the first node being used to provide backhaul access functionality; the method includes: 接收来自第二节点的切换信息,所述切换信息用于指示所述第一节点的第一功能单元和所述第一节点的第二功能单元从所述第二节点切换到第三节点;其中,所述第二节点和所述第三节点用于提供核心网连接功能,所述第一节点的第一功能单元用于提供回传功能,所述第一节点的第二功能单元用于提供接入功能。The system receives handover information from a second node, which instructs the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node. The second node and the third node are used to provide core network connectivity, the first functional unit of the first node is used to provide backhaul functionality, and the second functional unit of the first node is used to provide access functionality. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述切换信息包括以下至少一项:第一信息、第二信息、第三信息、第四信息、第五信息或者第六信息;The method according to claim 1, wherein the switching information includes at least one of the following: first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information; 所述第一信息用于配置所述第一节点的第一功能单元和所述第一节点的第二功能单元切换到所述第三节点所需的回传适配协议地址;The first information is used to configure the backhaul adaptation protocol address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; 所述第二信息用于配置所述第二节点到所述第三节点的传输路径;The second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; 所述第三信息用于配置在所述第二节点到所述第三节点的传输路径上的资源;The third information is used to configure resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; 所述第四信息用于配置回程无线电链路控制;The fourth piece of information is used to configure backhaul radio link control; 所述第五信息用于配置F1应用协议;The fifth piece of information is used to configure the F1 application protocol; 所述第六信息用于配置所述第一节点的第二功能单元。The sixth piece of information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述第一节点的第一功能单元和所述第一节点的第二功能单元从所述第二节点切换到所述第三节点,则The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that, if the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node switch from the second node to the third node, then 所述第一节点所服务的终端设备或者子节点从所述第二节点切换到第四节点,所述第四节点用于提供核心网连接功能或者所述第四节点用于提供回传接入功能。The terminal device or sub-node served by the first node switches from the second node to the fourth node, whereby the fourth node is used to provide core network connectivity or backhaul access functionality. 根据权利要求1-3任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述接收来自第二节点的切换信息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-3, characterized in that, before receiving the handover information from the second node, the method further comprises: 向所述第二节点发送能力指示信息,所述能力指示信息用于指示所述第一节点支持或者不支持所述第一节点的第一功能单元和/或所述第一节点的第二功能单元进行接入切换。The first node sends capability indication information to the second node, the capability indication information being used to indicate whether the first node supports or does not support the first functional unit and/or the second functional unit of the first node for access switching. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,应用于第二节点,所述第二节点用于提供核心网连接功能;所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that it is applied to a second node, the second node being used to provide core network connectivity functions; the method includes: 向第一节点发送切换信息,所述切换信息用于指示所述第一节点的第一功能单元和所述第一节点的第二功能单元从所述第二节点切换到第三节点;Send switching information to the first node, the switching information being used to instruct the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node; 其中,所述第三节点用于提供核心网连接功能,所述第一节点的第一功能单元用于提供回传功能,所述第一节点的第二功能单元用于提供接入功能。The third node is used to provide core network connectivity, the first functional unit of the first node is used to provide backhaul functionality, and the second functional unit of the first node is used to provide access functionality. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述向第一节点发送切换信息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 5, characterized in that, before sending the handover information to the first node, the method further includes: 向所述第三节点发送切换请求信息,所述切换请求信息用于请求将所述第一节点的第一功能单元和所述第一节点的第二功能单元从所述第二节点切换到所述第三节点;Send a switching request message to the third node, the switching request message being used to request the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to be switched from the second node to the third node; 接收来自所述第三节点的切换响应信息,所述切换响应信息用于指示准许所述第一节点的第一功能单元和所述第一节点的第二功能单元从所述第二节点切换到所述第三节点。The system receives a handover response information from the third node, which instructs the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch from the second node to the third node. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述向第一节点发送切换信息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 5, characterized in that, before sending the handover information to the first node, the method further includes: 接收来自所述第一节点的能力指示信息,所述能力指示信息用于指示所述第一节点支持或者不支持所述第一节点的第一功能单元和/或所述第一节点的第二功能单元进行接入切换。The first node receives capability indication information, which is used to indicate whether the first node supports or does not support the first functional unit and/or the second functional unit of the first node for access switching. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述切换请求信息包括第一标识信息和第二标识信息;According to the method of claim 6, the switching request information includes first identification information and second identification information; 所述第一标识信息用于指示所述第一节点的第一功能单元的标识,所述第二标识信息用于指示所述第一节点的第二功能单元的标识。The first identification information is used to indicate the identification of the first functional unit of the first node, and the second identification information is used to indicate the identification of the second functional unit of the first node. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述切换响应信息包括以下至少一项:第一信息、第二信息、第三信息、第四信息、第五信息、或者第六信息;According to the method of claim 6, the switching response information includes at least one of the following: first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information; 所述第一信息用于配置所述第一节点的第一功能单元和所述第一节点的第二功能单元切换到所述第三节点所需的回传适配协议地址;The first information is used to configure the backhaul adaptation protocol address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; 所述第二信息用于配置所述第二节点到所述第三节点的传输路径;The second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; 所述第三信息用于配置在所述第二节点到所述第三节点的传输路径上的资源;The third information is used to configure resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; 所述第四信息用于配置回程无线电链路控制;The fourth piece of information is used to configure backhaul radio link control; 所述第五信息用于配置F1应用协议;The fifth piece of information is used to configure the F1 application protocol; 所述第六信息用于配置所述第一节点的第二功能单元。The sixth piece of information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,应用于第一节点,所述第一节点用于提供回传接入功能;所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that it is applied to a first node, the first node being used to provide backhaul access functionality; the method includes: 接收来自第二节点的条件切换信息,所述条件切换信息用于配置所述第一节点的第一功能单元和所述第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换;Receive condition switching information from the second node, the condition switching information being used to configure the first functional unit of the first node and the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching; 其中,所述第二节点用于提供核心网连接功能,所述第一节点的第一功能单元用于提供回传功能,所述第一节点的第二功能单元用于提供接入功能。The second node is used to provide core network connectivity, the first functional unit of the first node is used to provide backhaul functionality, and the second functional unit of the first node is used to provide access functionality. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述条件切换信息包括以下至少一项:切换条件信息、第一信息、第二信息、第三信息、第四信息、第五信息或者第六信息;According to the method of claim 10, the condition switching information includes at least one of the following: switching condition information, first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information; 所述切换条件信息用于指示所述第一节点的第一功能单元和所述第一节点的第二功能单元从所述第二节点切换到第三节点所需满足的条件,所述第三节点用于提供核心网连接功能;The switching condition information is used to indicate the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to meet to switch from the second node to the third node, wherein the third node is used to provide core network connectivity functions. 所述第一信息用于配置所述第一节点的第一功能单元和所述第一节点的第二功能单元切换到所述第三节点所需的回传适配协议地址;The first information is used to configure the backhaul adaptation protocol address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; 所述第二信息用于配置所述第二节点到所述第三节点的传输路径;The second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; 所述第三信息用于配置在所述第二节点到所述第三节点的传输路径上的资源;The third information is used to configure resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; 所述第四信息用于配置回程无线电链路控制;The fourth piece of information is used to configure backhaul radio link control; 所述第五信息用于配置F1应用协议;The fifth piece of information is used to configure the F1 application protocol; 所述第六信息用于配置所述第一节点的第二功能单元。The sixth piece of information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述切换条件信息所指示的条件包括:According to the method of claim 11, the conditions indicated by the switching condition information include: 与所述第二节点的参考位置之间的距离大于第一距离门限,和/或与所述第三节点的参考位置之间的距离小于第二距离门限;和/或,The distance between the reference position of the second node and the reference position of the third node is greater than a first distance threshold, and/or the distance between the reference position of the third node and the reference position of the third node is less than a second distance threshold; and/or, 到所述第二节点的传输路径上有至少一个中继节点的回程无线电链路控制有效时间小于有效时间门限。The backhaul radio link control validity time of at least one relay node on the transmission path to the second node is less than the validity time threshold. 根据权利要求11或12所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述接收来自第二节点的条件切换命令之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 11 or 12, characterized in that, after receiving the condition switching command from the second node, the method further includes: 若满足所述切换条件信息所指示的条件,则将所述第一节点的第一功能单元和所述第一节点的第二功能单元从所述第二节点切换到所述第三节点。If the conditions indicated by the switching condition information are met, then the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node are switched from the second node to the third node. 根据权利要求10-13任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述接收来自第二节点的条件切换信息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 10-13, characterized in that, before receiving condition switching information from the second node, the method further comprises: 向所述第二节点发送能力指示信息,所述能力指示信息用于指示所述第一节点支持或者不支持所述第一节点的第一功能单元和/或所述第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。The first node sends capability indication information to the second node, the capability indication information being used to instruct the first node to support or not support condition switching of the first functional unit and/or the second functional unit of the first node. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,应用于第二节点,所述第二节点用于提供核心网连接功能;所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that it is applied to a second node, the second node being used to provide core network connectivity functions; the method includes: 向第一节点发送条件切换信息,所述条件切换信息用于配置所述第一节点的第一功能单元和所述第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换;Send condition switching information to the first node, the condition switching information being used to configure the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching; 其中,所述第一节点的第一功能单元用于提供回传功能,所述第一节点的第二功能单元用于提供接入功能。The first functional unit of the first node is used to provide backhaul functionality, and the second functional unit of the first node is used to provide access functionality. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述向第一节点发送条件切换信息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 15, characterized in that, before sending condition switching information to the first node, the method further includes: 向第三节点发送条件切换请求信息,所述条件切换请求信息用于请求所述第一节点的第一功能单元和所述第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换,所述第三节点用于提供核心网连接功能;Send a condition switching request message to the third node. The condition switching request message is used to request the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching. The third node is used to provide core network connection function. 接收来自所述第三节点的条件切换响应信息,所述条件切换响应信息用于指示准许所述第一节点的第一功能单元和所述第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。The condition switching response information is received from the third node, which is used to instruct the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to perform condition switching. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述向第一节点发送条件切换信息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 15, characterized in that, before sending condition switching information to the first node, the method further includes: 接收来自所述第一节点的能力指示信息,所述能力指示信息用于指示所述第一节点支持或者不支持所述第一节点的第一功能单元和/或所述第一节点的第二功能单元进行条件切换。The first node receives capability indication information, which is used to instruct the first node to support or not support condition switching of the first functional unit and/or the second functional unit of the first node. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述条件切换请求信息包括第一标识信息和第二标识信息;According to the method of claim 16, the condition switching request information includes first identification information and second identification information; 所述第一标识信息用于指示所述第一节点的第一功能单元的标识,所述第二标识信息用于指示所述第一节点的第二功能单元的标识。The first identification information is used to indicate the identification of the first functional unit of the first node, and the second identification information is used to indicate the identification of the second functional unit of the first node. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述条件切换响应信息包括以下至少一项:切换条件信息、第一信息、第二信息、第三信息、第四信息、第五信息、或者第六信息;According to the method of claim 16, the condition switching response information includes at least one of the following: switching condition information, first information, second information, third information, fourth information, fifth information, or sixth information; 所述切换条件信息用于指示所述第一节点的第一功能单元和所述第一节点的第二功能单元从所述第二节点切换到所述第三节点所需满足的条件;The switching condition information is used to indicate the conditions that the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node need to meet to switch from the second node to the third node; 所述第一信息用于配置所述第一节点的第一功能单元和所述第一节点的第二功能单元切换到所述第三节点所需的回传适配协议地址;The first information is used to configure the backhaul adaptation protocol address required for the first functional unit and the second functional unit of the first node to switch to the third node; 所述第二信息用于配置所述第二节点到所述第三节点的传输路径;The second information is used to configure the transmission path from the second node to the third node; 所述第三信息用于配置在所述第二节点到所述第三节点的传输路径上的资源;The third information is used to configure resources on the transmission path from the second node to the third node; 所述第四信息用于配置回程无线电链路控制;The fourth piece of information is used to configure backhaul radio link control; 所述第五信息用于配置F1应用协议;或者,The fifth piece of information is used to configure the F1 application protocol; or, 所述第六信息用于配置所述第一节点的第二功能单元。The sixth piece of information is used to configure the second functional unit of the first node. 根据权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述切换条件信息所指示的条件包括:The method according to claim 19, wherein the conditions indicated by the switching condition information include: 与所述第二节点的参考位置之间的距离大于第一距离门限,和/或与所述第三节点的参考位置之间的距离小于第二距离门限;或者,The distance between the reference position of the second node and the reference position of the third node is greater than a first distance threshold, and/or the distance between the reference position of the third node and the reference position of the third node is less than a second distance threshold; or, 到所述第二节点的传输路径上有至少一个中继节点的回程无线电链路控制有效时间小于有效时间门限。The backhaul radio link control validity time of at least one relay node on the transmission path to the second node is less than the validity time threshold. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,应用于第一节点,所述第一节点用于提供回传接入功能;所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that it is applied to a first node, the first node being used to provide backhaul access functionality; the method includes: 接收节点驻留重选信息,所述节点驻留重选信息用于指示以下至少一项:类型信息、覆盖信息、路径信息、或者有效信息;Receive node residency reselection information, wherein the node residency reselection information is used to indicate at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or valid information; 所述类型信息用于指示第二节点的类型,所述第二节点用于提供核心网连接功能;The type information is used to indicate the type of the second node, which is used to provide core network connectivity functions. 所述覆盖信息用于指示所述第二节点的服务覆盖;The coverage information is used to indicate the service coverage of the second node; 所述路径信息用于指示所述第二节点的传输路径;The path information is used to indicate the transmission path of the second node; 所述有效信息用于指示所述第二节点的F1接口有效时间。The valid information is used to indicate the validity period of the F1 interface of the second node. 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述接收节点驻留重选信息之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 21, characterized in that, after receiving the node reselection information, the method further includes: 向所述第一节点所服务的子节点或者终端设备发送所述节点驻留重选信息。Send the node relocation information to the child nodes or terminal devices served by the first node. 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述接收节点驻留重选信息之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 21, characterized in that, after receiving the node reselection information, the method further includes: 根据所述节点驻留重选信息确定第三节点,所述第三节点用于提供核心网连接功能。A third node is determined based on the node relocation information, and the third node is used to provide core network connectivity functions. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,应用于第二节点,所述第二节点用于提供核心网连接功能;所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that it is applied to a second node, the second node being used to provide core network connectivity functions; the method includes: 发送节点驻留重选信息,所述节点驻留重选信息包括以下至少一项:类型信息、覆盖信息、路径信息、或者有效信息;Send node relocation information, wherein the node relocation information includes at least one of the following: type information, coverage information, path information, or valid information; 所述类型信息用于指示所述第二节点的类型;The type information is used to indicate the type of the second node; 所述覆盖信息用于指示所述第二节点的服务覆盖;The coverage information is used to indicate the service coverage of the second node; 所述路径信息用于指示所述第二节点的传输路径;The path information is used to indicate the transmission path of the second node; 所述有效信息用于指示所述第二节点的F1接口有效时间。The valid information is used to indicate the validity period of the F1 interface of the second node. 根据权利要求21-24任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述覆盖信息包括所述第二节点的参考位置和距离门限、和/或所述第二节点的服务有效时间信息和服务有效时间门限;所述第二节点的覆盖范围为与所述第二节点的参考位置之间的距离小于所述距离门限所在的范围;或者,The method according to any one of claims 21-24, characterized in that the coverage information includes the reference location and distance threshold of the second node, and/or the service validity time information and service validity time threshold of the second node; the coverage range of the second node is the range where the distance between it and the reference location of the second node is less than the distance threshold; or, 所述覆盖信息包括以下至少一项:所述第二节点的卫星星历信息、所述第二节点的服务有效时间信息和服务有效时间门限、所述第二节点的覆盖区域信息、或者所述第二节点所关联的核心网锚点的参考位置信息。The coverage information includes at least one of the following: satellite ephemeris information of the second node, service validity time information and service validity time threshold of the second node, coverage area information of the second node, or reference location information of the core network anchor point associated with the second node. 根据权利要求21-24任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述路径信息包括以下至少一项:第一跳数信息、第二跳数信息、第一时延信息、第二时延信息、第一距离信息、或者第二距离信息;The method according to any one of claims 21-24, wherein the path information includes at least one of the following: first hop count information, second hop count information, first delay information, second delay information, first distance information, or second distance information; 所述第一跳数信息用于指示在所述第二节点所服务的节点到所述第二节点的传输路径上的跳数;The first hop count information is used to indicate the number of hops on the transmission path from the node served by the second node to the second node; 所述第二跳数信息用于指示在所述第二节点所服务的终端设备到所述第二节点的传输路径上的跳数;The second hop count information is used to indicate the number of hops on the transmission path from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node; 所述第一时延信息用于指示从所述第二节点所服务的节点到所述第二节点的传输时延;The first delay information is used to indicate the transmission delay from the node served by the second node to the second node; 所述第二时延信息用于指示从所述第二节点所服务的终端设备到所述第二节点的传输时延;The second delay information is used to indicate the transmission delay from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node; 所述第一距离信息用于指示从所述第二节点所服务的节点到所述第二节点的距离;The first distance information is used to indicate the distance from the node served by the second node to the second node; 所述第二距离信息用于指示从所述第二节点所服务的终端设备到所述第二节点的距离。The second distance information is used to indicate the distance from the terminal device served by the second node to the second node. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理单元,所述处理单元用于执行权利要求1-4、10-14、21-23、或者25-26任一项所述方法的步骤,或者所述处理单元用于执行权利要求5-9、15-20、24-26任一项所述方法的步骤。A communication device, characterized in that it includes a processing unit, the processing unit being configured to perform the steps of the method according to any one of claims 1-4, 10-14, 21-23, or 25-26, or the processing unit being configured to perform the steps of the method according to any one of claims 5-9, 15-20, or 24-26. 一种通信装置,包括处理器、存储器及存储在所述存储器上的计算机程序或指令,其特征在于,所述处理器执行所述计算机程序或指令以实现权利要求1-4、10-14、21-23、或者25-26任一项所述方法的步骤,或者所述处理器执行所述计算机程序或指令以实现权利要求5-9、15-20、24-26任一项所述方法的步骤。A communication device includes a processor, a memory, and a computer program or instructions stored in the memory, characterized in that the processor executes the computer program or instructions to implement the steps of the method according to any one of claims 1-4, 10-14, 21-23, or 25-26, or the processor executes the computer program or instructions to implement the steps of the method according to any one of claims 5-9, 15-20, or 24-26. 一种芯片,包括处理器,其特征在于,所述处理器执行权利要求1-26任一项所述方法的步骤。A chip, comprising a processor, characterized in that the processor performs the steps of the method according to any one of claims 1-26. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,其存储有计算机程序或指令,所述计算机程序或指令被执行时权利要求1-26任一项所述方法的步骤被执行。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that it stores a computer program or instructions, wherein when the computer program or instructions are executed, the steps of the method according to any one of claims 1-26 are performed.
PCT/CN2025/091850 2024-04-29 2025-04-28 Communication method and apparatus Pending WO2025228342A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202410537790.0 2024-04-29
CN202410537790.0A CN120881675A (en) 2024-04-29 2024-04-29 Communication method and device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025228342A1 true WO2025228342A1 (en) 2025-11-06

Family

ID=97459748

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2025/091850 Pending WO2025228342A1 (en) 2024-04-29 2025-04-28 Communication method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN120881675A (en)
WO (1) WO2025228342A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111757362A (en) * 2019-03-28 2020-10-09 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Link state notification and link processing method and device
CN113747521A (en) * 2020-05-29 2021-12-03 维沃移动通信有限公司 Network switching method, device, communication equipment and system
WO2022015230A1 (en) * 2020-07-17 2022-01-20 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Inter-cu migration in iab networkinter-cu migration in iab network
CN114175733A (en) * 2019-08-13 2022-03-11 高通股份有限公司 Selecting neighbor nodes in a wireless multi-hop network using cost parameters
CN115119269A (en) * 2021-03-17 2022-09-27 维沃移动通信有限公司 Switching method and device of self-return network and network side equipment

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111757362A (en) * 2019-03-28 2020-10-09 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Link state notification and link processing method and device
CN114175733A (en) * 2019-08-13 2022-03-11 高通股份有限公司 Selecting neighbor nodes in a wireless multi-hop network using cost parameters
CN113747521A (en) * 2020-05-29 2021-12-03 维沃移动通信有限公司 Network switching method, device, communication equipment and system
WO2022015230A1 (en) * 2020-07-17 2022-01-20 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Inter-cu migration in iab networkinter-cu migration in iab network
CN115119269A (en) * 2021-03-17 2022-09-27 维沃移动通信有限公司 Switching method and device of self-return network and network side equipment

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN120881675A (en) 2025-10-31

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN116033502B (en) Methods and devices for wireless communications
US20220217602A1 (en) Cell reselection method and apparatus
US20230164685A1 (en) Access Control Method and Apparatus for Terminal Device
CN116250277B (en) Communication method and device
WO2023071716A1 (en) Satellite communication method and satellite communication device
CN114175713A (en) Communication method and device
CN112073996A (en) Operator information updating method and device
WO2024221438A1 (en) Cell handover method, and terminal device and network device
CN115442746A (en) A beam tracking method, equipment, device and storage medium
CN118476272A (en) Communication method, terminal equipment and network equipment
WO2024255385A1 (en) Conditional handover method, communication node, and storage medium
CN116456415A (en) Communication method and device
WO2025025223A1 (en) Method and apparatus for wireless communication
US20240314882A1 (en) Communication method, terminal device, and network device
CN113785507B (en) Information processing method, communication equipment and satellite
CN118784403A (en) Communication method, device and computer readable storage medium
WO2024149376A1 (en) Mobility management method and communication apparatus
WO2025228342A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2024099263A1 (en) Device and method for use in non-terrestrial network
CN119316894A (en) A switching method and a communication device
CN118785288A (en) Communication method, network equipment, communication device and storage medium
WO2025228094A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
US20250386274A1 (en) Wireless communication method and terminal device
CN121056953A (en) Method and apparatus in a node for wireless communication
WO2025065390A1 (en) Method, apparatus and system for allocating control resources in non-terrestrial communication

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 25797463

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1